NATIONAL GROUND PENETRATING RADAR SERVICE, INC. MASTER SAFETY MANUAL

Transcription

1 NATIONAL GROUND PENETRATING RADAR SERVICE, INC. MASTER SAFETY MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Safety and Health Policy Statement II. AWAIR Safety Management Program Forms: General Hazard Assessment New Employee Safety Orientation Training List Training Attendance Roster (AWAIR) III. Accident Investigation and Reporting Safety Program Forms: Accident, Incident, or Near Miss Investigation Report Training Attendance Roster (Accident Investigation) IV. Aerial Lift Safety Program Forms: Aerial Lift Operator Checklist Aerial Lift Operator Evaluation Assessment Aerial Lift Operator Performance Requirements Aerial Lift Training Wallet Card Training Attendance Roster (Aerial Lifts) V. Back Safety in the Workplace Program Forms: Training Attendance Roster (Back Safety) VI. Blood and Bodily Fluids (Incidental) Exposure Safety Program Forms: Training Attendance Roster Blood and Bodily Fluids (Incidental) Exposure VII. Construction Safety Program Forms: Construction Safety Checklist Construction Safety Training Attendance Roster VIII. Contractor Safety Verification Safety Program Forms: Contractor/Contract-Employee Safety Training Requirements Contractor Safety Information Contractor Safety Inspection Report National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 1 of 389

2 IX. Crisis and Disaster Planning Safety Program Forms: Bomb Threat Checklist Disaster Program Template Earthquake Preparedness Evacuation/Relocation Procedure Training Attendance Roster (Crisis and Disaster Planning) X. Electrical [General] Safety Program Forms: Appliance Safety (Cord and Plug Equipment) Electrical Safety (General) Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster (Electrical Safety General) XI. Emergency Action, Evacuation, and Fire Prevention Safety Program Forms: Emergency Action Plan Exit and Egress (Life Safety) Requirements Fire Drill or Evacuation Assessment Fire Prevention Plan Monthly Fire Extinguisher Review Training Attendance Roster (Emergency Action) Training Attendance Roster (Fire Extinguisher) Types of Fire Protection Systems XII. Ergonomics and MSD Safety Program Forms: Ergonomic Office/Computer Safety Checklist Ergonomic Work Area Screening and Analysis Tool Program Assessment Tool Training Attendance Roster (Ergonomics) XIII. Fall Protection (Personal Fall Arrest System) Safety Program Forms: Fall Hazard Evaluation Fall Protection Equipment Inspection Checklist Fall Protection Program Assessment Fall Protection Requirements Example Chart Fall Protection Training Completion Certificate Fall Protection Wallet Card Fall Protection Written Procedure Training Attendance Roster (Fall Protection (PFAS)) XIV. First Aid and Emergency Medical Response Safety Program Forms: First Aid Kit Supply Requirements Training Attendance Roster (First Aid Basics) National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 2 of 389

3 XV. General Safety Awareness Program Forms: General Safety Rules for All Departments New Employee Safety Orientation Training Training Attendance Roster (General Safety) XVI. Hand and Portable Power Tool Safety Program Forms: Hand and Portable Power Tool Guarding and Safety Requirements Hand and Portable Power Tool Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster (Hand and Portable Power Tool) XVII. Laser Safety Program Forms: Authorized Laser Operator Record Laser Operating Procedure Laser Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster (Laser Safety) XVIII. Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Safety Program Forms: Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program Assessment Noise Exposure Computation and Rating Tables Text of Noise and Hearing Conservation Standard Training Attendance Roster (Noise and Hearing Conservation) XIX. Personal Protective Equipment Safety Program Forms: Certificate of Hazard Assessment Personal Protective Equipment Assessment Respirator Dust Mask Use Sign-off Training Attendance Roster (Personal Protective Equipment) XX. Portable Ladder Safety Program Forms: Ladder Safety Checklist Training Attendance Roster (Portable and Fixed Ladders and Mobile Stairs) XXI. Safe Driving and Vehicle/Fleet Safety Program Forms: Motor Vehicle Accident Report Safe Driving Vehicle Inspection Checklist Training Attendance Roster (Safe Driving) XXII. Safety Checklists Forms: Company Specific Corrective Actions Training Attendance Roster Safety Checklist [Construction Safety] Safety Checklist [Office] National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 3 of 389

4 XXIII. Scaffold Safety Program Forms: Training Attendance Roster (Scaffold Use) XXIV. Scissors Lifts Safety Program Forms: Scissors Lift Operator Daily Checklist Scissors Lift Operator Performance Evaluation Scissor Lift Training Wallet Card Training Attendance Roster (Scissor Lift Use) XXV. Stairway and Fixed-Ladder Industrial Safety Program Forms: Training Attendance Roster (Portable and Fixed Ladders and Mobile Stairs) XXVI. Walking and Working Surfaces Safety Program Forms: Walking and Working Surfaces Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster (Walking and Working Surfaces) XXVII. Working in Extreme Temperatures Safety Program Forms: Cold Related Injuries and Illnesses Heat Illness Prevention Plan (California required) Training Attendance Roster (Working In Temperature Extremes) National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 4 of 389

5 PROGRAM OVERVIEW A WORKPLACE ACCIDENT AND INJURY REDUCTION (AWAIR) SAFETY MANAGEMENT PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: MNOSHA OSHA General Duty Clause INTRODUCTION: Minnesota requires a written safety program be maintained to ensure that accidents are evaluated, that controls and procedures are implemented to reduce or prevent future occurrences and that the proper hazard information is communicated to any affected workers. Protective equipment must be available to employees, when required. TRAINING: None required ACTIVITIES: Determine and assess workplace hazards Establish goals for workplace safety and health, holding managers and supervisors accountable for achieving these goals Develop procedures necessary for employees to complete jobs and tasks, as appropriate Hold regular safety meetings with employees Inspect the workplace for safety issues on a regular basis FORMS: General Hazard Assessment New Employee Safety Orientation Training Attendance Roster 1. Purpose 2. Scope 3. Responsibilities 4. Procedure 5. Safety Information 6. Training and Information 7. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 5 of 389

6 A Workplace Accident and Injury Reduction Program (AWAIR) Safety Management Program 1. Purpose. Effective implementation for job safety and health of our employees requires a written safety program fully endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within the company. This safety program is designed to establish clear company goals and objectives and will be communicated to all required personnel. It encompasses the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. Company management will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR that prompt a revision 1.3 When changes occur to any regulatory document that affect this program. 1.4 When facility operational changes occur that affect this program. 2. Scope. Applies to all facilities and sites. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Executive Management: Provide sufficient human and financial resources to address federal, state, and local safety and health compliance Assign compliance and general safety and health responsibilities to the Safety Officer or another designated person Establish employee safety and health management performance goals Review company safety and health management performance at least annually Hold Managers and Supervisors accountable for safety and health performances through annual performance appraisals or by other means. 3.2 Management and Supervisors: Develop safety rules and job procedures necessary to eliminate or control hazards Conduct employee orientation and on-the-job training Conduct scheduled employee safety meetings Conduct on-going informal hazard identification checks and scheduled formal audits Record all incidents, and report them to regulatory agencies as needed or required. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 6 of 389

7 3.2.6 Investigate and document all accidents per accident investigation procedures Support and enforce all company, department, and job specific safety rules, policies and procedure utilize disciplinary procedures as necessary as per company policy or the Employee Handbook. 3.3 Employees: Follow all safety and job rules and procedures Use only tools, equipment, and materials for which training and authorization have been given Report all accidents, injuries, property damage, and near-miss incidents, as required Report all observed unsafe conditions and behaviors Participate in all employee safety and health training programs As needed or required, elect or select the membership in the employee safety committee. 3.4 Safety Officer (as needed or required): Develop programs to comply with federal, state, and local employee safety and health regulations Coordinate provision of employee and management safety and health training Maintain all required documentation Participate in the Employee Safety Committee Prepare safety and health management status reports including Workers Compensation loss summaries, compliance summaries, trend analyses of audit and inspection results, accident and incident causes, safety alerts, and other reported safety concerns. These must be reviewed with management on a quarterly basis, at a minimum. 3.5 Method of Accountability. Employee and company performance, in relation to safety and health responsibilities, is reviewed within the status reports, and includes the following items: Number of workers compensation claims within the business unit Number of lost time incidents, or the types of incidents that occur Occurrence(s) of disciplinary actions resulting from failure to comply with safety procedures Occurrence(s) of recognized safe behaviors. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 7 of 389

8 4. Procedure Attendance and participation in safety training Participation in the employee safety committee and other safety management activities Timeliness of audits, inspections, incident reporting and investigation of incidents or accidents Quality of investigation reports and recommended corrective actions Timeliness and effectiveness of implemented corrective actions 4.1 General Work Rules: All employees are to follow all task, department, and facility rules, policies, and procedures. Appropriate personal protective equipment or other control measures will be used as required All employees are to refrain from running, horseplay, practical jokes, and other activities, which could lead to the injury of the employee or others All employees are to report to work in appropriate attire and condition to ensure constant awareness of surroundings and activities. Employees under the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs will be disciplined according to company policies, up to or including termination. If an employee s abilities may be impaired by legal over the counter or prescription medications, he/she is to inform their Supervisor or Manager Employees will only use, repair, or adjust tools and machinery if trained and authorized by Supervisory personnel Employees will maintain good housekeeping in all work areas and follow housekeeping schedules as required by job procedures and department policies Handwashing facilities will be readily available at all work locations or antiseptic solutions/towelettes will be available for use Department and job specific rules are located in the main office or can be accessed via the area Supervisor or Manager. 4.2 Incidents and Accidents. Reference OSHA 300, 300A and 301 Forms: Definitions: Incident - An incident is an unplanned event resulting in a minor injury (e.g. a small bruise) or minor property damage (e.g. a broken box with lightly damaged, mostly usable contents) or has the potential to result in injury or property damage (a near miss). Incidents do not usually result in a claim. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 8 of 389

9 Accident - An accident is an unplanned event resulting in an injury requiring treatment (in-house first aid or outside medical attention) or more substantial property damage. Accidents usually result in a claim Near Miss An event that could have caused an injury or property damage, but did not have that result. An incident that was avoided Accident, Injury, Property Damage or Near Miss Incident Reporting Procedures: Employees must report all incidents, accidents and near misses to their Supervisor or Manager. Reporting responsibilities are as follows: The employee or their Supervisor may complete portions of the accident or incident report. However, the employee s Supervisor must complete all portions relating to the investigation and must also ensure the full completion of all portions of the report. All three types of events (accidents, incidents and near misses) are required to have reports maintained The Supervisor or Manager must review and sign the completed form As needed or required, copies of the report should be forwarded to the Safety Officer, Claims Officer, and internal Human Resources Representative Accident, Injury, Property Damage or Near Miss Incident Report flow: The employee initiates the report as soon as he/she is aware of the event The Supervisor conducts an investigation, as required, and completes the report within 24 hours.* The Supervisor forwards the report to the designated safety officer or directly to company management who reviews the report to ensure the completion of a thorough investigation. Additional copies may be sent to other personnel, as appropriate Safety violations include verbal reprimands, written warnings, suspension without pay, and subsequent termination If the employee needs outside medical attention or loses time, the Supervisor should phone the safety officer or human resources representative to assure that any necessary claims management activities are initiated Use of Accident, Injury, Property Damage or Near Miss Incident Report Information: Once the reports are completed and forwarded to the appropriate personnel, the following personnel will undertake the listed activities to make the most of the information provided on the reports: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 9 of 389

10 Safety Officer or other designated person reviews the reports to identify incident trends. A Trend Summary Report may be compiled and presented to management, who would then initiate corrective actions to address the identified trends Claims or Human Resources Officer uses the report information to complete the necessary worker s compensation forms and to initiate claims management activities Supervisors and Managers follow up with all area Supervisors and employees to ensure the correction of identified causes. The Managers may also share relevant information with company Supervisors in other areas to ensure similar hazard situations are addressed. Finally, the Manager ensures the provision of sufficient resources to make the necessary corrections and changes. Such resources may include equipment, materials, money, time, and support for policy changes Senior Managers use the reports (or the Trend Summary Report, if provided) to identify the types of incidents and hazards occurring within the company in order to make appropriate decisions regarding safety and health management program improvement efforts. 4.3 Hazard Assessment and Control: Formal safety audits - are scheduled inspections in which the findings are documented and reviewed. Informal safety audits are unscheduled inspections in which findings may or may not be documented. However, documentation (such as work orders or disciplinary actions) for hazardous conditions or behaviors observed during informal audits is recommended Job Hazard Analysis (JHA) or Process Safety Analysis (PSA) JHA's are formalized tools that enable a company to evaluate the hazards of a job task or activity. PSA's are more in-depth and evaluate the hazards of the processing or handling of highly hazardous chemicals. All the job tasks or activities at a company should undergo a JHA or PSA process. Due to the volume of JHA s that could or should be performed, most companies prioritize their activities based on risk and hazard, and schedule a certain number of JHA s to be performed each year. (This also serves as an excellent performance measure goal for the safety management system.) Audit and Inspection Procedures - Audit schedules will be maintained by company management or their specific designee. Audit procedures and finding reports should be maintained until corrective actions are formalized, or until subsequent audit reports supersede them. Inspection reports should be maintained and documented until superseded. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 10 of 389

11 Formal Audits: (Reference General Hazard Assessment form) Auditors will use the General Hazard Assessment form or an equivalent auditing document to conduct formal audits Auditors will review the previous audit documentation and other hazard reports or documented concerns prior to conducting the audit Auditors will complete the auditing documentation and review their findings with the appropriate Supervisor or Manager upon the completion of the audit Copies of the audit documentation will be forwarded to the company manager or their specific designee who is in charge of the audit program The area Manager or Supervisor will assign responsibilities for corrective actions and provide the names and action dates for such assignments to the person responsible for maintaining audit documentation The auditor or audit team will prepare a summary of audit documentation to present to management. The summary will include the identification of trends in observed unsafe behaviors, unsafe conditions, or non-compliance with regulated elements The company manager will review the audit summary to ensure the effective implementation of corrective actions for each deficient item and to address any identified trends. Any meeting minutes or notes will reflect the discussions, identify uncorrected hazards or trends with personnel assigned responsibility for correction, and an estimated time frame for initiating corrective actions Inspections (Informal Audits): (Reference Hazard Alert form) Any employee observing an unsafe behavior or condition must report it to their Supervisor or Manager. Documentation in the form of a hazard alert or equivalent form may be completed to initiate corrective actions The Hazard Alert form recipient will review the reported hazard and initiate corrective actions as appropriate The person designated to make any corrective action will note the findings and corrective actions taken on the Hazard Alert form. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 11 of 389

12 A copy of the completed Hazard Alert form is sent to the Manager or Supervisor of the area where the hazardous condition or activity took place for review. Additional copies will be provided to company management or the specific designated person who is in charge of any company formal audits for use in the next area audit If so designated to do so, the employee safety committee will review the Hazard Alert forms to ensure the effective implementation of corrective actions for each deficient item. The committee will also review the Trend Summary Report to address any identified trends. The employee safety committee minutes or notes will reflect the discussion topics, will identify uncorrected hazards or trends, and indicate an estimated time frame for initiating corrective actions Compliance Audits. To ensure compliance with federal and state employee safety and health laws, management (in conjunction with the designated Safety Officer) will perform evaluations to determine the level of compliance with the regulations and our internal compliance programs. These evaluations will take place at least annually. 5. Procedure. 5.1 New or Altered Equipment and Processes (Change Management). (Reference New and Altered Equipment Review form and New or Changed Chemical Activity Worksheet.) New equipment, chemicals or activities will be reviewed and their hazards evaluated prior to installation or implementation. Area Supervisors or management may be designated to lead the review and evaluation, or a process change committee may be set up to perform this task. If a committee is used, documentation will be retained with regard to meeting minutes or notes, corrective actions, evaluation documentation and any of the documents listed below: Evaluation of new or altered (changes to existing) equipment or to equipment related activities will be documented using the New or Altered Equipment Review form, or an equivalent document Evaluation of new chemicals or changes to existing usages or process activities will be documented using the New or Changed Chemical Activity Worksheet, or an equivalent document Material Safety Data Sheets and hazard information will be reviewed with all employees using a new chemical or utilizing a new activity with existing chemicals prior to the activity being implemented or performed, in accordance with the company s Hazard Communication program. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 12 of 389

13 New activities and tasks will have written procedures developed that include an evaluation of the hazards of that activity or task, the methods to control identified hazards, protective equipment to be used (if any), and any emergency information related to the task or activity. These procedures will be reviewed with employees who perform that activity or task prior to the implementation of the activity or task. 5.2 Employee Safety Committee. (Required for companies with 25 or more in Minnesota) A listing of the membership of the Employee Safety Committee will be maintained by company management or the Safety Officer. Committee membership must be selected by employees. It is recommended that the committee consist of at least three employee members, and that at least one member of management or supervision. The committee chairperson should not be a member of management or supervision Employee Safety Committee Responsibilities: The employee safety committee will conduct at least four meetings each year The employee safety committee may be responsible for any or all of the following activities: Review of employee incident/accident trends Review of audit trends Review of implemented corrective actions Review of outstanding corrective actions Review of employee safety concerns Determination of methods to address concerns resulting from the review of trend summaries, accident or incident reports, audit and inspection reports, and employee concerns In conjunction with management, evaluate the effectiveness of the Safety Management Program on at least an annual basis and recommend changes or additions to the program Employee Safety Committee Minutes Minutes will be maintained to document the employee safety committee s findings, recommendations, and final implemented solutions. The minutes will include the names of those in attendance, the names of those absent, and the date of the meeting. Each outstanding issue will have a person assigned responsibility for its completion. Estimated completion dates will also be noted. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 13 of 389

14 6. Training and Information The employee safety committee minutes will be distributed to all committee members and posted by the committee chairperson. 6.1 Management will ensure that OSHA compliance training is provided to employees, as required. The area Supervisor or company safety officer may be designated to perform this task. Training summaries and attendance rosters will be maintained in the main office, or where similar documentation and training records are maintained. 6.2 Employee Orientation: New Employees. All new employees will receive an orientation provided by either the Safety Officer or their Supervisor prior to their exposure to work place hazards. The new employee orientation will cover the following items: Overview of the Safety Management (AWAIR) Program Review of employee and management responsibilities Hazard reporting procedures Accident, injury, property damage and near miss incident reporting procedures Employee safety committee function and members General work rules Department work rules Method of access to first aid treatment Job tasks hazards and methods of control OSHA required training Transfer Employees. Employees transferring within the company will be trained in the items and exposures that any previous training did not cover The area Supervisor or Manager will provide this training prior to the employee s exposure to new hazards Orientation Documentation. Employee orientation will be documented through the completion of the New Employee Safety Orientation Training List or an equivalent training record. This form must be signed and dated by the trainer and the employee. The form will be maintained in the main office, or where similar documentation and training records are kept. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 14 of 389

15 6.3 Job/Task Training. Employees will be trained in the hazards of their jobs and the proper procedures to control the hazards prior to their exposure to the hazards. Training will be provided by the area Supervisor or Manager (or their specific designee) and documented on the employee s training record. 6.4 On-Going Training. Employees will be provided on-going safety training throughout their tenure with the company. This training will be provided through any combination of the following sources: Safety meetings Safety newsletter Safety posters or bulletin board communications Job performance feedback Service on the Employee Safety Committee 6.5 Management Training. To ensure the success of the Safety Management Program, Supervisors and Managers will receive employee safety and health management training. Managers and Supervisors will receive training through the Safety Officer or other designated person. Training content summaries and attendance rosters will be maintained in the main office, or where similar documentation and training records are kept. 7. Definitions The topics presented to the Supervisors and Managers are applicable to their specific responsibilities. The topics presented include: Review of the Safety Management Program Procedures to conduct formal and informal audits Methods of employee training Procedures to record and report accidents, injuries, property damage and near miss incidents Methods to conduct accident investigations Methods to develop and enforce appropriate safety and health rules. Incident - An incident is an unplanned event resulting in a minor injury (e.g. a small bruise) or minor property damage (e.g. a broken box with lightly damaged, mostly usable contents) or has the potential to result in injury or property damage (a near miss). Incidents do not usually result in a claim. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 15 of 389

16 Accident - An accident is an unplanned event resulting in an injury requiring treatment (inhouse first aid or outside medical attention) or more substantial property damage. Accidents usually result in a claim. Near Miss An event that could have caused an injury or property damage, but did not have that result. An incident that was avoided. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 16 of 389

17 GENERAL HAZARD ASSESSMENT SURVEY DATE: SURVEYED BY: DEPT: SUBM CONDITION COMPLIANT CORRECTED BY COMPLETION DATE COMMENTS A Electrical: Extension cords stored properly Yes No Extension cords used only for project work Yes No Face plates on all outlets & switches Yes No Covers on all junction boxes Yes No Electrical panel boards: -3 ft clearance maintained -Door closed cover empty breaker spaces -Breakers labeled Yes No GFCI s on all outlets within 6 ft of water source Yes No All electrical wiring properly covered Yes No Equipment grounded Yes No Electrical cords & plugs in good condition Yes No Wiring going through walls in conduit Yes No Elevated Work Areas: All open sides of floors or platforms 4 or more feet above ground are protected with standard railing & toeboard Yes No Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 17 of 389

18 CONDITION Floors & Stairs: COMPLIANT CORRECTED BY COMPLETION DATE COMMENTS A Floors are clean & dry Yes No Warning signs place in wet areas Yes No Carpets/mats/other friction control used in high traffic areas Yes No Carpets/mats lie flat & in good condition Yes No Inside stairs well lit Yes No Stair treads in good condition Yes No Riser height even Yes No Railings properly installed on right descending side (3 or more stairs) Yes No Floor halls properly covered or guarded Yes No Ladders: Rungs in good condition & secure Yes No Braces in good working condition Yes No Safety feet are in place & in good condition Yes No Ladders in use are properly secured Yes No Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 18 of 389

19 CONDITION Life Safety: Clear access maintained to all work stations, emergency exits, fire extinguishers, fire alarms, fire blankets, electrical disconnects, etc COMPLIANT Yes No CORRECTED BY COMPLETION DATE COMMENTS A Exits are clearly marked Yes No Doors & other emergency exits are clear of debris, shrubs, & other obstructions Yes No Doors & windows working properly Yes No Emergency lighting systems functioning Yes No Sprinkler systems properly inspected Yes No Fire detection systems properly inspected & functioning Fire extinguishers checked monthly & in good operating condition Fire extinguishers accessible & identified where not easily seen Emergency phone numbers & procedures posted where appropriate Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 19 of 389

20 CONDITION Storage: COMPLIANT CORRECTED BY COMPLETION DATE COMMENTS A Storage closets with sufficient aisle space Yes No Sprinkler heads have minimum 18 clearance Yes No Shelf strength sufficient for load Yes No Lofts floor capacity rated & posted Yes No Portable Tools/Equipment: Equipment stored properly when not in use Yes No Power cords stored properly Yes No Cords & plugs in good condition Yes No Tool grounding checks done regularly Yes No Hand tools in good condition Yes No Walking Areas: Floor free of debris Yes No Floor clean & dry Yes No Working Areas: Work area sufficient for employee & materials Yes No Employees can very position to maintain comfort Yes No Work area minimize employee stress of bending, Yes No twisting & reaching Work areas free of clutter Yes No Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 20 of 389

21 NEW EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION TRAINING LIST Employee s Name: Date assigned: Department: Job Title: Supervisor s Name: Date of Review: Signature: Instructions to Supervisor: Check all boxes that apply. Review the duty requirements of the new employee and select the safety topics that the employee must be trained on. SAFETY TOPIC Accident Reporting Procedures Back Safety Bloodborne Pathogens Exposure Burn Safety Chemical Safety Awareness Compressed Gas Safety Confined Spaces Awareness Crane and Sling Safety Disciplinary Actions for Unsafe Acts Electrical Safety Awareness Emergency Action Plan Eye and Face Protection Fall Protection Awareness Fire Extinguisher Fire Prevention Flammable/Combustible Liquids Food/Beverage Consumption on Duty Forklift Safety Awareness Hand & Power Tool Safety Hazard Communication Hazard Markings Hazard Signage Hearing Conservation Heat Stress Issues Housekeeping Requirements Job Hazard Analysis Awareness Lock Out Tag Out Awareness Machine Guarding Awareness New Products Safety OSHA Recordkeeping Personal Protective Equipment Respiratory Protection Restricted Areas Slips, Trips, and Falls Safety Smoking Restrictions Spill Prevention and Control Violent Acts EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE DATE TRAINER National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 21 of 389

22 Waste Disposal Procedures Welding Safety Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 22 of 389

23 AWAIR TRAINING INCLUDES: Overview of the regulation Conducting safety surveys Safety Committees TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER AWAIR INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 18 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 23 of 389

24 PROGRAM OVERVIEW ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1904 INTRODUCTION: The accident investigation and reporting program is a tool used to ensure notification of accidents and assist in the correction action process. Accident investigation is primarily a fact-finding procedure - the facts revealed are used to prevent recurrences of similar accidents in the future. TRAINING: Supervisors should be trained in accident investigation Employees should be trained on when and how to report accidents and incidents ACTIVITIES: Determine who is a part of the Accident Investigation Team, which may include supervisors, management, and employees Determine accident and near miss reporting procedures OSHA Recordkeeping, forms 300 and 301 or equivalent Injury trending FORMS: Accident, Incident, Near Miss Investigation Report Training Attendance Roster 1. Purpose 2. Scope 3. Responsibilities 4. Procedure 5. Safety Information 6. Training Information & Requirements 7. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 24 of 389

25 Accident Investigation and Reporting Safety Program 1. Purpose. Accidents and Incidents result from a failure of people, equipment, supplies, or surroundings. A successful accident investigation determines not only what happened, but also attempts to find out how and why the accident occurred. Investigations are an effort to prevent a similar or perhaps more disastrous sequence of events. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis 1.2 When changes occur that prompt revision of this document (within the company or to regulatory documents) 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document 2. Scope. This program applies to the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. 3. Responsibilities: 3.1 Management: Ensure supervisors are trained in accident investigation, as needed or required Encourage employees to report accidents and incidents Provide resources, as needed or required, to implement corrective actions based on results of incident investigations Review incident reports and any incident trends to establish corrective and preventive actions Communicate incident information to other areas of the company where similar incidents may occur, and implement preventive actions to eliminate the potential for future incidents Maintain required documentation Train appropriate personnel to review and implement Job Hazard Analysis and Trend Analysis as needed. 3.2 Supervisor: Provide or arrange for adequate medical treatment for any injured employee Promptly investigate any incidents or near miss incidents that occur Provide recommendations to management on corrective actions to prevent recurrence of similar incidents. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 25 of 389

26 3.3 Employees: Promptly report incidents or near misses that occur Report hazardous conditions to your supervisor Participate in incident investigations, as needed or required. 3.4 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure: Participate in incident investigations Review hazard reports and incident reports Recommend corrective or preventive actions to eliminate similar incidents Track corrective and preventive actions to ensure completion Prepare incident trend summaries and present to management Maintain required documentation. 4.1 Accident Investigation Team Composition. Supervisors, in conjunction with the safety officer as needed or required, are primarily responsible for the investigation of accidents and incidents. In addition, members of the safety committee or a separate Accident Investigation Team may serve as incident investigators. 4.2 Hazard Reporting: The Hazard Report will be used by all employees to report potential or known hazards. The following procedures apply: Person reporting hazard: Notify department Supervisor of the hazard Accomplish lock-out/tag-out if required on the machine Fill out required sections of the hazard report Forward report immediately to the Safety Officer Supervisor: Notify all affected workers of hazard. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 26 of 389

27 Notify Maintenance Department of hazard, if required Ensure hazard is properly marked and controlled until corrected. 4.3 Accident Investigation, Analysis and Reporting. Accident investigation is primarily a factfinding procedure; the facts revealed are used to prevent recurrences of similar accidents. The focus of accident investigation will be to prevent future accidents and injuries to increase the safety and health of all our employees Immediate concerns: Ensure any injured person receives proper care Ensure co-workers and personnel working with similar equipment or in similar jobs are aware of the situation. This is to ensure that procedural problems or defects in certain models of equipment do not exist Start the investigation promptly Accident Investigation and Reporting. OSHA Form 301 (or a standardized investigation report form which details specific company requirements for investigation) will be developed and used to gather data to determine causes and corrective actions. As a minimum the form will contain the following areas of concern Injured employee's name and any other identifier Employee's address Date and time of injury Shift and department Sex/DOB Length of service (hire date) and length of time at specific job Time shift started Physician's and hospital name (if transported) Indication if employee was hospitalized as an in-patient (i.e. overnight) Type of injury Body part or body system injured National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 27 of 389

28 Resulting fatalities (date of death) Occupation or task being performed just prior to being injured Description and analysis of accident Indication of the object or substance that directly harmed the employee Name of person completing form, their title, phone number and the date Additional information that is recommended on the form is: Time shift started Overtime length when injury occurred Action taken to prevent recurrence Employee s statement Witnesses statement Employer s statement Name of person(s) reviewing form and date of review 4.4 Accident Investigation Review Team. A member of management responsible will review all Incident Reports for the department/section involved ensuring pertinent information is transmitted to all concerned and remedial action(s) taken. 4.5 Accident Investigation Final Report. The report will include but is not limited to the following: Investigation report form and pertinent data Photographs/drawings/exhibits of scene Narrative of accident Sequence of events Contributing information Findings and recommendations of review team Action items and completion dates Responsible persons National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 28 of 389

29 4.5.9 Follow-up procedures to ensure completion Distribution list 4.6 Safety and Job Hazard Analysis. The company will identify through the use of information sources, screening and job surveys any activities that place employees at risk. After any accident or near miss, the task or job in question will have a job hazard analyses routinely performed by a qualified person(s). This analysis will help to verify that all required actions are being taken to determine if risk factors for a work position have been reduced or eliminated to the maximum extent feasible Workstation Analysis. Workstation analysis will be conducted to identify risk factors present in each job or workstation. 5. Safety Information: 5.1 Administrative Controls. Once data has been gathered from the Incident Report, administrative controls will be used where needed to eliminate or reduce the frequency and severity of accidents and near misses. Examples of administrative controls include the following: Reducing the production rates and or line speeds where possible Providing rest pauses to relieve fatigued muscle-tendon groups Increasing the number of employees assigned to a task to alleviate severe conditions, especially in lifting heavy objects Using job rotation and as a preventive measure, not as a response to physical symptoms. The principle of job rotation is to alleviate physical fatigue and stress of a particular set of muscles and tendons by rotating employees among other jobs that use different muscle-tendon groups. If rotation is utilized, the job analyses must be reviewed to ensure that the same muscle-tendon groups are not used when they are rotated Providing sufficient numbers of standby/relief personnel to compensate for foreseeable upset conditions on the line (e.g., loss of workers) Job enlargement. Having employees perform broader functions which reduce the stress on specific muscle groups while performing individual tasks Machine maintenance/guarding. Ensure regular maintenance is performed on machines and/or tools used by employees are properly guarded and that maintenance is routinely performed Employee training. Ensure all employees are properly trained in the hazards associated with the job before work is performed unsupervised. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 29 of 389

30 5.2 Medical Management. The Safety Officer or other designated person will manage the safety program. Employees of each work shift should have access to health care providers or designated alternates in order to facilitate treatment, surveillance activities, and recording of information. During an accident investigation the medical management safety program will, as a minimum, address the following issues: Injury and illness recordkeeping Early recognition of problems such as strains and muscle fatigue that could lead to accidents Systematic evaluation and referral Conservative treatment after an accident Conservative return to work after an accident Systematic monitoring Recordability criteria. The accident must be work related. Simply stated, unless the illness was caused solely by a non-work-related event or exposure off-premises, the case is presumed to be work related Occupational injuries. Injuries are caused by instantaneous events in the work environment. To keep recordkeeping determinations as simple and equitable as possible, back cases are classified as injuries even though some back conditions may be triggered by an instantaneous event and others develop as a result of repeated trauma. Any occupational injury involving any of the following circumstances is to be recorded on the OSHA-Form 300: Medical treatment resulting from significant injury/illness as diagnosed by a physician or other licensed health care professional Loss of consciousness Restriction of work or motion Contaminated needle stick or sharp exposure Work related tuberculosis infection Cases of medical removal as required under specific OSHA Regulatory Standard Transfer to another job When an incident is recorded on the OSHA Form 300, that same incident must also be recorded on OSHA Form 301. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 30 of 389

31 Periodic Workplace Walk-throughs. Supervisors, in conjunction with the Safety Officer or Health Care provider as needed or required, will conduct periodic, systematic workplace walk-throughs on a monthly basis (OSHA recommended) to remain knowledgeable about operations and work practices, to identify potential light duty jobs, and to maintain close contact with employees. Safety Officers and Health care providers also should be involved in identifying accident risk factors in the workplace as part of the Accident Investigation Team. A record will be kept documenting the date of the walk-through, area(s) visited, accident risk factors recognized, and action initiated to correct identified problems. Follow-up will be initiated and documented to ensure corrective action is taken when indicated. 5.3 Accident Trend Analysis: The information gathered from incident investigations, OSHA logs and hazard reports will help to identify areas or jobs where potential accident or injury conditions could or do exist. This information may be shared with anyone in the company since employees' personal identifiers are not solicited. The analysis of medical records (e.g., sign-in logs and individual employee medical records) may reveal areas or jobs of concern, but it may also identify individual workers who require further follow-up. The information gathered while analyzing medical records will be of a confidential nature, therefore care must be exercised to protect the individual employee's privacy and will be held on file for the duration of employment plus 30 years The information gained from the trend analysis may help determine the effectiveness of the various safety programs initiated to decrease accidents in our facility Employee survey or Job Hazard Analysis. A survey may be used to provide a standardized measure of the extent of progress in reducing work-related accidents for each area of the plant or facility. This will determine which jobs are exhibiting problems and measure progress of the overall safety program Design of the survey. A survey of employees will be conducted to measure employee awareness of work-related accident and to report the location, frequency, and type of accidents likely to occur Surveys normally will not include an employee s personal identifiers. This is to encourage employee participation in the survey Frequency. Surveys will be conducted as a minimum on an annual basis or anytime deemed necessary by the Accident Investigation Team. Conducting the survey annually should help detect any major change in the prevalence, incidence, and/or location of reported and unreported accidents List of Jobs. The company will compile a list of jobs, tasks and activities. This listing should be prioritized, based on the risk factors for type of injury (s) sustained. Jobs will be analyzed to determine the physical procedures used in the performance of each job including lifting requirements, postures, handgrips, frequency of repetitive motion, and general safety requirements of the job. This information will assist health care providers in recommending assignments to light or restricted duty jobs. Supervisors should periodically review and update the lists. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 31 of 389

32 6. Training and Information: 6.1 The purpose of accident investigation training and education is to ensure those members of the Accident Investigation Team and all of our employees are sufficiently informed about the Accident Investigation Safety Program Employees will be adequately trained about the company s Accident Investigation Safety Program. Proper training will allow managers, supervisors, and employees to understand the procedures to follow to report an accident, hazards associated with a job or production process, their prevention and control, and their medical consequences Training program design. The program will be designed and implemented by the Safety Officer, Senior Manager or other designated person. Appropriate special training will be provided for personnel responsible for administering the program Learning level. The safety program will be presented in language and at a level of understanding appropriate for the individuals being trained. It will provide an overview of the potential risk of illnesses and injuries, their causes and early symptoms, the means of prevention, and treatment Training for affected employees will consist of both general and specific job training: General Training. Employees will be given formal instruction on the hazards associated with their jobs and with their equipment. This will include information on the varieties of hazards associated with the job, what risk factors cause or contribute to them, how to recognize and report hazardous conditions, and how to prevent accident with their respective jobs. This instruction will be repeated for each employee as necessary. This training will be conducted on an annual basis. (OSHA experience indicates that, at a minimum, annual retraining is advisable) Job-Specific Training. New employees and reassigned workers will receive an initial orientation and hands-on training before being placed in a full-production job. Each new hire will receive a demonstration of the proper use of and procedures for all tools and equipment before assignment Training for Supervisors. Supervisors are responsible for ensuring that employees follow safe work practices and receive appropriate training to enable them to do this. Supervisors therefore will undergo training comparable to that of the employees. Such additional training as will enable them to recognize and correct hazardous work practices, proper accident reporting/investigation requirements, and to reinforce the company safety program Training for Managers. Managers will be made aware of their safety and health responsibilities and will receive sufficient training pertaining to issues at each workstation and in the production process as a whole so that they can effectively carry out their responsibilities. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 32 of 389

33 6.1.7 Training for Engineers and Maintenance Personnel. Plant engineers and maintenance personnel will be trained in the prevention and correction of job hazards through job and workstation design and proper maintenance, both in general and as applied to the specific conditions of the facility. 6.2 Employee Training and Education. Health care providers will participate in the training and education of all employees, as needed or required. This training will be reinforced during workplace walk-throughs and the individual health surveillance appointments. All new employees will be given such education during orientation. This demonstration of concern along with the distribution of information should facilitate early recognition of accident conditions before their development, an elimination or reduction in accidents, and increased likelihood of compliance with recognition, prevention, and control. 7. Definitions. Accident - An injury or substance exposure that results in a detrimental health effect to an individual. Incident An event that results in an accident, near miss or property damage. Near Miss An avoided accident. An incident that could have occurred, but due to mitigating circumstances (or luck) did not occur. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 33 of 389

34 ACCIDENT, INCIDENT OR NEAR MISS INVESTIGATION REPORT PART 1 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Employee Name Date of Accident Time: AM PM Occupation Shift Department SS#: Employee Home Address: Date of Birth: Date of Hire Gender: Male Female PART 2 SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION Company Mailing Address City State Zip Telephone ( ) Accident Location Same as establishment? On premises? (Check if applies) Location Where Accident Occurred (if different from above): Remarks: Was injured person performing regular job at time of accident? Yes No Describe activity the person was doing just before they were injured: Length of Service: With Employer On this job Time shift started AM PM Overtime? Yes No Name and address of physician: City State Zip Employee treated in an emergency room? Yes No. Employee hospitalized overnight? Yes No If hospitalized, name and address of hospital: City State Zip Fatality? Yes No If Yes, date of death PART 3 ACCIDENT TREE NATURE OF INJURY OR ILLNESS: PART OF BODY AFFECTED: Operation Location: Operation Task: Employee Task: Employee Body Position/Activity Agency Preceding Situation or Event Type of Accident National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 34 of 389

35 Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 35 of 389

36 PART 4 DESCRIPTION AND ANALYSIS Fully describe accident: What factors led to the accident (from Part 3/Tree)? MACHINERY/EQUIPMENT INVOLVED Manufacturer Equip. age Serial No. Model Function Location Has machine/equipment been modified? Yes No If so, when? Was it guarded? Yes No If Yes, describe guarding and how it functions to provide element of safety desired: Was guarding properly: Constructed? Yes No Installed? Yes No Adjusted? Yes No If No to any of above, explain: Was there any mechanical failure? Yes No If yes, explain: If construction related, date of contract: Is firm General Contractor Subcontractor Name of other contractors List any weather conditions that contributed to the incident: TRAINING Did employee receive specific training or instructions relating to safety and health on the job being performed? Yes No Type: Instructed by: When instructed: Length of training: Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 36 of 389

37 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Did employee use any protective equipment for the job or task performed? Yes No Type: Did equipment fail? Yes No If so, describe: CORRECTIVE ACTIONS: Were any corrective or preventive actions put into place due to the incident? Yes No If so, list them: Action Taken Expected Result Expected Completion Date Were corrective actions followed through to completion? Yes No If so, list results and dates: Action Taken Expected Result Expected Completion Date STATEMENTS CONCERNING ACCIDENT EMPLOYEE STATEMENT CONCERNING ACCIDENT Name Title Date SUPERVISOR/EMPLOYER S STATEMENT Name Title Date WITNESS STATEMENT Name Title Date SAFETY COMMITTEE COMMENTS Name Title Date ATTACH ADDITIONAL COMMENTS, REPORTS AND PHOTOS ON NEXT PAGE Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 37 of 389

38 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION Accident Investigation Training Includes: Getting the facts Investigation procedures Interviews and statements Photography and Diagrams Corrective Actions INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 38 of 389

39 AERIAL LIFT OPERATOR CHECKLIST Items to Be Inspected Emergency controls are in proper working condition (Emergency Stop Device and emergency lowering function) Safety devices are functional (Foot pedal, spring lock, etc.) All safety indicator lights work properly and notion alarms are functional Fire extinguisher on platform All controls function properly, are clean and clearly labeled Ground operating controls successfully over-ride the aerial controls Fuel level is acceptable and the system is not leaking Hydraulic level is acceptable and the system is not leaking Are there any loose or missing parts (Bolts, fasteners, braces, brackets, etc.) Work platform is clean, dry and clear of debris Tires, wheels, and lug nuts are in good condition No defects such as cracked welds, damaged control cables, damaged wire harness or other obvious damage Slide pad is not worn down Braking devices are operating properly The manufacturer s operations manual is stored on the lift (in all languages of the operators) Boom and lift pivot pins are in good working order All switch and mechanical guards are in good condition and properly installed Platform gate and Guardrails are in place and in good condition Other personal protective devices are in good condition Stabilizers, outriggers and/or extending axles function properly Working lights are operational Control Markings are in place and legible All manufacturer required inspections of all hydraulic control relief valves and other manufacturer requirements have been completed within the required time period (Check inspection sticker on equipment for validation) Battery indicator shows an acceptable level remaining Is the total load within the rated capacity AERIAL LIFT INSPECTED BY: OK Signature: Date: Aerial lift is safe to operate? Yes No Comments: Page 6 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 39 of 389

40 AERIAL LIFT OPERATOR EVALUATION ASSESSMENT This form (or its equivalent) must be retained for records management Equipment Operated (make/model): Name of Operator: Employee Identification#: Date: Signature of Operator: Signature of Evaluator: YES NO Activity YES NO Activity Performs pre-shift checks Forward/reverse Steering technique Parking brakes UNDERSTANDS CONTROLS Service brake Instrumentation Attachment Smooth starts/stops Inching/plugging Approach is square Proper traveling height TRUCK HANDLING Smooth/controlled turns Clears obstacles safely Proper maneuvering speed Looks in travel direction Lowers lift to lowest level Truck in neutral Applies parking brake Power shut off Lift/lower technique Smooth starts/stops Proper truck speed PARKING PROCEDURES Dismounts safely Uses wheel chocks on ramps Turns off fuel supply LOAD HANDLING Comments: SAFETY Uses horn as required Wears PFAS, as needed Uses intersection mirrors, as needed Uses proper operational speed Stops at major intersections Yields right-of-way Page 7 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 40 of 389

41 AERIAL LIFT OPERATOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS POLICY All Aerial Lift operators are required to sign this document to indicate understanding and compliance with these requirements. Signed copies of this form are to be kept in the personnel files of active employees as long as the employee may operate an aerial lift. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Aerial Lift operators shall: Immediately inform supervision of any change, or suspected change, in medical condition which may affect the ability to safely operate an aerial lift (e.g., vision problems, vertigo, etc.). Immediately inform supervision of the use of prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may impair ability to safely operate aerial lift. Not, under any circumstances, attempt to operate an aerial lift while under the influence of alcohol or illegal drugs. Perform vehicle safety inspections at the start of each shift of operation. Perform a worksite inspection prior to starting job. Remove defective equipment from service and report to supervision. Wear required personal protective equipment. Read and be familiar with contents of manufacturer's manual for the particular aerial lift being operated. Never tamper with the equipment or equipment components. Obey manufacturer s limitations and specifications for aerial lift. Never sit or climb on the edge of the basket. Do not attach single lanyard to an adjacent pole, structure or equipment, or to the railings of the basket while working. Close entry gates or chains before operating. Never position yourself between overhead hazards and rails of the basket. Always treat power lines, wires and other conductors as energized. At no time position the bucket closer than 10 from any electrical source. Employee Name: Employee Signature: Date: Supervisor Name: Supervisor Signature: Date: Page 8 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 41 of 389

42 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 42 of 389

43 PROGRAM OVERVIEW AERIAL LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD OSHA 29 CFR INTRODUCTION: Aerial Lift includes boom-supported aerial platforms, such as cherry pickers or bucket trucks. This safety program is intended to address the issues of employee training, safety requirements, maintenance, and general operation of Aerial Lift. TRAINING: Employees trained prior to use in both a classroom component and an assessment of the operator performance with the equipment. ACTIVITIES: Identify the tasks that require an aerial lift Write and communicate workplace specific procedures that outline the operation, and limitations, of aerial lifts Maintain manufacturer s requirements, limits and documentation Conduct documented daily inspections prior to use Implement, maintain, and inspect fall arrest systems as required Annually evaluate the aerial lift program to assure it is relevant and functioning properly FORMS: Aerial Lift Operator Checklist Aerial Lift Operator Evaluation Assessment Aerial Lift Operator Performance Requirements Aerial Lift Training Wallet Cards Training Attendance Roster 8. Purpose 9. Scope 10. Responsibilities 11. Procedure 12. Safety Information 13. Training Information & Requirements 14. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 43 of 389

44 AERIAL LIFT SAFETY PROGRAM 1. Purpose. This document defines the process for managing Aerial Lift. 2. Scope. Applies to all locations where Aerial Lift are used or maintained. This procedure covers operator selection, training, equipment operations, and maintenance. 3. Responsibilities Management will: Identify the tasks that require an aerial lift Assure the correct type of equipment is purchased Document workplace specific procedures that outline the operation, and limitations, of Aerial Lift Assure operators are initially trained and evaluated every 3 years Annually evaluate the aerial lift program to assure it is relevant and functioning properly Safety Officer will (as needed): 4. Procedure Work with management to assure appropriate PPE and emergency equipment is provided Assist in the development of workplace specific aerial lift operation rules and procedures Evaluate the course content of the various aerial lift training courses, assuring they meet the requirements of the OSHA standard, and any additional company requirements as outlined in this procedure Aerial Lift Requirements: Any use of an aerial lift must be in accordance with the requirements and limits identified in the owner s manual from the manufacturer. Develop and document appropriate workplace specific rules and procedures, where required Aerial Lift may be field modified for uses other than those intended by the manufacturer, provided the modifications have been verified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent entity to be in conformity with all applicable provisions of ANSI A and OSHA and to be at least as safe as the equipment was before modification. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 44 of 389

45 The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in any manner that might reduce its insulating value Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding the upper controls. Controls must be plainly marked as to their function Manufacturers manuals are available and stored in the weatherproof containers on the lifts or in the mobile units The aerial lift must have a reverse signal alarm audible above the surrounding noise level or the vehicle is backed up only when a spotter is used Lift Operations: Ensure that equipment is inspected each day prior to use to determine that controls are in safe working condition Fall arrest system lanyards must be used and attached to the anchor point on the floor of the basket or the boom of the lift. Securing the lanyard to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment, or to the railings of the basket while working from an aerial lift shall NOT be permitted. If employees are required to leave the basket and are subjected to a fall hazard, as second lanyard must be used to ensure that fall protection requirements are continuous Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks, ladders, or other devices for a work position Full body harnesses (as part of a personal fall arrest system) will be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or basket when working The manufacturer s boom and basket weight limits shall not be exceeded The brakes shall be set and when outriggers are used, they shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be installed before using an aerial lift on an incline provided they can be safely installed The base or body of the aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is elevated in a working position with employees in the basket, except for equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation Climbers (or similar spiked shoes) may not be worn while performing work from the aerial lift Never allow an aerial lift to be used as a crane or material-lifting device A hard hat shall be worn at all times when operating Aerial Lift Entry gates or chains shall be closed before operating the lift For aerial lifts that have both upper and lower controls, the lower controls shall not be operated unless permission has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of emergency Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom must be inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in the stowed position When moving the vehicle in reverse, the signal alarm must be audible above the surrounding noise level or a spotter must be used to signal that it is safe When required to exit or climb out of an elevated aerial lift to a location not otherwise protected by guardrails, floor, or other continuous means of fall protection, operators shall use a second shock-absorbing lanyard to connect to the new location before disconnecting from the aerial lift. When entering an aerial lift from an unprotected location, operators shall connect a shock-absorbing lanyard to the anchorage point in the aerial lift before entering. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 45 of 389

46 Employees should not position themselves between overhead hazards, such as joists and beams, and the rails of the basket. If such positioning is required, the fall protection system must account for the shorter distance to the hazard in case of a fall Never override hydraulic, mechanical, or electrical safety devices Always treat power lines, wires and other conductors as energized, even if they are down or appear to be insulated Operators shall maintain safe distances from electrical power lines, conductors or bus bars. Operators must allow for boom or platform movement or electrical line sway or sag. Operators shall follow minimum safe approach distances (MSAD). At no time will an operator position the bucket closer than 10 from any electrical source Records and Documentation: MSAD (Minimum Safe Approach Distance) to Energized (Exposed or Insulated) Power Lines Voltage Range (Phase to Phase) Minimum Safe Approach Distance 0 to 300V 10 Over 300 to 50KV 10 Over 50KV to 200KV 15 Over 200KV to 350KV 20 Over 350KV to 500KV 25 Over 500KV to 750KV 35 Over 750KV to 1000KV Workplace specific training (initial and retraining) records. An Operator Evaluation Form must be retained Training records for current operators must be retained for the duration they will operate the lift. Records should be retained for 3 years after this point Documentation of daily lift inspection must be maintained. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 46 of 389

47 5. Safety Information Fuel tanks may not be filled while the engine is running Fuel caps must be in place before starting Liquid fuels such as gasoline and diesel fuel must be handled in accordance with NFPA standards for Flammable and Combustible Liquids The operator must conduct a safety / circle check of the vehicle to determine hazards The operator must conduct a worksite inspection Perform electrical system safety tests on aerial lift devices per ANSI/SIA A92.2 requirements Inspect hydraulic and pneumatic system components (Busting Safety Factor) on aerial lift devices per ANSI/SIA A92.2 requirements Conduct welding operations on aerial lift devices per Automotive Welding Society (AWS) Standards. 6. Training and Information Training must occur before operators are allowed to operate an aerial lift unsupervised, and such operations may not endanger either the operators or the trainee Initial information (classroom, discussion) Evaluation and instruction on the operation of the aerial lift at the workplace Initial Training must provide for: 7. Definitions Operation training provides skills and knowledge related to the lift the operator is authorized to drive. These include: inspections, controls, vehicle stability and capacity and any specific operating limitations An evaluation of the operator, in the workplace, performing typical aerial lift tasks must occur initially Aerial Lift Aerial Lift include the following types of devices used to elevate personnel to job-sites above ground, extensible boom platforms, aerial ladders, articulating boom platforms and vertical towers. The equipment may be powered or manually operated and are deemed to be Aerial Lift whether or not they are capable of rotating about a substantially vertical axis. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 47 of 389

48 COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 48 of 389

49 Aerial Lift Training Includes: Definition Common hazards Safe Operating Rules Inspections TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER AERIAL LIFT INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 49 of 389

50 PROGRAM OVERVIEW BACK SAFETY IN THE WORKPLACE PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR (General Duty Clause) OSHA - 29 CFR (Medical Services) Best Practices - Ergonomics INTRODUCTION: Outlines the methods for identifying back disorder risk factors and for implementing protective measures to prevent back injuries. TRAINING: Recommended for most workplaces ACTIVITIES: Identify risk factors for back injury in the operations Repetitive or prolonged activities Awkward postures Unusual size or weight objects Implement any required controls to minimize or eliminate hazards. FORMS: Training Attendance Roster, as needed 1. Purpose 2. Scope 3. Responsibilities 4. Procedure 5. Safety Information 6. Training and Information 7. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 50 of 389

51 Back Safety in the Workplace Program 1. Purpose. This safety program is designed to establish clear company goals and objectives with regard to back safety and will be communicated to all required personnel. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR that prompt revision of this document 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document 1.4 When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety 1.5 Review the safety program any time these procedures fail 2. Scope. This program applies to the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts 3. Responsibilities. 4. Procedure Management and Supervisor: Evaluate the workplace for potential back safety issues Implement controls and awareness training to prevent back injuries Review this program and information at least annually to assure it remains effective Employees: Follow workplace rules and procedures Immediately report injuries or symptoms of back disorders Safety Officer (as needed or required): Assist in the implementation of the back safety program 4.1 Back Disorder Risk Factors. Identification of hazards will be based on risk factors such as conditions of a job process, workstation, or work methods that contribute to the risk of developing problems associated with back disorders. Not all of these risk factors will be present in every job containing stressors nor is the existence of one of these factors necessarily sufficient to cause a back injury. Supervisors will use the following known risk factors to isolate and report suspected problem areas: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 51 of 389

52 4.1.1 Repetitive and/or prolonged activities Bad body mechanics such as: Continued bending over at the waist Continued lifting from below the knuckles Continued lifting above the shoulders Twisting at the waist Twisting at the waist while lifting Lifting or moving objects of excessive weight Lifting or moving object of asymmetric size Prolonged sitting with poor posture Lack of adjustable : Chairs Footrests Body supports Work surfaces at workstations Poor grips on handles Slippery footing Frequency of movement Duration and pace Stability of load Coupling of load Type of grip Reach distances Work height National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 52 of 389

53 4.2 Safe Lifting Techniques. First, use a pushcart or other material-handling device! Second, ask a co-worker for help if no device is available! If you must lift alone here are some tips. Before starting to lift or carry anything, check your entire walkway to make sure your footing will be solid. Your shoes should give you good balance, support and traction. Keep loads as close to your body as possible. The following situations show basic lifting techniques to avoid injury: Lifting or lowering from a high place Stand on a platform instead of a ladder Lift the load in smaller pieces, if possible Slide the load as close to yourself as possible before lifting Grip firmly and slide it down Get help when you need it to avoid injury Lifting from hard-to-get-at places Get as close to the load as possible Keep back straight, stomach muscles tight Push buttocks out behind you Bend your knees Use leg, stomach, and buttock muscles to lift -- not your back Lifting drums, barrels, and cylinders Use mechanical assists Always be aware that loads can shift Get help if load is too heavy Awkward objects Bend your knees with feet spread Grip the top outside and bottom inside corners Use your legs to lift, keeping back straight Shoveling Make sure your grip and balance are solid National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 53 of 389

54 Tighten your abdomen as you lift Keep the shovel close to your body Use the strength of your thigh muscles to bring you to an upright position Increase your leverage by keeping your bottom hand low and toward the blade General safety tips 5. Safety Information Don t lift objects over your head Don t twist your body when lifting or setting an object down Don t reach over an obstacle to lift a load Pace yourself to avoid fatigue 5.1 Job Hazard Analysis and Work Station Analysis Surveys. Job hazard analysis surveys will be routinely performed by a qualified person for jobs that put workers at risk. This analysis survey will help to verify risk factors and to determine if risk factors for a work position have been reduced or eliminated to the extent feasible Upper extremities. For upper extremities three (3) measurements of repetitiveness will be reviewed: Total hand manipulations per cycle The cycle time The total manipulations or cycles per work shift Force measurements. Force measurements will be noted as an estimated average effort and a peak force (unless quantitative measurements are feasible). They will be recorded as "light," "moderate," or "heavy" Tools. Tools will be checked for excessive vibration and weight. (The NIOSH criteria document on hand/arm vibration should be consulted.) The tools, personal protective equipment, and dimensions and adjustability of the workstation will be noted for each job hazard analysis Postures. Hand, arm, and shoulder postures and movements will be assessed for levels of risk Lifting Hazards. Workstations having tasks requiring manual materials handling will have the maximum weight-lifting values calculated. (The NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual Lifting should be used for basic calculations.) National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 54 of 389

55 5.1.6 Videotape Method. The use of videotape, where feasible, will be used as a method for analysis of the work process. Slow-motion videotape or equivalent visual records of workers performing their routine job tasks will be used where practical to determine the demands of the task on the worker and how each worker actually performs each task. A task analysis log/form will be used to break down the job into components that can be individually analyzed. 5.2 Hazard Prevention and Control. Company management understands that engineering solutions, where feasible, are the preferred method of control for ergonomic hazards. The focus of this safety program is to make the job fit the person, not to make the person fit the job. This is accomplished by redesigning the workstation, work methods, or tools to reduce the demands of the job. Such as high force, repetitive motion, and awkward postures. This safety program will whenever possible research into currently available controls and technology. The following examples of engineering controls will be used as models for workstation design and upgrade Workstation Design. Workstations when initially constructed or when redesigned will be adjustable in order to accommodate the person who actually works at a given workstation. It is not adequate to design for the "average" or typical worker. Workstations should be easily adjustable and either designed or selected to fit a specific task so that they are comfortable for the workers using them. The workspace should be large enough to allow for the full range of required movements especially where hand held tools are used. Examples include: Adjustable fixtures on work tables so that the position of the work can be easily manipulated Workstations and delivery bins that can accommodate the heights and reach limitations of various-sized workers Work platforms that move up and down for various operations Mechanical or powered assists to eliminate the use of extreme force Suspension of heavy tools The use of diverging conveyors off of main lines so that certain activities can be performed at slower rates Floor mats designed to reduce trauma to the legs and back Design of Work Methods. Traditional work method analysis considers static postures and repetition rates. This will be supplemented by addressing the force levels and the hand and arm postures involved. The tasks will be altered where possible to reduce these and the other stresses. Examples of methods for the reduction of extreme and awkward postures include the following: Enabling the worker to perform the task with two hands instead of one Conforming to the NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual Lifting. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 55 of 389

56 5.2.3 Excessive force. Excessive force in any operation can result in both long-term problems for the worker and increased accident rates. Ways to reduce excessive force will be continually emphasized by first line supervisors and employees. Examples of methods to reduce excessive force include: The use of automation devices The use of mechanical devices to aid in removing scrap from work areas Substitution of power tools where manual tools are now in use The use of articulated arms and counter balances suspended by overhead racks to reduce the force needed to operate and control power tools Repetitive motion. All efforts to reduce repetitive motion will be pursued. Examples of methods to reduce highly repetitive movements include: Increasing the number of workers performing a task Lessening repetition by combining jobs with very short cycle times, thereby increasing cycle time. (Sometimes referred to as "job enlargement.") Using automation where appropriate Designing or altering jobs to allow self-pacing, when feasible Designing or altering jobs to allow sufficient rest pauses. 5.3 Administrative Controls. Administrative controls will be used to reduce the duration, frequency, and severity of exposures to ergonomic stressors that can cause back injury. Examples of administrative controls include the following: Reducing the total number of repetitions per employee by such means as decreasing production rates and limiting overtime work Providing rest pauses to relieve fatigued muscle-tendon groups. The length of time needed depends on the task's overall effort and total cycle time Increasing the number of employees assigned to a task to alleviate severe conditions, especially in lifting heavy objects Using job rotation, with caution and as a preventive measure, not as a response to symptoms. The principle of job rotation is to alleviate physical fatigue and stress of a particular set of muscles and tendons by rotating employees among other jobs that use different muscle-tendon groups. If rotation is utilized, the job analyses must be reviewed to ensure that the same muscle-tendon groups are not used when they are rotated. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 56 of 389

57 5.3.5 Providing sufficient numbers of standby/relief personnel to compensate for foreseeable upset conditions on the line (e.g., loss of workers) Job enlargement. Having employees perform broader functions which reduce the stress on specific muscle groups while performing individual tasks. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 Types of training. Supervisors will determine whether training required for specific jobs will be conducted in a classroom or on-the-job. The degree of training provided shall be determined by the complexity of the job and the associated hazards Initial Training. Prior to job assignment the company shall provide training to ensure that the hazards associated with pre-designated job skills are understood by employees. Also the knowledge and skills required for the safe application and usage of work place procedures and equipment is acquired by all employees. The training shall include the following: Each affected employee shall receive training in the recognition of back injury hazards involved with a particular job, and the methods and means necessary for safe work Training course content. All new and current workers, who work in areas where there is reasonable likelihood of back injury, will be kept informed through continuing education programs. Initial and refresher training will, as a minimum, cover the following: Back hazards associated with the job Lifting techniques Potential health effects of back injury Back injury precautions Proper use of protective clothing and equipment Use of engineering controls Responsibility. Employees are responsible for following proper work practices and control procedures to help protect their health and provide for the safety of themselves and fellow employees, including instructions to immediately report to the Supervisor any significant back injury. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 57 of 389

58 6.1.2 Refresher Training. Scheduled refresher training will be conducted on an as needed basis Retraining shall be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever there is a change in their job assignments, a change in equipment or processes that present a new hazard, or when their work takes them into other hazard areas Additional retraining shall also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or when there is reason to believe that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge of known hazards and use of equipment or procedures The retraining shall reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new equipment, new lifting procedures or revised control methods and procedures Verification. The company shall verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The verification shall contain a synopsis of the training conducted, each employee's name, and dates of training. 6.2 New Employee Acclimatization Period. Supervisors will ensure that new or transferred employees are allowed an appropriate acclimatization period. New and returning employees will be gradually integrated into a full work schedule as appropriate for specific jobs and individuals. Employees will be assigned to an experienced trainer for job training and evaluation during this period. Employees reassigned to new jobs should also have an acclimatization period. Important: Supervisors will closely monitor employees that fall into this category throughout their acclimatization period. 7. Definitions. None at this time National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 58 of 389

59 Back Safety Traiing Includes: Types of Injuries and Causes Risk Assessment and Planning Safe Lifting Techniques Special Lifting Hazards TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER BACK SAFETY INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 59 of 389

60 PROGRAM OVERVIEW INCIDENTAL BLOOD AND BODILY FLUID EXPOSURE PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR (LIMITED REFERENCES) INTRODUCTION: Exposure to another person's blood or bodily fluids can potentially place your health at risk. Contracting diseases such as the Human Immunodeficiency (HIV) and Hepatitis B (HBV) viruses is unlikely, but possible, in the performance of emergency first-aid, housekeeping and janitorial staff duties, and similar tasks. This program outlines the protective measures that can be taken during potential exposure situations and training that can be provided to reduce or eliminate these types of exposures. TRAINING: Recommended for employees who may encounter human blood or body fluids but such exposure is not a part of their normal job duties. ACTIVITIES: Identify risk situations Train employees, as appropriate FORMS: Training Attendance Roster, as needed 8. Purpose 9. Scope 10. Responsibilities 11. Procedure 12. Safety Information 13. Training and Information 14. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 60 of 389

61 Incidental Blood and Bodily Fluid Exposure Program 1. Purpose. Where employees can be exposed (through injury or illness in the workplace) to the blood and/or bodily fluid of another person, information and training in the potential health effects of such exposures may be provided. This procedure assists in compliance with implementing this type of incidental Bloodborne Pathogen Exposure program and references Federal Regulation 29CFR Scope. Applies to all locations within company buildings or facilities where incidents involving exposures to a person s blood or bodily fluids may occur. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management and Supervisor: Determine where exposures are present Ensure employees are trained, based on their level of exposure to blood or Bloodborne pathogens Implement bio-safety controls, where required Maintain appropriate documentation (including exposure incident reports and postexposure follow up records) 3.2 Employees: Follow established written procedures Attend training, as needed or required Hepatitis B Vaccine be made available to all employees with occupational exposure at no cost. 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist with the development and implementation of this program. 4.1 Determine where exposures or potential exposures exist 4.2 Provide controls to eliminate or reduce exposures 4.3 Train employees, as needed National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 61 of 389

62 4.4 Document exposures through accident/incident reports or exposure incident reports and maintain records for 5 years. 4.5 Review the program at least annually National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 62 of 389

63 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Determine where exposures or potential exposures are present 5.2 Document and maintain written processes and procedures in work areas where exposure could potentially occur. This includes: Any first aid procedures or supplies maintained at the company PPE (Personal Protective Equipment) that may be used or required Training provided, as needed 5.3 Training is recommended for all employees and supervisors with exposures or potential exposures to assure they understand their responsibilities and safeguards/controls implemented. 5.4 Assure a system is in place for a medical evaluation for any exposed employee who has had contact with the blood or bodily fluids of another person. 5.5 Assure incident and/or exposure records are maintained for 5 years for each employee who has an exposure event. Record all exposure incident cases on the OSHA 300 log, if your company is required to maintain such records 5.6 These records or reports should include: Name of the exposed employee Information (if known) on if the exposed employee has had a Hepatitis B Vaccination previous to the exposure Circumstances of the exposure and any PPE used Written opinion of the healthcare provider (PLHCP Statement) and copies of any other documentation provided to the healthcare professional responsible for postexposure follow up. 5.7 Review this program annually for applicability, control measures, and compliance. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 63 of 389

64 6. Training and Information. 6.1 Training requirements for employees is provided before initial assignment, and annual recurrence is required. Train all employees and Supervisors with exposures or potential exposures to assure they understand their responsibilities and safeguards/controls implemented. 6.2 Training includes: 7. Definitions Information on how bloodborne pathogens and diseases can be contracted by employees during their work and proper cleaning procedures Cleaning of equipment or surfaces after contact with blood or other infectious material Whom to contact at the company and what to do (and what to expect) if an employee has an exposure Training records should be maintained for at least 3 years. Biohazards/Bloodborne Pathogens - Infectious agents (human pathogens), materials from human sources or primates that may contain pathogens, and organism-produced toxins, venom, allergens, etc. that causes disease in humans. Contact or Exposure Blood or body fluids must have the potential to be absorbed into the blood stream (such as through a break in the skin (cut or other skin opening) or through the eyes, nose, mouth to be considered contact. Exposure is considered to be any contact with another person s blood or bodily fluids (saliva, vomit, urine, feces, etc). Exposure Control Program - A written program that outlines the exposures that are present (or potentially present) in the workplace and the steps taken to eliminate or control those exposures. All employees will have access to a copy of program. OPIM - Other Potentially Infectious Materials, such as contaminated waste, tissue samples, Human body fluids, including: semen, vaginal secretions, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, pleural fluid, pericardial fluid, peritoneal fluid, saliva in dental procedures, any body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluid that is visibly contaminated with blood, and all body fluids in situations where it is difficult or impossible to differentiate between body fluids. Potentially Exposed - An exposure that can reasonably occur at some time. Sharps - a non-needle sharp or needle device used for withdrawing blood or body fluids, accessing a vein or artery or administrating medication or other fluids. Universal Precautions - An approach to infection control. According to the concept of universal precautions, all human blood and certain human body fluids are treated as if known to be infectious for HIV, HBV, and other bloodborne pathogens. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 64 of 389

65 BLOOD AND BODILY FLUIDS (INCIDENTAL) EXPOS TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety informa Training Content: What is a BBP Types of diseases Precautions and PPE Instructor Name: Date of Training: Spill Cleanup Waste Disposal Exposure Incident Process NAME (Please Print) FIRST - MI - LAST SIGNATURE JO and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 5 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 65 of 389

66 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CHECKLIST Checklist Completed by: Date: ITEM COMPLIANT? Is an injury prevention program established for construction worksites? [29 CFR (b)(1)] Does the program include regular inspections by a designated competent person of the worksite, materials, and equipment? [29 CFR (b)(2)] When machines, tools, materials, or equipment are identified as unsafe, is one of these procedures followed? [29 CFR (b)(3)] a. they are tagged b. the controls are locked to render them inoperable; or c. they are immediately removed from the work area? Are only qualified employees (by training or experience) permitted to operate machinery? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Are all employees trained to recognize and avoid unsafe conditions? Do they know the regulations applicable to the work environment? [29 CFR (b)(2)] Have employees been instructed regarding the safe handling and use of poisons, caustics, and other harmful substances? Are they aware of the hazards, personal hygiene, and personal protective measures required? [29 CFR (b)(3)] In areas where harmful plants or animals may be present, have employees been instructed regarding the hazards, how to avoid injury, and first aid procedures to be used in the event of injury? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Have employees who are required to handle or use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic materials been instructed in the safe handling and use of these materials? [29 CFR (b)(5)] Have all employees who are required to enter confined or enclosed spaces been instructed in the nature of the hazards involved, the necessary precautions to take, and the use of protective and emergency equipment required? [29 CFR (b)(6)(i)] Are medical personnel available for advice and consultation? [29 CFR and (a)] Are provisions made in advance of any project for prompt medical attention in case of serious injury? [29 CFR (b)] If emergency medical care is not readily available, is a certified person available to render first aid? [29 CFR (c)] Are first-aid supplies readily available at the worksite? [29 CFR (d)(1)] YES NO Are first-aid supplies at the worksite in a weatherproof container with individual sealed packages for each type of item? [29 CFR (d)(2)] YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 66 of 389

67 ITEM COMPLIANT? Are first-aid supplies checked to replace expended items each time they are sent to the worksite and at least weekly if left at the worksite? [29 CFR (d)(2)] Is transportation available for taking an injured person to medical care, or is a communication system available for contacting an ambulance service? [29 CFR (e)] Are telephone numbers of physicians, hospitals, or ambulances conspicuously posted at the worksite? [29 CFR (f)] Is an adequate supply of drinking water at or near the worksite? [29 CFR (a)(1)] If portable drinking water containers are used at the worksite, can they be tightly closed and are they equipped with a tap? [29 CFR (a)(2)] Is dipping water from a drinking water container and use of a common drinking cup prohibited? [29 CFR (a)(2) and (4)] Are washing facilities at or near the worksite for employees who handle paints, coatings, pesticides, or other harmful contaminants? [29 CFR (f)] Are handwashing facilities readily available at all work locations or ensure antiseptic solutions/towelettes will be available for use. Has an effective fire protection and prevention program been established at the worksite through all phases of construction, repair, or alteration? [29 CFR ] Has all form and scrap lumber with protruding nails, re-bar and all other debris been cleared from work areas, passageways, and stairs in and around buildings or other structures? [29 CFR (a)] Is combustible scrap and debris removed from the work area at regular intervals during the course of construction? [29 CFR (b) and (c)] Are containers provided for the collection and separation of waste, trash, oily and used rags, and other refuse? [29 CFR (c)] Are all solvent wastes, oily rags, and flammable liquids kept in fire-resistant, covered containers until removed from the work area? [29 CFR (e)] Are all construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, labs, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress well lighted? [29 CFR and ] Is appropriate personal protective equipment used in all operations where hazardous conditions exist? [29 CFR ] Are all materials that are stored in tiers stacked, racked, blocked, interlocked, or otherwise secured to prevent sliding, falling, or collapse? [29 CFR (a)(1)] Is the minimum safe load limit of floors within buildings and structures, in pounds per square foot, conspicuously posted in all storage areas? [29 CFR (a)(2)] Are maximum safe loads always maintained? [29 CFR (a)(2)] YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 67 of 389

68 ITEM COMPLIANT? Are aisles and passageways kept clear to provide for the free and safe movement of material-handling equipment and people? [29 CFR (a)(3)] YES NO Are such areas kept in good repair? [29 CFR (a)(3)] YES NO Where a difference in road or working level exists, are means such as ramps, blocking, or grading provided to ensure the safe movement of vehicles between two levels? [29 CFR (a)(4)] Is material stored inside buildings placed more than 6 feet away from any hoistway or inside floor openings, or more than 10 feet away from an exterior wall? [29 CFR (b)(1)] Note: The exterior wall must not extend beyond the top of the material stored. Are non-compatible materials segregated in storage? [29 CFR (b)(3)] YES NO Are bagged materials stacked by stepping-back the layers and cross-keying the stack at least every 10 bags? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Is it prohibited to store more material on scaffolds or runways than needed for the immediate operation? [29 CFR (b)(5)] Are brick stacks limited to 7 feet in height? [29 CFR (b)(6)] Note: When a loose brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, it must be tapered back 2 inches on every foot of height above the 4 foot level. When masonry blocks are stacked higher than 6 feet, is the stack tapered back one-half block per tier above the 6-foot level? [29 CFR (b)(7)] Are all nails withdrawn from lumber before lumber is stacked? [29 CFR (b)(8)(i)] Is lumber stacked on level and solidly supported sills? [29 CFR (b)(8)(ii)] Is lumber stacked in a stable, self-supporting manner? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iii)] Are all lumber piles 20 feet or less in height? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iv)] YES NO Are lumber piles to be handled manually stacked a height of 16 feet or less? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iv)] Are all structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock other cylindrical material (unless racked) stacked and blocked to prevent spreading or tilting? [29 CFR (b)(9)] Are all masonry walls over 8 feet in height braced to prevent overturning? [29 CFR (b)] YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 68 of 389

69 PROGRAM OVERVIEW CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA 29 CFR 1910 OSHA 29 CFR 1926 INTRODUCTION: Outlines the safety requirements for a construction company. It provides guidance for tool selection, housekeeping, PPE, fall protection, and for the identification and control of other general construction industry hazards. TRAINING: Employees will be trained on safety policies and procedures as well as the hazards posed by their work assignment for each construction site or job. ACTIVITIES: Every construction job is unique and each must be assessed to identify its potential health and safety risks and communicate the identified hazards to employees Review operations for additional activities which could impact both contractors and employees Write and communicate polices and procedures Conduct compliance audits when contractors are on site FORMS: Safety Checklist Training Attendance Roster As needed: First Aid Kit Supply Requirements On-site Code of Safe Practices 15. Purpose 16. Scope 17. Responsibilities 18. Procedure 19. Safety Information 20. Training Information & Requirements 21. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 69 of 389

70 Construction Safety Program 1. Purpose. Effective implementation for job safety and health of our employees requires a written safety program fully endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within the company. This safety program is designed to establish clear company goals and objectives and will be communicated to all required personnel. It encompasses the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis. 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR that prompt a revision. 1.3 When changes occur to any related regulatory document that prompts a revision of this document. 1.4 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. 2. Scope. This program applies to all construction job sites and company employees. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Provide sufficient human and financial resources to address federal, state, and local safety and health compliance Assign compliance and general safety and health responsibilities to the Safety Officer (or other specifically designated person) Establish employee safety and health management goals Review company safety and health management performance at least annually Hold managers accountable for safety and health performances through annual performance appraisals or at the completion of each job. 3.2 Project Managers: Assess each job to identify overall safety and health hazards and reassess as new components of the job begin Develop safety rules and job procedures necessary to eliminate or control hazards Conduct employee orientation and on-the-job training. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 70 of 389

71 3.2.4 Conduct scheduled employee safety meetings Conduct on-going informal hazard identification checks, inspections and scheduled formal audits Report all incidents as required Investigate and document all accidents per accident investigation procedures Support and enforce all company, department, and job specific safety rules, policies and procedures and utilize disciplinary procedures as described in the company s Employee Handbook Maintain required safety documentation (training, incident reports, equipment records, inspection/audit information, etc.). 3.3 Job Site Supervisor: Implement safe conditions, work practices enforcement of safety rules, laws and procedures in the daily supervision of all employees Employee owned PPE is not allowed. Ensure that each employee is provided with and wears the prescribed personal protective equipment from the company that is necessary for the task at hand Ensure that all employees are informed of the safety rules for the job site or work location Enforce all safety rules and regulations Instruct employees on the recognized hazards of the job and how to avoid and report unsafe conditions Ensure that all regulatory standards for repair and maintenance of equipment are followed Ensure that all defective or damaged equipment is tagged and removed form the work site immediately until repaired or replaced Assist in the scheduled safety inspections as directed by the safety officer or other designated person Assist in the new hire orientation of all new employees before permitting them to enter the job site Assist the safety officer in the investigation of all accidents Serve on the company Employee Safety Committee. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 71 of 389

72 Maintain required safety documentation (training, incident reports, equipment records, inspection/audit information, etc.). 3.4 Safety Officer (as needed or required): Develop programs as necessary to comply with federal, state, and local employee safety and health regulations Coordinate provision of employee and management safety and health training Maintain all required documentation (training, incident reports, equipment records, inspection/audit information, etc.) Participate in the Employee Safety and Health Committee Prepare safety and health management status reports including Workers Compensation loss summary, compliance summary, and trend analysis of audit results, accident and incident causes, safety alerts, and other reported safety concerns. 3.5 Employees: 4. Procedure Follow all safety and job rules and procedures Use only tools, equipment, and materials for which training and authorization have been given Report all incidents and accidents as required Report all observed unsafe conditions and behaviors Participate in all employee safety and health training programs. 4.1 General construction safety work rules: Employees are to follow all task and job site policies, and procedures Employees are to refrain from running, horseplay, practical jokes, and other activities, which could lead to the injury of the employee or others Employees are to report to work in appropriate attire and condition to ensure constant awareness of surroundings and activities Employees under the influence of alcohol or drugs will be removed from the work site immediately Employees will only use, repair, or adjust tools and machinery if trained and authorized by supervisory personnel. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 72 of 389

73 4.1.6 Employees will maintain good housekeeping in all work areas and follow housekeeping schedules as required by job procedures and department policies Employees must report all unsafe conditions or behaviors to their supervisor immediately Employees must report all injuries to their supervisor immediately Employees are expected to assist in keeping the work site as free of debris as possible Employees are not allowed on the work site with firearms, explosives or unlawful weapons. Employees with such possessions on their person or property will be removed from the job site immediately Loose or ragged clothing shall not be worn while working around machinery Rings and/or other jewelry should be removed while working around machinery Know the location of emergency exits, first aid kits, fire extinguishers, fire alarms Do not use compressed air for dusting or cleaning clothing Attend and participate in the weekly tool box safety meetings Wear only the approved personal protective equipment Fall protection is required when exposed to falls greater than 6 feet Never ride mobile scaffolding All scaffolding must be properly constructed, with toe-boards, mid-rails, and handrails over 10 feet All scaffolding must be inspected daily by the designated competent person All ladders shall be inspected before use Ladders are only to be used within appropriate compliance guidelines Do not operate any machine unless trained and authorized to do so All gas cylinders shall be chained in an upright position Never remove a safety guard from machinery or equipment. 4.2 Specific jobsite construction industry safety work rules are located in the section labeled General Safety in this manual. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 73 of 389

74 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Jobsite Safety Audits Jobsite hazard assessment: The Safety Officer or Project Manager conducts a General Hazard Assessment during the planning phase of a new project and updates the assessment as the job progresses. The completed assessment form is maintained in the main office, or where similar records are maintained Jobsite safety audits: The Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor will conduct formal jobsite safety audits on an annual basis for long term projects or on an as needed basis for shorter term projects to evaluate the overall safety of the jobsite Findings will be reviewed with the employees or the Subcontractor contact The Safety Officer or Project Manager will use recently completed audit reports during subsequent audits to ensure appropriate corrective actions are implemented as necessary Daily walk through safety audits: The Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor will walk through assigned areas on an as needed basis to identify any unsafe condition or behavior Hazards are to be corrected immediately If a hazard cannot be corrected immediately, a Hazard Alert Form will be completed and submitted to all affected subcontractors. Those subcontractors will inform employees of the hazards and appropriate precautionary measures. In such cases, the Job Site Supervisor must recheck the area in a reasonable time frame to ensure the hazard is appropriately corrected Work affected by any hazard that could cause serious injury must be halted until the hazard is corrected. 5.2 Accident and Incident Investigation Reporting incidents is critical to the effectiveness of any injury and illness prevention program. The purposes of incident reporting are as follows: Provide documentation for claims Provide information to focus employee safety and health management efforts National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 74 of 389

75 5.3 Reporting Procedures Provide historical data to measure progress Allow for continuous improvement Employees must report all incidents and accidents to the Job Site Supervisor (or the Safety Officer or Project Manager) that will complete the following forms. Portions of the report form may be completed by the employee or a Supervisor designee The employee s Supervisor must complete all portions relating to the accident/incident investigation and must also ensure the full completion of all portions The Safety Officer or Project Manager must review and sign the completed form Copies of the report must be forwarded to the following people, as needed or required: Safety Officer Claims Coordinator Internal Human Resources Representative 5.4 Accident Investigation or Employee Incident Report flow: The employee reports the incident to his/her Supervisor as soon as he/she is aware of the event The Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor conducts an investigation and completes the Incident Report as soon as possible and forwards the report to the Project Manager or management The Manager reviews the report to ensure the completion of a thorough investigation and sends copies to the appropriate personnel Once the reports are completed and forwarded to the appropriate personnel, the following personnel will be undertake the listed activities to reduce the risk of recurrence: Safety Officer: Regularly reviews Incident Reports to identify trends Compiles an Incident Trend Summary Report which is presented to the Senior Manger or to the Employee Safety and Health Committee who initiates organizationwide corrective actions to address the identified trends Works with the Project Manager and/or Job Site Supervisor to ensure the correction of identified hazards. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 75 of 389

76 Claims Officer: Uses the Incident Reports to complete the necessary Worker s Compensation forms and to initiate claims management activities Project Manager: Follows up with the Supervisor and employees to ensure the correction of identified incident/accident causes Shares relevant information with the Supervisor in other areas of their departments to ensure similar hazardous situations are addressed Ensures the provision of sufficient resources to make the necessary corrections and changes. Such resources may include equipment, materials, money, time, and support for policy changes Senior Manager: Reviews Incident Reports as needed to determine the types of incidents occurring within the organization and the identified hazards in order to make appropriate decisions regarding safety and health management efforts Reviews the Incident Report Trend Summary Report provided by the Safety Officer to identify overall facility needs and to provide the leadership necessary to ensure workplace safety and health Employee Safety and Health Committee (as needed or required): The Committee will be composed of both management and non-management personnel The Safety Officer is responsible for maintaining a list of current Committee members. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 76 of 389

77 5.5 Recordkeeping. At a minimum the company will maintain the following records: Record Responsible Person Location Duration Main Office Employee Safety Orientation records Safety Officer or other Employee File or designated person with similar Until superseded Employee Safety Training Records Inspection Records and Audit Reports (w/corrective actions noted) Accident Reports (w/ corrective actions noted) OSHA 300 Log and 301 Forms Employee and Subcontractor Disciplinary Records regarding Safety/OSHA Compliance 6. Training and Information. 6.1 New employees: Safety Officer or other designated person Safety Officer or other designated person Safety Officer or other designated person Safety Officer or other designated person Human Resources or other designated person Main Office Employee File or with similar records Main Office or with similar records Main Office or with similar records Main Office or with similar records Human Resources Office or with similar records Until superseded Until superseded or all action items are closed (whichever is longer) 5 years 5 years Until Obsolete All new employees will receive an orientation provided by the Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor prior to their exposure to work place hazards The new employee orientation will cover the following items: Overview of the Safety Program Review of employee and management responsibilities Hazard reporting procedures Incident and accident reporting procedures Employee Safety Committee function and members General work rules Department work rules Method of access to first aid treatment Acceptable clothing Personal Protective Equipment required on the job Location of all safety equipment National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 77 of 389

78 Fall protection Scaffolds Materials and handling Cranes and hoists Tag lines Barricades Machine guarding, lock out/tag out Confined space entry Vehicle safety Housekeeping Job tasks hazards and methods of control Federal and State OSHA required training The initial orientation documentation will be maintained by the Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor and stored in the main office or the employee file (or where similar training records are maintained). 6.2 Transfer employees: Employees transferring within the company will be trained in the items and exposures which previous training did not cover. The Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor will provide this training prior to the employee s exposure to new hazards. Updated training will be documented on the employee s training record and stored in the main office or the employee file (or where similar training records are maintained). 6.3 Specific job/task training: Employees must be trained to perform specific tasks in the construction job site such as forklifts, scaffold erection and confined space entry The Job Site Supervisor will identify which tasks require specific training and ensure this training is completed prior to permitting the employee to perform that task Training will be provided by the Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor and documented on the employee s training record and stored in the main office or the employee file (or where similar training records are maintained). 6.4 Ongoing training: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 78 of 389

79 7. Definitions Every construction job is unique. The Safety Officer or Job Site Supervisor must assess each job to identify its potential health and safety risks. Appropriate control methods will be communicated via: New job orientation Daily morning tailgate meetings Weekly site updates/training Scheduled skills training programs Incident - An incident is an unplanned event resulting in a minor injury (e.g. a small bruise) or minor property damage (e.g. a broken box with lightly damaged, mostly usable contents) or has the potential to result in injury or property damage (a near miss). Incidents do not usually result in a claim. Accident - An accident is an unplanned event resulting in an injury requiring treatment (inhouse first aid or outside medical attention) or more substantial property damage. Accidents usually result in a claim. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 79 of 389

80 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER GENERAL CONSTRUCTION SAFETY Training Includes Overviews Of: Welding Emergency Action and First Aid Lifting Hazard Communication Temperature Extremes Electrical Hazards Lighting and Sanitation Chemical Storage and Flammable Liquids Barricades and Signs Flammable Liquids Public Protection PPE Scaffolds Forklifts and Machinery Fall Protection Tools and Equipment Guarding Excavation Ladders Concrete or Steel Erection Confined Space Power Lines Commercial Diving INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 80 of 389

81 CONTRACTOR/CONTRACT EMPLOYEE SAFETY TRAINING REQUIREMENTS PURPOSE: The purpose of this questionnaire is to provide this employer with necessary safety information about your prospective temporary employee to aid in the decision to hire him or her. Agency Name: Address: Safety Director: Fax #: Phone #: Employee Name: Address: Fax #: Phone #: Job to be placed in: Department: Supervisor: Phone #: Previous Safety Training Identify below the types of training attended within past 3 years. Accident Investigation Ergonomics Bloodborne Pathogens Safety Office Safety Compressed Gas Safety Woodworking Safety Electrical Safety Work Practices Job Hazard Analysis Eye Protection Hazardous Substances Flammable & Combustible Liquids Safety Laboratory Safety Hand Protection Confined Space Entry HAZWOPER Hazard Communication Head Protection Emergency Response Procedures Hearing Protection Machine Guarding Housekeeping Hand & Power Tool Safety Industrial Fire Safety Ladder Safety Lead Safety Process Safety Respiratory Protection Barricades Safety Belts & Lifelines or Fall Protection Electrical Safety Scaffolding Sling, Rigging & Crane Safety Slips, Trips and Falls Safety Working in Hot Conditions Welding Safety Trenching and Excavations Safety Page 7 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 81 of 389

82 Job to be placed in: Department: COMPANY USE ONLY Supervisor: Phone #: Recommended Safety Training The training listed below must be completed before job assignment. Accident Investigation Ergonomics Bloodborne Pathogens Safety Office Safety Compressed Gas Safety Woodworking Safety Electrical Safety Work Practices Job Hazard Analysis Eye Protection Hazardous Substances Flammable & Combustible Liquids Safety Laboratory Safety Hand Protection Confined Space Entry HAZWOPER Hazard Communication Head Protection Emergency Response Procedures Hearing Protection Machine Guarding Housekeeping Hand & Power Tool Safety Industrial Fire Safety Ladder Safety Lead Safety Process Safety Respiratory Protection Barricades Safety Belts & Lifelines or Fall Protection Electrical Safety Scaffolding Sling, Rigging & Crane Safety Slips, Trips and Falls Safety Working in Hot Conditions Welding Safety Trenching and Excavations Safety Key Personnel Review Name: Title: Phone #: Signature: Date: Time: Name: Title: Phone #: Signature: Date: Time: AUTHORIZATION YES NO Approved? Further detailed on attachment: I acknowledge that I have conducted a review of the information contained in this questionnaire and approve the employee for temporary hire in the above described position. Name: Date: Time: Signature: Permanent Retention File: Date Filed: Title: QUESTIONNAIRE RETENTION INFORMATION Location: Filed By: Page 8 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 82 of 389

83 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 83 of 389

84 CONTRACTOR SAFETY INFORMATION PURPOSE: The purpose of this questionnaire is to provide this employer with necessary information about your company s safety program. All items must be completed. Company Name: Address: Safety Director: Fax #: Phone #: Accident/Injury Experience Using last year s OSHA 300 Log or Worker s Compensation Documentation, fill in the following: Number of recordable injuries/illnesses Number of restricted work days Number of lost work days Number of fatalities Employee hours worked last year Number of injuries/illnesses requiring hospitalization Overall Safety Program Compliance YES NO Does your company have a written safety program? Is the program revised/updated annually? Does your written program contain a statement that your company abides by all federal (OSHA), state and local rules and regulations relating to safe work practices? Do you have a new hire safety orientation program? Do you have handbooks for any of the below safety programs? Have you included copies of any of the handbooks? Does your new hire program include any training on the following? Head Protection Emergency Response Procedures Eye Protection Hazardous Substances Hearing Protection Machine Guarding Respiratory Protection Barricades Safety Belts & Lifelines or Fall Protection Electrical Safety Scaffolding Sling, Rigging & Crane Safety Housekeeping Hand & Power Tool Safety Welding Safety Trenching and Excavations Safety Hand Protection Confined Space Entry Bloodborne Pathogens Safety Office Safety Compressed Gas Safety Woodworking Safety Flammable & Combustible Liquids Safety Laboratory Safety Industrial Fire Safety Ladder Safety Do you have a Supervisor safety training program? Outline included? Do you conduct regular safety meetings? How often? Are records kept? Do you generate accident investigation reports? Do you perform project safety inspections? Who conducts them? How often? Job Title. Page 9 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 84 of 389

85 Lockout/Tagout Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve any Lockout/Tagout situations? Copy of your Lockout/Tagout procedures included? Hazard Communication Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve the use of any Hazardous Substances? Copy of your hazard communication procedures included? Copy of your MSDS s included? Confined Spaces Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve working in a Confined Space? Copy of your work plan included? Copies of training certification of the pertinent employees included? Copy of your entry permit procedures included? Elevated Work and Fall Protection Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve any Elevated Work? Copy of your fall protection and elevated work rules policy included? Bloodborne Pathogens Safety Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve potential contact with bloodborne pathogens? Does your bid involve potential emergency rescue and response? Have designated people been trained on such? Powered Industrial Vehicles Compliance YES NO Does your bid involve the use of any powered industrial vehicles? Have designated people been trained on such? Respiratory Protection Compliance YES NO Does your company have a written respiratory program or policy? Have employees been fit-tested quantitatively or qualitatively? Do you have established medical surveillance procedures? What type of respiratory training have your employees had? What type of respiratory equipment are they permitted to wear? Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 85 of 389

86 Key Personnel List the key on-site people you would use for this project and list the last three (3) projects they will be involved with in this capacity. Name Job Title Project 1. Project 2. Project 3. Name Job Title Project 1. Project 2. Project 3. Name Job Title Project 1. Project 2. Project 3. RECOMMENDATIONS Recommended for Award? YES NO Name: Date: Time: Signature: Title: Comments AUTHORIZATION YES NO Approved? Further detailed on attachment: I acknowledge that I have conducted a review of the information contained in this questionnaire and approve the contractor for the above described work. Name: Date: Time: Signature: Title: ASSESSMENT QUESTIONNAIRE RETENTION INFORMATION Permanent Retention File: Location: Date Filed: Filed By: Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 86 of 389

87 CONTRACTOR SAFETY INSPECTION REPORT JOB NAME: JOB #: SUPERINTENDENT: DATE: PERSON(S) MAKING INSPECTION: SUBCONTRACTORS ONSITE (List Name & Trade): CATEGORY ADEQUATE UPON INSPECTION NEEDS CONSIDERATION IMMEDIATE ATTENTION REQUIRED N/A ACTION TAKEN Job Information OSHA 300 forms posted and complete? OSHA poster posted? Phone no. for the nearest medical center posted? Toolbox talks up to date? Work areas properly signed and barricaded? Housekeeping General neatness of work area? Projecting nails removed or bent over? Waste containers provided and used? Passageways and walkways clear? Cords and leads off the floor? Fire Prevention Adequate fire extinguishers, checked and accessible? Phone no. of fire department posted? No Smoking posted and enforced near flammables? Electrical Extension cords with bare wires or missing ground prongs taken out of service? Ground fault circuit interrupters being used? Terminal boxes equipped with required covers? Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 87 of 389

88 CATEGORY ADEQUATE UPON INSPECTION NEEDS CONSIDERATION IMMEDIATE ATTENTION REQUIRED N/A ACTION TAKEN Hand, Power & Powder Actuated Tools Hand tools inspected regularly? Guards in place on machines? Right tool being used for job at hand? Operators of powder-actuated tools are licensed? Fall Protection Safety rails and cables are secured properly? Employees have D-ring of belts in center of back? Employees exposed to fall hazards are tied off? Employees below protected from falling objects? Ladders Ladders extend at least 36 above the landing? Ladders are secured to prevent slipping, sliding or falling? Ladders with split or missing rungs taken out of service? Stepladders used in fully open position? No step at top two rungs of stepladder? Scaffolding All scaffolding inspected daily? Erected on sound rigid footing? Tied to structure as required? Guardrails, intermediate rails, toe boards and screens in place? Planking is sound and sturdy? Proper access provided? Employees protected from falling objects? Floor & Wall Openings All floor or deck openings are planked over or barricaded? Perimeter protection is in place? Deck planks are secured? Materials stored away from edge? Trenches, Excavation & Shoring Competent person on hand? Excavations are shored or sloped back? Materials are stored at least two feet from trench? Ladders provided every 25 feet in trench? Equipment is a safe distance from edge of trench or excavation? Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 88 of 389

89 CATEGORY ADEQUATE UPON INSPECTION NEEDS CONSIDERATION IMMEDIATE ATTENTION REQUIRED N/A ACTION TAKEN Material Handling Materials are properly stored or stacked? Employees are using proper lifting methods? Tag lines are used to guide loads? Proper number of workers for each operation? Welding & Burning Gas cylinders stored upright? Proper separating distance between fuels and oxygen? Burning/welding goggles or shields are used? Fire extinguishers are nearby? Hoses are in good condition? Cranes Outriggers are extended and swing radius barricade in place? Operator is familiar with load charts? Hand signal charts are on crane? Crane operator logs are up-to-date? Employees kept from under suspended loads? Chains and slings inspected and tagged as required? Concrete Construction Employees are protected from cement dust? Exposed skin is covered? Runways are adequate? Personal Protective Equipment Hard hats are being worn? Safety glasses are being worn? Respirators are used when required? Hearing protection being worn when required? Traffic vests being worn? Unsafe Acts or Practices Observed (List): COMMENTS: AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: DATE: Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 89 of 389

90 PROGRAM OVERVIEW CONTRACTOR SAFETY VERIFICATION PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR General Duty Clause INTRODUCTION: It is the responsibility of the host employer (i.e. the company) to ensure the safety of all workers conducting business on the site. When contractors or temporary employees perform work that involves activities that may put personnel at risk, the company must ensure these contractors have appropriate training, equipment, and work conditions to accomplish the task(s) in a safe manner. An evaluation may be required to ensure that the training and equipment is adequate to control exposure hazards. This program provides a framework for these evaluations. TRAINING: None required ACTIVITIES: Evaluate hazards of tasks and activities at your workplace where contractors and temporary employees may have risk or exposure. Ensure these hazards are controlled and the persons exposed have appropriate training and equipment. Evaluate hazards of tasks and activities which your employees may encounter at another job site or workplace. Ensure these hazards are controlled and your employees have appropriate training and equipment to control these hazards. FORMS: Contractor or Contract Employee Safety Training Requirements Contractor Safety Information Contractor Safety Inspection Report 22. Purpose 23. Scope 24. Responsibilities 25. Procedure 26. Safety Information 27. Training Information & Requirements 28. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 90 of 389

91 Contractor Safety Verification Program 1. Purpose. This program is designed to establish a screening process so that the company may hire and use contractors (or temporary employees) who accomplish the desired job tasks without compromising the safety and health of employees at this facility. The contractor must assure that contract employees are trained on the hazards related to the job, of performing the job safely, and other applicable provisions of the OSHA Regulatory Standards. This safety program describes a systematic approach that will be used to evaluate contractor personnel used at this facility, and provides recommendations and guidelines for selecting contractors. Company management will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis, or more frequently as needed 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR, that prompt revision of this document 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document 1.4 When there is an accident or near-miss incident that relates to this area of safety 1.5 When changes occur to any related document that prompts a revision of this document 1.6 Anytime the safety program procedures fail 2. Scope. This program applies to all company sites and facilities where contractors or sub-contractors are utilized for company business or operations. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management/Supervisors: Ensure contractors are informed of the company emergency action and fire prevention program(s) and the actions contractor employees are required to take during an emergency situation Assure that contractors have the required training and equipment to comply with applicable federal, state and local safety regulations. Documented training and equipment maintenance records may be required to be produced by contractors in some instances Perform periodic inspections of contractor work and records to assure compliance with applicable regulations Assign or designate responsibility to a company employee to act as the primary liaison between the company and the contractor for safety-related issues Periodically hold meetings with contractors or contract employees to discuss on-going safety issues. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 91 of 389

92 3.2 Employees: Report any hazardous conditions or situations to company management or your supervisor, as needed or required 3.3 Safety Officer: 4. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of this program as needed or required Act as the liaison between the company and contractors, if designated to do so. 4.1 Emergency Action and Fire Prevention Program. All contract employers will be informed, prior to the initiation of the contractors' work at the site, of the applicable provisions of the facility emergency action safety program and all other information as required by the relevant OSHA Standard. 4.2 Contractor Pre-Qualification Policy. Contractors may be required to produce evidence that they are aware of regulatory compliance requirements for specific tasks or activities at company sites or locations. To evaluate contractor performance during or prior to the awarding of contract work, the company may utilize the Contractor Safety Information form, or an equivalent document, to assure adequate levels of past safety performance. As a means to assure that contract employees follow the safety rules of the facility, including safe work practices required by relevant regulations and policies the following criteria and information relating to the contractor will be reviewed and complied with before any contract for work on site is approved: Information relating to contract employers' safety performance and programs Methods of informing the contractor (and our personnel) of known potential hazards related to the contractor's work and applicable provisions of the facility emergency action safety program Safe work practices to control the entrance, presence and exit of contract employers and contract employees in covered process areas, or other areas where known hazards exist Evaluation of contractor performance in complying with specific safety standards Contract employee injury and illness logs related to safety standards A list of unique hazards presented by contractors' work or potential hazards generated by the contractor in the workplace will be communicated to company management and other company employees who would require this information to maintain a safe workplace. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 92 of 389

93 4.3 Routine Contractor Compliance Inspections. Routine contractor compliance inspections will be conducted periodically when contractors are on site. The inspection will be conducted to discover conditions and work practices that do not conform to best management practices regarding contractor safety compliance. The Contractor Safety Inspection Report form, or an equivalent document, may be used to facilitate the inspection process Contractor Safety Inspection Team. The company contractor inspection team will be comprised of selected members of management/supervisors and hourly personnel Inspection Intervals. The Safety Officer or other designated person will coordinate inspection dates and times with all assigned inspection team members. Inspections will be conducted on an as needed basis while work is in progress, or at least annually for long-term work Inspection report. The Safety Officer or other designated person will develop a contractor safety report based on the inspection items noted during the inspection. The following items will be accomplished: 5. Safety Information The pertinent sections of the report will be distributed immediately to personnel responsible for correcting deficiencies noted during the inspection The pertinent sections of the report will be distributed to all supervisors and key management personnel affected by the contractor s operation. Supervisors will brief the employees on the results. Any employee requesting to be placed on the distribution list will be accommodated The Safety Officer or other designated person will develop a statistical analysis of deficiencies noted to determine jobs/areas that have a high incidence of contractor non-compliance. These areas will be emphasized during future inspections and meetings. This analysis will become a determining factor in future awards of work to the contractor Any deficiencies noted will be immediately corrected by the contractor or a stop work order will be issued. 5.1 Contractor Safety Meetings. A well ordered flow of information is essential to a good Contractor Safety Verification Program. Company management through contractor meetings at all levels intends to ensure that all contractors awarded work will maintain a high degree of safety compliance at all times Contractor meeting agendas. The Safety Officer will develop agendas serving various topics of importance to the Contractor Safety Verification Program. The agendas will be flexible. They will be intended to ensure the highest degree of compliance to existing regulations Contractor meeting schedules. Contractor safety meetings will be conducted on a regular basis and when operational changes to equipment, facilities, or the job occur that impacts the Contractor Safety Verification Program. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 93 of 389

94 5.1.3 Departmental staff meetings. Contractor safety topics will be included in the agenda of selected staff meetings. The Safety Officer will keep department heads informed of contractor safety performance developments in their area. Department heads may ask the Safety Officer to provide contractor safety briefings as required Supervisor meetings. Contractor safety issues will be included in the agenda of selected meetings during times when contractors are used in their departments. Department heads will ensure that selected Contractor Safety Verification Program information is transmitted to supervisors for inclusion in meetings. Supervisors may ask the Safety Officer or another designated person to provide contractor safety briefings as required. 5.2 Specific Safety Standards Requiring Contractor Safety Compliance. The following standards will be reviewed if the contractor (or temporary employee) engages in activities that could fall under the jurisdiction of the specific standard: Confined Space 29 CFR Fall Protection 29 CFR , 119, 128, 129, 130, 131 Forklift 29 CFR Hazard Communication 29 CFR Hazardous Waste Operations 29 CFR Lockout Tagout 29 CFR Process Safety 29 CFR Respiratory Protection 29 CFR Welding Safety 29 CFR Training and Information. 6.1 All contractors will ensure that their employees are properly trained about the hazards of the workplace (including, but not limited to known fire, explosion and or toxic hazards, uncontrolled energy, and confined spaces). To facilitate this process, the company may utilize the Contractor/Contract-Employee Safety Training Requirements form, or an equivalent document, to provide documented evidence of training Contractors (including temporary employment agencies) used by the company are required to provide training to their employees in the work practices necessary for their specific job. Additionally, the company Safety Officer or other designated company personnel, in coordination with the contractor, will conduct process hazard analyses to identify, evaluate, and control processes involving highly hazardous chemicals Whenever there are outside contractor s present, coordination with company management, supervisors or other designated company personnel is mandated. For example, the company will inform the contractor (and vice versa) when equipment cannot be touched, re-energized or restarted Based on interviews with the contractors and/or any previous employers, company management will ensure, through periodic evaluations, that the training provided to contractor employees by the contractor is equivalent to the training required for direct hire employees. The burden of training for contractor employees remains with the contractor. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 94 of 389

95 7. Definitions Contractors used by the company must: None at this time Assure their employees are trained in safe work practices needed to perform the job Assure their employees are instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the job and the applicable provisions of the facility emergency action safety program Document the required training and the means to verify their employees have understood the training Assure their employees follow the facility safety rules and work practices Advise the company of unique hazards presented by the contractor's work. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 95 of 389

96 BOMB THREAT CHECKLIST KEEP THE CALLER ON THE LINE AS LONG AS POSSIBLE! DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY AND REPORT THREAT EXACT TIME AND DATE OF CALL: am pm EXACT WORDS OF CALLER VOICE ACCENT MANNER Loud Local Calm High Pitched BACKGROUND NOISE Factory Machines LANGUAGE SPEECH THREATENED FACILITY FAMILIARITY Excellent Fast Much Foreign Rational Bedlam Fair Distinct Some Raspy Race Coherent Music Foul Stutter None Intoxicated Not Local Deliberate Office Machines Good Slurred Soft Region Righteous Mixed Poor Slow Deep Angry Street Traffic Other Distorted Pleasant Irrational Trains Nasal Other Incoherent Animals Lisp Emotional Quiet Other Laughing Voices Airplanes Party Atmosphere QUESTIONS TO ASK CALLER: 1. When is the bomb going to explode 2. Where is the bomb 3. What kind of bomb is it 4. What does it look like 5. Why did you place the bomb 6. What is your address Completed by: Date: Page 9 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 96 of 389

97 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 97 of 389

98 PROGRAM OVERVIEW CRISIS AND DISASTER PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: 29CFR ,.38,.157,.165 Best Practice Guidance: OSHA, EPA, DOH, Homeland Security INTRODUCTION: This program provides guidance for the contingency planning of unplanned, detrimental events interrupting company operations and activities for a long period of time (several days or more). Examples of such disasters include: natural disasters, fires, explosions, acts of terrorism, or serious environmental, health or safety events affecting the company s ability to operate. The program includes guidelines for contingency planning, procedures to follow during a crisis or disaster and post-crisis and disaster activities. It also defines training requirements and delineates management and employee responsibilities. TRAINING: Any person with duties or responsibilities under the plan must be trained or informed. ACTIVITIES: Evaluate the need for a crisis and disaster plan, taking into consideration any hazardous chemicals or processes that may be impacted by a disaster Write plans, where required Ensure procedures and processes are in place to protect employees, systems, and processes Communicate disaster response information to employees and emergency response team members, as needed FORMS: Bomb Threat Checklist Disaster program (template) Earthquake Preparedness Evacuation and Relocation Procedure Training Attendance Roster 15. Purpose 16. Scope 17. Responsibilities 18. Procedure 19. Safety Information 20. Training and Information 21. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 98 of 389

99 Crisis and Disaster Program 1. Purpose. This program will assist in planning for and mitigating the effects of a workplace crisis or disaster. 2. Scope. This program applies to all facilities and sites within the company. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Write disaster/crisis programs which outline the types of situations and contingency programs for action should a crisis or disaster occur. These include evacuation programs, and activities that must occur before during and after the occurrence of a crisis or disaster Assure all personnel are aware of their responsibilities and actions to take during a crisis or disaster Arrange with community resources, neighboring businesses or others to provide shelter and/or medical treatment for employees who require it Establish and communicate a chain of command for incidents and events Ensure the resources are available to mitigate or remediate a situation where employee (or community) health and safety may be at risk due to company activities, processes or activities. 3.2 Management and Supervisors: Assure all employees are accounted for and safe during a crisis or disaster Train employees and staff in their responsibilities and actions to take during a crisis or disaster Follow established procedures during a crisis or disaster Perform evacuation drills as needed or required to assure that employees and staff understand and can follow their established procedures. 3.3 Employees: Attend training Follow established procedures during a crisis or disaster. 3.4 Safety Officer (as needed or required): Assist in the development and implementation of this program. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 99 of 389

100 4. Procedure. 4.1 Pre-programming: Notification: The following groups, agencies or persons should be notified of the content and activities the company will take in the event of a disaster Local fire/police departments should be notified of evacuation relocation points, location of utility service shutdown valves and any hazardous materials processes or storage locations at the facility. Additionally, they should be made aware of the availability of emergency response equipment that is stored on-site (fire protection equipment, respiratory equipment, hazardous spill response kits, etc.) Agreements may also be made for trained employees or company equipment to be utilized in the event of a community crisis State emergency response agencies (if in a zone or area likely for crisis or disaster) should be notified of on-site shelter locations, the availability of emergency response equipment and large amounts of hazardous materials used or stored on site that may impact the community during a crisis or disaster Management and Supervisors to inform them of their responsibilities and actions during and after a crisis occurs. Actions should be specific and detailed in the company s written crisis/disaster or emergency program(s) Employees to inform them of their actions to be taken during a crisis. Actions should be detailed in the company s written crisis/disaster or emergency program(s) Evacuation to the Outside: Evacuation points outside the building should be established for all employees. Employees should evacuate the area using the nearest exit and then make their way to their relocation point to assure they are accounted for Shelter in Place: Community crisis may call for employees to remain at the workplace past their required shift, and may prevent other shift employees from reporting to work. Only those operations critical to the company and that have significant environmental, safety or business justification to continue operation should be continued. All other operations of a non-critical nature should be discontinued. Arrangement should be made for food, sanitation, housekeeping and (depending on the potential duration of the crisis), for sleeping and comfort of the employees being sheltered. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 100 of 389

101 4.1.4 Shelter at Other Locations: Events (fires, explosions, etc.) may necessitate the need for employee evacuations for either temporary or extended periods of time. In such cases, employees may be sent home for the day or may be evacuated temporarily from the facility. In cases of inclement weather, arrangements may be made with neighboring companies, churches or other establishments to temporarily relocate these employees, so the employees are not required to be exposed to the cold, wind, rain or snow for the duration of the evacuation. Methods of communication should be maintained between a responsible employee at the relocation site(s) and company management to update oneanother on the status of their respective situations. 4.2 Contingency Programming: Primary contingency programs should be made for specific actions to take during a crisis or disaster. For example, should the computer network be damaged, are corporate files backed up on a daily or weekly basis so that customer lists, invoices and other important data are retrievable? Alternative or back-up programs may also need to be arranged or programmed for, should the resources for the primary contingency fail. For example, if a power-outage were to occur, and an on-site back-up generator were to fail, what arrangements and contingencies would need to occur to assure that all employees were properly evacuated, or that the chemical process tank ventilation systems were kept operating to prevent the build up of explosive levels of gas or hazardous fumes? 4.3 Crisis/Disaster Process: Chain of Command Determinations must be made and designated in the written program for who is in charge of the situation and when they cede responsibility over to someone with greater authority. For minor incidents and major incidents that affect only the facility and employees, normally the most senior manager present would be designated to be in charge. For incidents that involve community resources and response agencies, their incident commander will take charge upon arrival. State or federal response agencies will have jurisdiction over all other community or company personnel Evacuation/Relocation Determinations must be made, and arrangements for the evacuation and relocation of employees during a crisis or disaster. These spaces must be kept clear, and in relatively good condition, so they are able to accommodate the evacuees. Methods of communications may need to be established and maintained so employees and incident command can be provided with updates and resource needs Notification and Contacts Employees may need to contact their families or other persons to assure them of their safety during the crisis (especially if the crisis is publicized by the media or if it affects the community at large). Arrangements should be programmed for and implemented to provide these lines of communication. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 101 of 389

102 4.3.4 Medical Management Injured or overwhelmed employees may require basic medical attention. A specific location should be programmed for and set up for employees who may require first aid. Employees should be informed of the location of this station during training. If no trained employees or staff is available to monitor the station, communication methods should be in place to contact community resources to provide medical treatment, first aid, or transportation to a hospital or clinic If a fatality occurs or more than 3 persons are hospitalized due to a work-related incident, reports must be made to OSHA within 8 hours of the incident Weathering the Crisis If the evacuation is going to be of a long duration, employees may need to be provided with activities or entertainment to keep them occupied. Books, magazines, videos, games or other sources of entertainment may be provided in such cases. In all cases (short or long duration evacuations), employees should be regularly updated on the situation, the activities taking place, and the estimated time until they will be allowed to return to work. 4.4 Post-Crisis/Disaster Activities: Medical Treatment - Injured or overwhelmed employees may require further medical attention. Depending upon the type of injury or illness documentation and reports may need to be made to regulatory authorities. Additional counseling or follow-up medical services may be required for some employees. Arrangements should be made to facilitate these types of situations Restoring Services and Utilities Public utility services may be overwhelmed in cases of community disasters. Unless there is a process that is critical to the health and safety of the community, patience is required to wait for restoration of utility services. Where trained persons can restore on-site utilities that have been purposely shut down during the crisis, utilities can be restored as appropriate. In such cases, written procedures or step-by-step checklists should be in place to assure the restoration is performed properly and safely Property Damage Clean up, rebuilding and disposal of structural waste may be regulated by municipal, state or federal agencies. In cases where the crisis or disaster is the root cause, the permit process (and associated time delays) may be able to be waved, provided the activities comply with all applicable environmental, health and safety regulations. Arrangements should be made with the municipal (city or town) officials In cases where the property damage is minimal and can be cleaned, repaired or replaced without the need for regulatory interaction, such activities can proceed without notification to authoritative agencies Leaves of Absence/Time Off Employees may require some time off to attend to personal business in times of community crisis. The company human resources representative should be able to advise management on the appropriate policies for vacation, leave without pay, family or medical leave act absences or other alternatives that can be used to facilitate this Restoring Routine It is important to employee morale and the functioning of the business to return to normal operations as soon as possible after a crisis or disaster. Even a partial return to operations is preferable to full-scale shut down, as employees can then see that the company is functioning and that things will get back to regular operations in time Updating Procedures and Programs Once the crisis or disaster is over, assure that the written emergency and crisis/disaster programs functioned appropriately. (Did the employees follow the program, and/or did the program provide appropriate guidance?) Update documentation accordingly. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Types of Crises: Power outages Stoppage or shut down of electrical services due to an incident or fire, or direct outages from the utility service provider. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 102 of 389

103 5.1.2 Utility shut downs Gas or other utility service interruptions, either in the plant delivery system or direct outages from the utility service provider Hazardous material spills Releases of hazardous materials to the ground, air or water inside the facility or in the community that may impact the facility operations Chemical leaks seepage or spillage of chemicals from company process lines or tanks that may endanger the health and safety of employees Terror threats bomb threats or threats of violence against the company or its employees Minor fire In-plant (or in the community) fires which may impact all or part of the company s ability to operate for a short duration Minor Explosions Small, contained explosions that cause injury to a few employees or property damage to a contained area of the building Weather storms and phenomenon Ice storms, tornado or hurricane warnings, blizzards or torrential rains that impact the public safety and prevent employees from reporting to work in a safe manner. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 103 of 389

104 5.2 Types of Disasters: Tornados Common in the mid-west, these are weather phenomenon which appear as funnel-shaped cloud of violently whirling air. Tornadoes that touch down on the ground can travel distances of several miles and jump or reappear along the storm-front path in several places, usually destroying everything in their paths while on the ground Hurricanes Common in coastal areas, these are weather phenomenon that have winds greater than 72 mph. They are often accompanied by torrential rains and can cause significant property damage or loss of life Earthquakes More common in the west coast areas or where the shifting of tectonic plates or volcanic activity can occur. The ground will tremble and shake, sometimes violently, and can disrupt utilities, power systems, or cause structural damage Floods Common in areas where water systems (lakes, rivers, etc) are close to occupied areas, or where significant tidal shifts can occur, or where torrential rains can cause water retention systems to loose their cohesiveness. Water overflows or is directed to a normally drier area where the area would be inundated and overwhelmed by the deluge Major Fire A fire that affects a large portion of the facility structure or the company s ability to operate normally Major Explosion An explosion that affects a large portion of the facility structure or the company s ability to operate normally Acts of Terrorism Bombs, explosions, fires, disease outbreaks, shootings or other acts imposed on the company or its employees, that affect the facility structure, the company s ability to operate normally, or a large portion of the employee population health and safety (both physically or emotionally) Serious environmental, health or safety events that may impact the company s ability to operate for a long period of time. Examples include chemical spills or leaks from external sources (or by the company) that will take long periods of time to remediate and where it would be unsafe for employees to work, disease outbreaks that affect a large portion of the populace, or public safety issues that prevent employees from reporting to work or the company from operating normally. 5.3 Emergency Drills: Emergency drills. Emergency drills are recommended at least annually. Types of emergency drills may include: fire/evacuation drills, tornado/hurricane sheltering, bomb threats, chemical spills, or other types of disaster drilling Table Top vs. Physical. Although it is more useful to physically hold emergency drills, a table top session to review the programs with management, supervisors and selected employees may replace an actual simulated evacuation. Where tabletop sessions are held, it is highly recommended that physical evacuation drills take place at least every three years Partial evacuation drills. Depending upon the size of the facility and the type of activities performed, a partial evacuation drill may be utilized. Evacuation of a specific area (or group of people in a building section) may be a more useful training tool than requiring all employees to evacuate the workplace. In this way, the entire workforce is not interrupted, and only those people who work in a specific area are affected. 6. Training and Information. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 104 of 389

105 6.1 Employees and Supervisors will be trained in their responsibilities regarding emergencies, crises, and disasters. Training includes: emergency notification, emergency response, the chain of command during an emergency, location and re-location procedures, and activities that may take place after the crisis is over. 6.2 Training records include the topics covered in the training, the date of training and the signature of both the employee and the trainer. Training is provided at least upon initial employment and whenever this program information changes. Where a crisis or disaster is more likely to occur (tornadoes, hurricanes, etc.) this information will be provided to employees and Supervisors at least once per year. Training records are maintained in the main office or where similar employee training information and records are kept. 6.3 Emergency drills are recommended at least annually. Physical evacuation drills are highly recommended at least once every three years. 7. Definitions. Crisis An unprogramned, detrimental event that interrupts the effectiveness of company operations and activities for a specified period of time (usually two days or less). Examples include: power outages; utility shut downs; hazardous material spills; chemical leaks; terror threats; or environmental, health or safety events that may impact the company s ability to operate. Disaster An unprogramned, detrimental event that interrupts the effectiveness of company operations and activities for a long period of time (usually several days or more). Examples include: natural disasters (floods, hurricanes, tornadoes, earthquakes); fire; explosion; acts of terrorism; or serious environmental, health or safety events that may impact the company s ability to operate until the effects are mitigated or remediated. CDC Center for Disease Control DOH Department of Health EPA Environmental Protection Agency FEMA Federal Emergency Management Agency OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 105 of 389

106 DISASTER PROGRAM TEMPLATE INTRODUCTION The purpose of this program is to assist The company and its employees in the programming for the actions to be taken in the event of a company crisis or disaster (natural or man-made). Not all disasters and crises can be programmed for, however this written program takes into account the most likely types of disasters or crises that could occur at our facility and provides information on programming and activities that may be required based on the type of event. GENERAL INFORMATION Company Name Street Address City, State Zip Additional Facilities. List any additional facilities or other addresses/phone numbers that are covered by this program: Program Location. This written program will be located at: (list specific location where program is kept). Copies of this program should be distributed to the following people (by job title) or city/town organizations: Fire Department: Police: Town or City Emergency Response Team: Review/Updates. This program is reviewed by company management at least once per year, and if updated, a copy of the changed program is provided to the above named persons or organizations. Training. Employees and Supervisors will be trained in their responsibilities regarding emergencies, crises, and disasters. Training includes: emergency notification, emergency response, chain of command during an emergency, location and re-location procedures, and activities that may take place after the crisis is over. Training records are kept (list the specific location where these records are maintained). Emergency drills (physical or table top ) are conducted at least annually in accordance with the written Crisis and Disaster Programming program. Facility description: ( number) buildings on site. (Attach a plot map if available). the company is a (list the type of company (mfg, residential care, medical/dental, construction, etc.)) company. We provide (list levels of care offered to residents including #rooms/beds, or services provided to community, or more information on company activities, as applicable). We are located (list location from major traffic arteries in town, etc.). (Attach a map if available). Visitors: To maintain accountability by company management for employees and visitors to our company facilities, all employees who have non-company personnel on company premises will be held responsible for assuring that these visitors are properly informed of what to do in the event of an emergency. Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 106 of 389

107 CHAIN OF COMMAND AND RESPONSIBILITIES Incident Command: Is normally established at the front of the main entrance to the building, at a distance that does not endanger the safety of personnel. However, a different designated location may be used. The location for the company s command center is (state specific location). The incident commander is responsible for: accounting for all employees, assuring local, state or federal agencies are called upon as needed or required: and for the orderly evacuation or relocation of employees to the safe areas or shelters. They may also be responsible to direct emergency response, medical or fire services, and damage mitigation during an incident. Post-incident clean up or remediation efforts may also fall under this person s scope of responsibility. Federal or State Agencies (FEMA - Federal Emergency Management Agency, DOH Department of Health, EPA Environmental Protection Agency): The presence of an established federal or state emergency response agency will take command responsibilities over any other agency or company official. Such agencies and company management will take direction and implement activities under the responsibility and direction of these federal agency personnel. Local Agencies (Government, Health Care Providers) will provide assistance and resources at the direction of federal or state agency personnel. If no federal or state agencies are involved in the emergency situation, these agencies will take direction from the local authorities. If the emergency is related only to a specific company or site, emergency assistance may be offered and provided at the discretion of the agency, based on their public responsibility and jurisdiction. Local Authorities (Fire/Police): Will be in command at any facility or site where called upon to respond, unless federal or state officials have assumed command. Company management will take direction and implement activities under the responsibility and direction of these local agencies. Management: Will be considered commanders at incidents unless state or federal agencies or local emergency response agencies have assumed control and command over the activities and responsibilities for the emergency. Company executive management has ultimate responsibility, and facility or site operations management has responsibility if executive management is not present. The highest-ranking on-site manager will assume command and control, unless executive management has otherwise designated a specific person for these duties. Duties may include the cessation of process or chemical lines, and utilities, based on the type of incident. Examples include the shut down of process tanks, ammonia lines, gas lines, heat generating equipment, ovens, kilns, and electrical mains or circuits. Supervisors: Will be responsible for accounting for their employees, shutting down critical processes, and assuring the safety and well-being of persons under their direct control. An accounting of all personnel will be made and reported to the incident commander to assure that all employees and visitors are accounted for and appropriately situated, based on the type of incident. Duties may include assuring that specific areas are checked to assure that evacuation or relocation has occurred. Employees who have visitors or guests in the facility are responsible for assuring they are told what to do or escorted to the evacuation location. Employees: Are responsible for carrying out their specific responsibilities as designated in the emergency response program, or in this program. Duties may include assuring that specific areas are checked to assure that evacuation or relocation has occurred. Employees who have visitors or guests in the facility are responsible for assuring they are told what to do or escorted to the evacuation location. Company Medical Response Personnel: Are responsible for providing needed medical assistance to employees and visitors, as needed or required. INTERNAL DISASTER PROGRAM This section of the program addresses the overall facility concerns and procedures to ensure the safety and wellbeing of company employees, visitors, guests, etc. An internal facility disaster is an unprogramned event or episode in a facility, which may adversely affect the routine operation or delivery of services. Procedures for the loss of utilities, information on the loss of alarm systems and back-up programs to ensure safety are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 107 of 389

108 Procedures in the event of a threat of structural damage to the facility including references to other sections of the program are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Procedures for managing and reporting food-borne outbreaks or other infectious disease outbreaks are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Procedures for supplementing staff in the event that scheduled staff do not report either as a result of a community disaster or strike are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Procedures for relocation of personnel due to violations or structure damage are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). EVACUATION ASSISTANTS OR RESPONSE TEAMS OSHA recommends (or requires in some states) that evacuation assistance be assigned at a ratio of approximately one warden per 20 people. If facility is a high rise, floor wardens should be utilized to alert residents on their designated floor on hazards or emergencies inside or outside of the building. Teams should be trained in how to alert the building or area occupants on hazards and what steps should be taken, should be knowledgeable in evacuation routes and responsible for accountability of sections or areas of facility, know who to call, what to do and where to go during all hazards. (Training can be provided by the Red Cross or local emergency services.) The listing of current wardens and their areas of responsibility are maintained by company management, the company safety officer, or other designated person. At the company, this person is (name of designated person). Records are maintained to verify that evacuation wardens have been trained in their activities and responsibilities. These records are maintained (state location of training records) by (state job title of person responsible for maintaining training records). MISSING PERSONS A procedure statement should be implemented concerning the handling of a missing person and the process to report this situation. At a minimum, supervisors (and if used, evacuation wardens) should be informed of this process. The methods used to communicate that a missing person exists is/are (state method (i.e. two way radio, inperson, telephone). The following persons should be informed of a missing person (circle all that apply): Incident commander Evacuation Warden Company management Relocation designated person Supervisor Other A search of the building and grounds will take place. The process for performing this search will be directed by the incident commander or their specific designee. The steps for this process are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). When initial search does not locate the missing person, the following officials or agencies will be notified (circle all that apply): Incident commander Company Manager 911 Supervisor Medical Response Personnel Other Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 108 of 389

109 If available, pictures or descriptions of the individual will be provided to response agencies to assist in a broader search for the person. As needed for missing persons, the family or next of kin will be notified by (state job title such as company manager, or agency such as local police department). FIRE SAFETY AND EVACUATION ROUTE PROGRAMS Detailed fire safety directives and procedures for the facility are outlined in this section. For more information on any of the information in this section, contact your local fire department for assistance. Evacuation routes for the building are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the information here). Fire evacuation floor programs need to highlight the location of fire extinguishers, alarm pull boxes, fire escapes and exits. Suggestions should be made out before hand with primary and secondary routes. Floor programs should be located on every floor and room. Procedures for detection of fire, notifications, fire containments, reporting requirements are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). A listing of locations of fire extinguishers and type at each location is (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the locations here). Procedures for safe re-entry into building, including approval from fire official to do so when required are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here including notification signals used, if any). Name of insurance company, and methods to provided notification for claims activities are (state name, address, phone number and any other pertinent information here). Evacuation drills occur (list the frequency and type of drills performed, if any). EVACUATION PROCEDURES AND RESPONSIBILITIES Priorities should be set up before hand for any person with special needs evacuations. (state process for any special needs individuals. Names and/or types of disability may be included in the program, provided written permission is obtained from the individual otherwise generalities and broad based descriptions will suffice as descriptor for the special needs process). The process for assuring that all employees are appropriately evacuated and accounted for is (state process, steps or method). Records, materials and other important activities that must be left and locked in place, or removed from the premises, and the persons responsible for these activities are (list items and job titles of persons responsible). Procedures for notification of families or responsible parties of relocated individuals, injured individuals, etc. are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). The outside designated areas for evacuations are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or list location here). A list of outside facilities which there are transfer agreements, including telephone numbers, address, location and directions from facility and transportation agreements are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or list the facility name address and phone number here). Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 109 of 389

110 The list of community facilities (i.e. shelters, etc.), and telephone numbers of contacts are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or list the facility information here). Procedures for personnel who are sent home or who leave with family during or before a disaster are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here including notification for return to work). BOMB THREAT The written policy should indicate to contact 911 immediately upon notification of a bomb threat. The process to search the building for any suspicious objects or packages is undertaken by local, state or federal authorities, NOT employees. A bomb threat checklist to be used during call in threats (a checklist is included with this program or is available from state and local police stations and local emergency management agencies) is (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Any additional safety instructions (including recommendations from the local police department) for bomb threats are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). For high-risk areas, it is highly recommended that evacuation relocation points be changed on a frequent basis. In this case, employees must be re-trained and be informed of the new relocation point. EMERGENCY GENERATOR POLICY If a generator is located at the facility, labels marking or information on the generator should include: the percentage of normal power available by generator, type of fuel used, length of time it will operate without refueling, and the time delay for generator power after normal power is interrupted. The manufacturer and/or supplier of our generator is (state manufacturer or supplier company name and contact information). Documentation on the maintenance and service for the emergency generator is (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). The areas and services connected to the emergency generator are (list areas and services here). Any receptacles that are powered by the emergency generator are painted (list color). This paint color is maintained by the maintenance staff for the company. Flashlights and batteries are provided to areas or some personnel in the event of a failure of the emergency generator system. The policy or contingency program in the event of emergency generator failure is (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here ). EMERGENCY MEALS AND WATER If your facility serves meals that are prepared on-site, the program for storage of emergency food supplies is (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). It is recommended that emergency stores be maintained that are sufficient to provide the workforce with meals and water for three days. Employees will be designated or volunteer to participate in the preparation, service or clean-up during emergency situations. Additional water supplies may be utilized or stored in areas where emergency situations are likely to involve heat waves, extreme heat or cold, or other contributing environmental factors. Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 110 of 389

111 EMERGENCY PHARMACY PROGRAM Medical and first aid supplies are located at the jobsite trailer. A list of the supplies and the maintenance of them is the responsibility of site superintendent. Employees who utilize the supply during non-emergency situations must inform this person of such use. Employees who regularly take medications should be encouraged to maintain a three-day supply of such medications at their workplace. (Regulated drugs and medications may need to be locked or placed into areas with restricted access.) In the event of a facility evacuation, the following person(s) will be responsible for assuring the first aid kit and other medical supplies are removed from the facility: site superintendent. EXTERNAL DISASTER PROGRAM An external disaster program is an unprogramned event or episode outside of the immediate control of the facility, located in close proximity or in the neighboring community, which may affect routine operations. An external emergency may provide both the opportunity to offer assistance to the community or receive assistance. The following agencies or resources may provide telephone, fax, or in-person notification of localized emergency situations (state agency name such as police, sheriff, fire dept, media, or neighboring businesses). The equipment and services that may be offered to the community, circumstances permitting, are (state equipment types and locations). This equipment or service will be provided with the approval of the senior manager that is on-site and the incident commander for the incident. The local media stations (TV and radio stations) that provide alerts, warnings, and other emergency information are (state station call letters, channels and methods to tune them in). The equipment at the facility used to listen to this information is (list equipment type and location). UTILITY EMERGENCY PROGRAM Procedures should be in place and followed in the event of long-term loss of utilities (telephone, water, gas, electric, etc.). Telecommunications (telephone, faxes and computer networks) loss may be circumvented by another media method such as cellular phones, satellite networks or other media). Provisions for back up communications are (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here). Mutual aid or alternative sites to be utilized in the event of a focused power outage (i.e. just our company or our neighborhood sector) are (list alternative sites here). The listing of utility providers to our company, and their contact information is (state location of written document, reference attachment to this program if document is attached, or list them here). Shut off valves and switches for the company building(s) for each utility are located: Gas Utility (state location of shut offs) Electric Utility (state location of shut offs) Telephone (state location of shut offs) Water (state location of shut offs) Other (state location of shut offs) The safety procedures to take during specific outages or utility emergencies and other reference materials (can be provided by the local utility organizations) are (state location of written document, reference an attachment to this program if document is attached, or outline the steps of the procedure here) Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 111 of 389

112 WINTER STORM EMERGENCY A policy for monitoring and preparedness prior to severe winter storms is recommended. The policy includes a review of the emergency staffing policy (critical operations only) to assure the safety of employees, and the responsibilities of employees and other persons who may be affected by severe cold, ice, or significant snow. The employees (by job title) that must report to work to manage critical operations are: It is management s responsibility to monitor winter storm warnings, and make the appropriate decision (frequently in conjunction with local authorities) whether or not employees should report to work in severe weather. Management will monitor winter storm warnings and notify employees when they should not report by the following method (list contacted media (TV, Radio) sources or other methods). The safety and security of the grounds is also considered. Vendors to be contacted to assist in snow and ice removal are (list company names, addresses and phone numbers). Snow emergency routes are designated, as applicable, to our company grounds and roadways. Employees will not park along these routes during winter or at other times of snow and weather emergencies. Additional information and assistance is available through the local Emergency Management agency and the local chapter of the American Red Cross. Emergency Management: (list contact telephone number) American Red Cross: (list contact telephone number) FLOOD/HURRICANE/TORNADO In flood plains and where hurricanes are likely, monitoring and preparedness are very important to the functioning of the company. The policy includes a review of the emergency staffing policy to assure the safety of employees, and the responsibilities of employees and other persons who may be affected by severe cold, ice, or significant snow. The employees (by job title) that must report to work to manage critical operations are: Prior to storms, it is the responsibility of (list job title) to assure that electrical systems and equipment are shut down or disconnected where possible. Employees who are at work and who cannot be safely released during sudden storms (tornados, etc.) will be relocated to the basement or other shelter. The location of this shelter is (list shelter location, and attach a plot location map, as needed). It is management s responsibility to monitor severe weather warnings, and make the appropriate decision (frequently in conjunction with local authorities) whether or not employees should report to work in severe weather. Management will monitor winter storm warnings and notify employees when they should not report by the following method (list contacted media (TV, Radio) sources or other methods). The safety and security of the grounds is also considered. The following additional preventative actions will be taken to reduce the potential for damage to the company. Action To Be Taken Person Responsible Supply or Equipment Location The insurance carrier for the company who handles flood/hurricane and other severe weather insurance is (list insurance carrier, address, and emergency claims phone number). This carrier is responsible for damage assessment. In cases of structural damage to the facility, where it may be unsafe for employees to return to work, a civil/structural engineer will be contacted and will assess the safety of the building(s) prior to the employees returning to work. This engineer (or firm) is (list firm name and/or contact name and phone number). Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 112 of 389

113 Vendors to be contacted to assist in damage repair are (list company names, addresses and phone numbers). Additional information and assistance is available through the local Emergency Management agency and the local chapter of the American Red Cross. Emergency Management: (list contact telephone number) American Red Cross: (list contact telephone number) CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL EMERGENCY PROGRAM The chemicals or biological agents used or stored at the company may pose a health or safety threat to employees or the community if they are not safely handled and stored. The local Emergency Management and/or Fire Department has been notified of any highly hazardous substances that we have on-site, and the amounts of these materials. They are: Chemical Name Chemical Identifier (CAS #) TLV/PEL or regulatory limit values Amount on-site and location of use or storage The following persons (by name or job title) are responsible for securing these materials during a emergency situations to reduce the potential for exposure and release of these materials into the ground, air, water or other environment. Chemical Name Responsible Person In the event of a spill or release the following agencies must be contacted: Local Fire Department: (list phone number) Local Emergency Management: (list phone number) Local Water Authority: (list phone number) Other Local Agency or Assistance: (list phone number) As needed, these agencies may call in county, state or federal agencies to assist in the emergency response efforts. Additionally notifications may be required to the following agencies: OSHA (federal or state agency) (list phone number) EPA (or state equivalent agency) (list phone number) DOH (or county/state health agency) (list phone number) CDC (for biological agent releases only) (list phone number) MEDICAL EMERGENCIES The telephone numbers for emergency medical assistance are: Ambulance: (list phone number) Police: (list phone number) Fire: (list phone number) Poison Control: (list phone number) Local hospital: (list phone number) An Automatic External Defibrillator (AED) is located (list location). The following individuals are trained in its use: Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 113 of 389

114 Of the three listed categories below, all activities are (check which one applies): strictly voluntary response ( Good Samaritan ) activities designated as part of their job duties to respond to a medical emergency. Training for these individuals is paid for by the company, and certifications are maintained and up-to-date. The following individuals are CPR trained at the company: 2) The following individuals are basic first aid trained at the company: 3) The following individuals are EMT qualified: The following persons (by job title) are responsible for notifying an injured employee s family member(s). Senior on-site manager Human Resources Supervisor If a fatality occurs, or if more than 3 people are hospitalized due to a work related incident, OSHA must be notified within 8 hours of the incident. The contact information for the nearest OSHA office is) : (list OSHA office location, address, phone and fax number see COOPERATIVE AGREEMENTS The following agencies, businesses and resources have cooperative agreements with the company. Mutual aid or reciprocal agreements are also listed here (local agencies or businesses that will assist us, or we will assist them in an emergency situation). Copies of these agreements (if documented) are attached to this program. The master copies are (kept in the main office with similar documents of this type, or list location of master copies). Agency Type Fire Ambulance Emergency Management Emergency Sheltering Agency Name Agency Contact (name) Agency Contact (telephone) *Type C C C C=Cooperative (they provide services to us with no reciprocation) M=Mutual Aid (we assist each other) S=Service Provider (we provide services/resources to them with no reciprocation) It is the responsibility of (list job title usually Sr. Manager) to review and verify these agreements (including any associated documentation) at least every two years to assure they are suitable and adequate to meet the needs of the company. Completed by: Page 18 Date: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 114 of 389

115 EARTHQUAKE PREPAREDNESS WHAT TO DO DURING AN EARTHQUAKE: Stay as safe as possible during an earthquake. Be aware that some earthquakes are actually foreshocks and a larger earthquake might occur. Minimize your movements to a few steps to a nearby safe place and stay indoors until the shaking has stopped and you are sure exiting is safe. IF INDOORS: DROP to the ground; take COVER by getting under a sturdy table or other piece of furniture; and HOLD ON until the shaking stops. If there isn t a table or desk near you, cover your face and head with your arms and crouch in an inside corner of the building. Stay away from glass, windows, outside doors and walls, and anything that could fall, such as lighting fixtures or furniture. Stay in bed if you are there when the earthquake strikes. Hold on and protect your head with a pillow, unless you are under a heavy light fixture that could fall. In that case, move to the nearest safe place. Use a doorway for shelter only if it is in close proximity to you and if you know it is a strongly supported, load bearing doorway. Stay inside until shaking stops and it is safe to go outside. Research has shown that most injuries occur when people inside buildings attempt to move to a different location inside the building or try to leave. Be aware that the electricity may go out or the sprinkler systems or fire alarms may turn on. DO NOT use the elevators. IF OUTDOORS: Stay there. Move away from buildings, streetlights, and utility wires. Once in the open, stay there until the shaking stops. The greatest danger exists directly outside buildings, at exits, and alongside exterior walls. Many of the 120 fatalities from the 1933 Long Beach earthquake occurred when people ran outside of buildings only to be killed by falling debris from collapsing walls. Ground movement during an earthquake is seldom the direct cause of death or injury. Most earthquake-related casualties result from collapsing walls, flying glass, and falling objects. IF IN A MOVING VEHICLE: Stop as quickly as safety permits and stay in the vehicle. Avoid stopping near or under buildings, trees, overpasses, and utility wires. Proceed cautiously once the earthquake has stopped. Avoid roads, bridges, or ramps that might have been damaged by the earthquake. IF TRAPPED UNDER DEBRIS: Do not light a match. Do not move about or kick up dust. Cover your mouth with a handkerchief or clothing. Tap on a pipe or wall so rescuers can locate you. Use a whistle if one is available. Shout only as a last resort. Shouting can cause you to inhale dangerous amounts of dust. Page 19 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 115 of 389

116 EARTHQUAKE PREPAREDNESS WHAT TO DO AFTER AN EARTHQUAKE: Expect aftershocks. These secondary shockwaves are usually less violent than the main quake but can be strong enough to do additional damage to weakened structures and can occur in the first hours, days, weeks, or even months after the quake. Listen to a battery-operated radio or television. Listen for the latest emergency information. Use the telephone only for emergency calls. Open cabinets cautiously. Beware of objects that can fall off shelves. Stay away from damaged areas. Stay away unless your assistance has been specifically requested by police, fire, or relief organizations. Return home only when authorities say it is safe. Be aware of possible tsunamis if you live in coastal areas. These are also known as seismic sea waves (mistakenly called "tidal waves"). When local authorities issue a tsunami warning, assume that a series of dangerous waves is on the way. Stay away from the beach. Help injured or trapped persons. Remember to help your neighbors who may require special assistance such as infants, the elderly, and people with disabilities. Give first aid where appropriate. Do not move seriously injured persons unless they are in immediate danger of further injury. Call for help. Clean up spilled medicines, bleaches, gasoline or other flammable liquids immediately. Leave the area if you smell gas or fumes from other chemicals. Inspect the entire length of chimneys for damage. Unnoticed damage could lead to a fire. Inspect utilities. Check for gas leaks. If you smell gas or hear blowing or hissing noise, open a window and quickly leave the building. Turn off the gas at the outside main valve if you can and call the gas company from a neighbor's home. If you turn off the gas for any reason, it must be turned back on by a professional. Look for electrical system damage. If you see sparks or broken or frayed wires, or if you smell hot insulation, turn off the electricity at the main fuse box or circuit breaker. If you have to step in water to get to the fuse box or circuit breaker, call an electrician first for advice. Check for sewage and water lines damage. If you suspect sewage lines are damaged, avoid using the toilets and call a plumber. If water pipes are damaged, contact the water company and avoid using water from the tap. You can obtain safe water by melting ice cubes. Page 20 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 116 of 389

117 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 117 of 389

118 EVACUATION/RELOCATION PROCEDURE NOTE: This form is to be completed and posted in all primary work areas. EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION INFORMATION: Phone: FIRE/EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION: Alternate: Name of Facility: Address/Location: Facility Phone: EVACUATION RELOCATION POINT: THE RELOCATION POINT TO BE USED DURING EMERGENCY EVACUATION IS: FULLY DESCRIBE LOCATION: EVACUATION RELOCATION PROCEDURES: In the event the warning system is activated or if you are advised to evacuate the facility or department, follow the instructions listed below. Above all use your common sense. 1. PANIC KILLS, IF YOU'RE CALM, IT WILL HELP OTHERS. 2. MOVE QUICKLY IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF KNOWN HAZARDS TOWARDS THE NEAREST UNOBSTRUCTED EXIT. 3. DON'T FORGET HANDICAPPED EMPLOYEES, AND FACILITY VISITORS. 4. NOTIFY CO-WORKERS ALONG THE WAY, TALK LATER. 5. ONCE OUTSIDE PROCEED TO THE EVACUATION RELOCATION POINT. 6. REPORT TO THE SENIOR EMPLOYEE PRESENT. 7. SENIOR EMPLOYEES WILL BEGIN ROLL CALL IMMEDIATELY. 8. NOTIFY SENIOR MANAGEMENT OF MISSING, INJURED, DECEASED PERSONS. 9. REFER MEDIA REPRESENTATIVES TO THE SENIOR EMPLOYEE PRESENT. NOTE: The designation of emergency relocation points for evacuation of this facility has been predetermined and identified. Relocation points may include parking lots, open fields, or streets which are located away from the site of the emergency and which provide sufficient space to accommodate the employees. Employees are instructed to move away from the exit discharge doors of the building, and to avoid congregating close to the building where emergency operations may be hampered. Completed by: Date: Page 21 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 118 of 389

119 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 119 of 389

120 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER CRISIS AND DISASTER PLANNING Crisis and Disaster Planning Training Includes: Definitions What You Can Do Planning Process (4 phases) Types of Events Recovery priorities Resources and Insurance INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 22 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 120 of 389

121 APPLIANCE SAFETY (Cord and Plug Equipment) Consumer products that are commercially available (such as laminators, electric staplers, printers, scanners, food preparation devices, and other such cord and plug devices) are limited at ABC Company to those that have been approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as Underwriters Laboratory (UL). Their use is limited to the intention of the manufacturer, and is not exceeded. Portable Space Heaters must be reviewed for use by the building owner or manager and must be UL listed. Review is needed so that HVAC and electrical-loading concerns for the area are addressed. Portable Electronic Devices utilized in hazardous areas will comply with requirements for intrinsically safe devices. Definitions Specific to this Section: Consumer Product or Commercially Available a product that is normally available at stores and is intended for use by consumers HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory such as UL (Underwriters Laboratory). Relocatable Power Taps (STRIPS) A factory supplied multi-receptacle device, which may be switched, have an indicating light, fuses, circuit-breaker or other over-current protection Procedure: Management: Ensures appliances are turned off when not required or at the end of the shift. Where appliances are required to be left on, exceptions must be noted on the appliance via sticker or other means. It is recommended that companies inspect appliances for defects and damage at least annually. As deficiencies are noted, remove the appliance from service and either discard, replace or repair the equipment. General: Appliances: o All appliances/equipment covered by this policy shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). o Appliances/equipment should only be operated within the limitations of their intended use (e.g. coffee makers designed for house-hold use should not be repeatedly used on multiple shifts, commercial grade coffee makers should be purchased; laminators should be turned off when not in use, to prevent overheating.) Such intentions of use must be considered when purchasing equipment and industrialgrade equipment may need to be utilized instead of consumer-grade equipment. o Manufacturer s instructions and limitations shall be followed. Modifications to appliances are not allowed, including splicing of flexible cords. o All appliances having exposed metal parts which may become energized shall be grounded. Grounding shall be accomplished by a separate conductor within the supply cord. Double Insulated appliances do not require grounding. Page 6 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 121 of 389

122 o Electrically classified areas are strictly prohibited for small appliance usage. Only equipment specifically rated for use in hazardous areas shall be permitted in the presence of flammable or combustible materials or atmospheres. o Combustibles shall not be stored within 1 foot (12 inches) of any heat producing appliance and flammables must be at least 5 feet (60 inches) away. o Appliances shall not be installed in enclosures, when ventilation is required to prevent overheating. o Branch circuits and cords shall be used appropriately to prevent electrical overloading; some appliances may require a separate electrical circuit. o Appliances shall be plugged directly into a permanently installed receptacle only. Multiple plug adapters and extension cords are prohibited for use with appliances, unless supplied by the appliance manufacturer specifically for use with that appliance. o Appliances intended for food/drink storage shall only be installed in areas safe for food consumption and free from exposures to contamination. Food preparation appliances will comply with FDA regulations. Portable space heater use must be reviewed by the building owner for HVAC and electrical loading concerns. Power Strips or Multi-plug adapter devices: o Shall be plugged directly into a permanently installed receptacle. o Shall be used for low amperage appliances only and not be used for high wattage appliances (high wattage examples include: coffee makers, microwave ovens, portable space heaters, etc.) o Shall not be daisy chained or linked one to another. o Shall not be permanently attached. o Shall not be placed on the floor where they present a tripping hazard. o Shall be permitted in dry locations only and may not be subject to chips, oil, solvents, liquids, etc. o Are not permitted on construction sites or for construction equipment. Extension Cords: o Three (3) conductor 16 AWG extension cord sets are the minimum size permitted. o Extension cords are visually inspected for defects or damage prior to using the cord. o Extension cords are not allowed to replace the fixed wiring of a building or structure. o All extension cords used during construction, remodeling, maintenance repair or demolition shall be protected by Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI) or an Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program. Page 7 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 122 of 389

123 PROGRAM OVERVIEW ELECTRICAL (GENERAL) SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR OSHA - 29 CFR , INTRODUCTION: Outlines the general electrical requirements for buildings where employee exposures do not exceed the use of cord and plug equipment. Companies must inspect facilities to ensure compliance with general electrical safety practices. All other types of exposure hazards are contracted or performed by licensed electricians or similarly qualified persons for repair and testing work. TRAINING: Employee training is recommended. ACTIVITIES: Review hazards and determine level of exposures. Ensure electrical services are contracted with licensed electricians, if only cord and plug equipment hazards are encountered by employees. Otherwise ensure that safeguards, equipment, and training is provided to employees who encounter other electrical hazards. Ensure service panel boxes (circuit breakers and fuses) have covers that remain closed. Ensure service panel boxes have clear and unobstructed access for use in emergencies. Ensure outlet receptacles and overhead junction boxes have cover plates so that wires are not exposed. Ensure that outlets within 3 feet of water sources (sinks, drinking fountains, etc) are GFCI protected. FORMS: Appliance Safety Electrical Program Assessment for Buildings and Structures Training Attendance Roster 29. Purpose 30. Scope 31. Responsibilities 32. Procedure 33. Safety Information 34. Training Information & Requirements 35. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 123 of 389

124 Electrical (General) Safety Program 1. Purpose. This program outlines the processes to protect employees in their workplaces from hazards associated with electrical energy, for companies that use licensed electricians and contractors for their electrical service needs. 2. Scope. This program applies to all employees who use only cord-and-plug type equipment and have no other likely electrical exposures in the workplace. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Ensure any modifications to existing equipment meet Electrical Safety Standards Ensure installations of new equipment are assessed or inspected to assure they meet the electrical safety standard requirements Assure employees have exposures only to cord and plug equipment. Any person who has further exposure to live electrical energy must be qualified under the requirements of the regulatory standard and appropriately trained, based on the risks presented Ensure all contractors who work with electrical parts, components or hazards have a written Electrical Safety Program in place, prior to their beginning work. 3.2 Contractors: 4. Procedure Provide the company with a copy of their written Electrical Safety Program and/or employee training records, upon request. 4.1 Ensure cord and plug equipment is in good working condition. Inspect for: Housing integrity (no cracks or breaks) Wiring integrity (no broken insulation or exposed wires) Grounding pins (the third prong on the plug) are in place. 4.2 Ensure electrical service panel boxes are clear and unobstructed. Panel box doors must remain in a closed position and any open knockouts must be covered or closed. 4.3 Ensure all outlets in the facility have cover/face plates so that wires are not exposed. 4.4 Ensure any electrical outlets within 3 feet of a tap, faucet, sink or similar water source are GFCI protected. 4.5 Extension cords must be used only as temporary power supplies, and are not a replacement for permanent wiring. Extension cords must be used on a GFCI circuit only. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 General: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 124 of 389

125 5.1.1 Qualified Employees - Only Qualified individuals are allowed to work on or near energized equipment. A process must be in place to ensure that employees performing electrical tasks are qualified and trained as appropriate Safe Work Practices - Each person is expected to work within the limits of their expertise and training and follow established practices, which are developed according to the hazards and tasks performed. Examples are: DO NOT leave exposed electrical hazards unattended Replace covers or protect energized components from inadvertent contact Utilize proper insulation and/or protective equipment and proper tools corresponding to the level of exposure. 5.2 Safety Related Work Practices: Selection and Use of Work Practices. Work practices are designed to prevent shock and other injuries from either direct or indirect contact with live electrical parts and energy Employees are expected to have exposure only to cord and plug equipment, and not live energized parts of equipment. Any other exposure to live energy requires training and qualifications to ensure adequate protection. Employees are instructed to contact their supervisor or manager if there are any electrical issues or concerns in the workplace Any conductive material must be handled in a manner that prevents contact with energized parts and materials. Procedures and work practices may need to be implemented when long-dimension objects (e.g. tree trimming poles) are used or handled in such areas Portable ladders must be non-conductive if used near energized materials Use of Equipment: Portable equipment (cord and plug type) must be handled so that it is not damaged. Flexible cords may not be used to raise, lower, pull, move or hang equipment where the insulating jacket could be damaged Visual inspection must occur before use. Inspection includes looking for loose parts, deformed pins, and damage to the jacket or insulation. If equipment remains in place, it does not require inspection unless it is relocated Damaged equipment must be repaired or replaced prior to use. Repairs may require testing to assure electrical continuity and safety Plugs must be the appropriate type for the receptacle. Devices to circumvent this are prohibited (i.e. a three-prong adapter that allows the equipment to be plugged into a two-prong receptacle) Highly conductive environments (wet or damp locations or hazardous atmospheres) must use only equipment approved for that environment. Employees must not plug equipment in to receptacles in such locations if their hands are wet and equipment is energized. Insulating materials may be required when electrical energy can be conducted through the hands or fingers. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 125 of 389

126 Power and Lighting Circuits must use the switches, breakers or disconnects to open, reverse or close circuits when live energy is present. Over-current protection may not be modified Where flammable or ignitable vapors, gases or dusts are present at any time electrical equipment capable of igniting these materials may not be used Safeguards for Personal Protection: 6. Training and Information. 6.1 None required. 7. Definitions Insulted tools and equipment are used when contact with live energy is possible. If the insulating capability of tools and equipment could be damaged during use the insulating material must be protected. Conductor - A wire or other conduit that conducts electricity De-energized - Free from any electrical connection to an energy source Electrical Personal Protective Equipment and Devices - Protective equipment that is specifically designed to protect individuals from shock, arc blast, arc flash, etc. Electrical Safety Program - The program that directs activity appropriate for the voltage, energy level, and circuit conditions, and include safety-related work practices. Energized - Electrically connected to an energy source. Over-Current Protection - A device that protects equipment or conductors from current in excess of the rating for the equipment or conductors. Qualified Person - A person trained and knowledgeable to recognize and avoid electrical hazards of equipment or a specific work method. Safety Related Work Practices - Methods that are consistent with the nature and extent of electrical hazards that are meant to safeguard employees from injury while working on or near exposed electric conductors or circuit parts that are (or can become) energized. Un-Qualified Person - An individual that is not permitted to work on electrical equipment because they do not have the necessary skills and/or training to perform the work safely. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 126 of 389

127 ELECTRICAL SAFETY (GENERAL) PROGRAM ASSESSMENT Completed by: Date: Requirement Explanation Equipment that is hard wired into the building power supply is maintained, fixed or repaired only by qualified individuals who have undergone specific training in electrical hazards and who understand the protective measures and controls needed to perform their tasks safely. The dept. and outside employer (contractor) shall only have Qualified personnel working on or near energized electrical equipment. Servicing and maintenance of electrical equipment may require lockout and tagout procedures. The requirements for locking, tagging and verifying may differ from routine energy isolation procedures. Design/Product Safety new equipment or major modifications to existing equipment are evaluated for electrical safety hazards and issues prior to purchase and installation. No Routine Tasks Employees routinely use cord and plug equipment. Electrical exposure is not commonplace for other reasons in this company. Employees are instructed to notify their supervisor if electrical issues or hazards exist. Non-Routine Tasks - such as working on energized equipment. Procedures and training clearly specify that employees are not to undergo this type of task or activity with regard to building or equipment maintenance or repair. Only the employees who are qualified are permitted to work on or near energized electrical equipment. Only qualified persons are permitted to verify the absence of voltages using test instruments for electrical LO/TO. All non-qualified employees are to be trained and understand their limitations to working near exposed electrical hazards. Be familiar with safe work practices that are necessary for their safety. Electrical service panel boxes (circuit breakers or fuse boxes) have covers that remain in the closed position when not immediately in use. Boxes must have clear and unobstructed access at all times. (no storage in front of panels or to 3 feet of either side) Electrical service outlets and receptacles have cover plates to protect wiring. Electrical outlets and receptacles within 3 feet of any water source (tap, faucet or spigot) are GFCI protected. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 127 of 389

128 Page 8 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 128 of 389

129 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER ELECTRICAL SAFETY (GENERAL) Electrical Safety (General) Training Includes: Definition How Electricity Works Amps, Volts, Circuits Types of Injuries (Shock, Burns, Electrocution) Basic Control Methods Wires, Grounding and GFCI Safe Work Practices and PPE INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 9 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 129 of 389

130 EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN COMPANY NAME: SITE ADDRESS: DAT PLAN COMPLETED B Emergency Escape Procedures and Escape Route Assignments: Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate critical operations before they evacuate: Procedures to account for employees after evacuation is complete (e.g. crew leader counts crew reports status to emergen Employee rescue or medical duties: Methods to report fires and other emergencies: Person(s) to contact for questions regarding site Emergency Action Plan or employee duties under Plan (name and phone n Emergency Type FIRE TORNADO EARTHQUAKE CHEMICAL SPILL/RELEASE MEDICAL EMERGENCY Notification Method (Automatic, Pull Box, Phone) Site Contact Emergency Services Number Procedures Evacuate to: Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 130 of 389

131 PROGRAM OVERVIEW EMERGENCY ACTION, EVACUATION AND FIRE PREVENTION SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29CFR ,.38,.157,.165 NFPA-10 INTRODUCTION: This program is intended to assist in establishing requirements to ensure that fire and other potential emergency situations are evaluated and safety procedures implemented. TRAINING: All employees and supervisors will be trained in emergency actions and their responsibilities including how emergencies are communicated. Training is required initially, and as changes to the workplace, program or employee responsibilities occur Conduct drills, if required Emergency Response Team members must be trained based on the types of emergencies they will be expected to encounter. Fire fighting techniques, first aid treatment or both may be required, depending upon the duties and responsibilities of the team Fire extinguisher users must be trained annually in the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved in incipient (beginning) stage fire fighting ACTIVITIES: Identify and evaluate fire hazards Identify and evaluate exit routes Identify fire wardens and response teams and define responsibilities, if applicable Provide emergency equipment as needed Write and communicate policies and procedures including Emergency Action and Fire Prevention Programs Review program at least annually FORMS: Emergency Action Plan Exit and Egress (Life Safety) Requirements Fire Drill or Evacuation Assessment Fire Prevention Plan Monthly Fire Extinguisher Review Training Attendance Roster Types of Fire Protection Systems Table of Contents 36. Purpose 37. Scope 38. Responsibilities 39. Procedure 40. Safety Information 41. Training Information & Requirements 42. Definitions National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 131 of 389

132 Emergency Action, Evacuation and Fire Prevention Safety Program 1. Purpose. This program outlines the requirements for the Emergency Action and Fire Prevention Program (EAFP), and for Emergency Evacuation Program in the workplace. It is a federal requirement that all companies have EAFP's (programs must in writing for companies with more than 10 employees). 2. Scope. This program applies to all workplaces, facilities, and sites at the company. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Determine flight or fight response for the company (i.e. will all employees evacuate during fire or spill emergencies, or will some employees be required as part of their job duties to fight a fire, contain a spill or provide medical treatment) Write Emergency Action and Fire Prevention Programs (EAFP s), including specific procedures or responsibilities for employees and wardens Communicate programs to employees and staff Review these programs at least annually to assure they remain adequate to the business operations Ensure evacuation alarm systems and notifications are in place, and are distinctive and consistent throughout the site. It is recommended that evacuation programs be periodically tested through physical drills (partial evacuation drills and/or full evacuation drills) or via table-top drills or discussions Ensure all employees are appropriately trained to the responsibilities they are expected to take during an emergency situation, including how to report a fire or other emergency and what to do during an evacuation Ensure evacuation wardens are designated and trained. It is recommended that there be a ratio of at least one warden for every 20 employees Ensure that fire extinguishers (if located on-site) are inspected, maintained, tested and of the proper size and type for the area hazards If employees are expected to use them, annual training is required If employees are not expected to use them, extinguishers should be marked For Fire Department Use Only. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 132 of 389

133 3.1.9 If utilized, provide on-site emergency response teams with appropriate equipment and training to perform their expected duties Maintain training documentation for response team members, and documentation for equipment inspection and maintenance Notify Insurance Carrier of significant changes in staffing and building occupancy Inspect Fire Doors annually, and keep all fire doors closed. If they must be held open due to production or operation-specific requirements, they must be fitted with automated releases in accordance with state building codes. Maintain documentation for the life of the fire door. 3.2 Employees: Attend initial training, and refresher training as required Evacuate, or perform expected tasks prior to evacuation, during an emergency. 3.3 Wardens (evacuation assistance): Attend appropriate training Follow established procedures to assist in the safe and orderly evacuation of employees Report either the all-clear or problems to the incident commander or other designated person at the command post. 3.4 On-site Response Teams (as appropriate or designated): Provide emergency response to fires, spills or medical emergencies, as designated Attend appropriate training to maintain appropriate certifications Ensure emergency response equipment is functioning and adequate to the response(s) required. 3.5 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of this program. 4.1 Emergency Action Programs: May be combined with Fire Prevention Programs into one document that serves both purposes. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 133 of 389

134 4.1.2 Must be in writing, kept at the workplace and available for employees to review Companies with 10 or fewer employees may communicate the program orally, rather than in writing Programs must include: Procedures for reporting a fire or other emergency Procedures for emergency evacuation, including types of evacuations and assigned evacuation routes. (Posted, color coded evacuation route maps are highly recommended for each area of the building or structure.) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate or shut down critical operations before they evacuate (power systems, water supplies, ammonia tanks, chemical processes that must be shut down in sequence, etc.) Procedures, assigned areas and responsibilities of evacuation wardens, if utilized Procedures to account for all employees after evacuation Procedures to be followed by employees who perform rescue or medical duties (on-site response teams) The name or job title of the person(s) who may be contacted by employees who need more information about the program, or an explanation of their duties and responsibilities under the program An alarm system must be maintained. The system must have a distinctive signal for each type of alarm (i.e. evacuation alarms must sound the same throughout the site) Wardens (or evacuation assistance) must be designated and properly trained to assist in a safe and orderly evacuation of other employees Programs should address the types of emergencies that are reasonably likely to occur (fire, chemical spills, severe weather, etc.). 4.2 Fire Prevention Programs: May be combined with Emergency Action Programs into one document that serves both purposes Must be in writing, kept at the workplace and available for employees to review Companies with 10 or fewer employees may communicate the program orally, rather than in writing. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 134 of 389

135 4.2.3 Programs must include: A listing of all the major fire hazards in the building or facility Proper handling and storage procedures for hazardous materials Potential ignition sources and their control measures The type of fire protection equipment necessary to control each major hazard Procedures to control accumulation of flammable and combustible waste materials Procedures for maintenance (regular, scheduled) of any heat-producing equipment and their safeguards to prevent accidental fires The name or job title of employees who are responsible for maintaining equipment to prevent or control sources of ignition or fires The name or job title of employees who are designated as responsible for controlling any fuel source hazards (flammable liquid tanks, fuel tanks, propane tanks, etc.) 4.3 Evacuation and Notification: Alarms and Signals to notify employees of an emergency evacuation are distinctive in sound and consistent throughout the site Alarms may be automatic or verbally provided in person or through a public address system, but they must be able to be understood by all employees The same sound or wording must be used throughout the site Employees must be trained or informed of the sounds or wording used Evacuation Routes will be established for each area of the building or site Employees will be trained and informed of their work-area route It is highly recommended that maps be posted at each area of the building to assist employees and others in determining their evacuation routes. Maps should be color coded, with the evacuation route in red Off-site job locations will have evacuation routes determined and communicated to employees who work at these off-site locations. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 135 of 389

136 4.3.3 Relocation Points will be established for employees to congregate during an evacuation. Designated relocation points assist in assuring that all employees are accounted for Employees will be trained in their respective relocation point during initial (or refresher) training Supervisors or other specifically designated people at each relocation point will be responsible for assuring that all employees have been accounted for An accounting for the relocation point will be made to the incident commander or other designated person at the command post Off-site job locations will have relocation points determined and communicated to employees who work at these off-site locations before the job commences or the employee reports to the site Where appropriate, severe weather relocation points (shelters or arrangements with neighboring facilities) will be communicated to employees during the training Return to Work Signals will be provided once it is safe for employees to re-enter the workplace. Each supervisor or other designated person at each relocation point will be aware of the signal used, and be watchful for it Evacuation Wardens 5. Safety Information Sweep the assigned area to assure that all employees are appropriately evacuated Carry out any other assigned duties, prior to evacuating Report either all clear or any problems to the incident commander or other person designated under the company s EAFP prior to reporting to their assigned relocation point. 5.1 Means of Egress (exits and exit paths): All employees must be able to safely exit the building in a direct path and within a reasonable time frame There are specific requirements for exits, paths to exits, exit signs, aisle widths and for stairways. These life safety codes must be considered during renovation, construction or when re-arranging a work area. For more information reference the attached documentation on Life Safety All exits, aisles and exit paths, and stairways must be kept clear and unobstructed. No storage is allowed that will restrict the access or use of the exit path below the required widths. No storage is allowed that will block or obstruct stairs or exit doors All exits and the paths to them must be clearly visible or have visible signs that indicate the location of the exit Locks or fastening devices to keep exit doors closed and locked from the inside (preventing the use of the door as an exit) are prohibited in almost every workplace structure (mental and correctional institutions are two exceptions). Doors that could be mistaken for an exit, but are not exits must be marked Not an Exit or Closet or with similar markings so that they will not be mistaken for an exit in an emergency Emergency lighting, signs and exits must meet requirements for the number of exits, the location and size of signs and the amount of illumination required. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 136 of 389

137 5.2 Fire Alarms and Detection: Fire alarms are required in buildings where the location of the fire will not provide adequate warning to employees and other occupants (i.e. multi-floor buildings or segregated work spaces) Alarms must be loud enough to be heard above the ambient noise level of the work area and activate in time to provide adequate warning for the work area occupants to safely evacuate Alarms and signals must be tested or maintained to assure they remain in working order Buildings undergoing construction and renovation (where employees are still working and occupying the work areas) must have appropriate (or alternate) alarms and fire prevention systems that are at least equal to those required for the occupancy and type of hazards in the area. This includes hazards inherent to the work area and tasks performed, as well as any additional hazards caused by the construction or renovation. 5.3 Fixed Fire Suppression Equipment: All fixed suppression equipment must be maintained and tested by trained persons. The local fire department may provide or be able to be contracted to perform this maintenance and testing. Specific employees may be designated and trained for this service, depending upon the maintenance and testing requirements for the system There are various types of fixed suppression equipment. Each type must be specifically designed for the types of fires likely to be encountered. These types are: 5.4 Portable Fire Extinguishers: Automatic sprinklers that discharge water into an area when heat or smoke causes the valve (sprinkler head) to open. Sprinkler heads must be kept free from any obstruction (at least 18" clearance vertically and horizontally) Standpipe systems include fixed water supplies (risers) with a hose and nozzle. These systems are usually recessed in walls or found in stairwells. Standpipe systems are for use by trained fire-fighting personnel only Dry chemical systems are discharged in rooms or over a specific process (like an electrical system). Pre-discharge alarms are required where vision could be obscured that would affect employee evacuation Gaseous agents are normally used in enclosed rooms and spaces. Depending on the agent used to suppress the fire, pre-discharge alarms are required. Where employee evacuation can not occur within a specific time frame, specific agents are prohibited from being used as suppression agents Water spray and foam systems are usually utilized for a specific process hazard (like a kitchen grease pit or solvent tank). They discharge a chemical-foam that will blanket the fire or area with foam to smother the fire The Two Extinguisher Rule: Fire extinguishers are for controlling small, incipient fires. NEVER should more than two (2) extinguishers be used to control a fire. If the fire is not controlled with two extinguishers, it is no longer considered an incipient fire and should ONLY be extinguished by trained Firefighters or by fixed fire suppression systems Classes. There are four classes or types of Fire Extinguishers. Each class has distance requirements that are required for employees to access them. These types and distances are: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 137 of 389

138 Class A used on ordinary combustibles (wood, paper, cloth, etc.). Extinguishers must be 75 ft. or less from the hazard Class B used for flammable or combustible liquids (gasoline, paint, solvents, propane). Distance must be 50 ft. or less from the hazard Class C used for electrical equipment and must be 50 ft. or less from the hazard Class D used for metals (magnesium, potassium and sodium). Extinguishers must be 75 ft. or less from the hazard General. Extinguishers must be located so they are clearly visible, readily accessible to the employees or persons designated and trained to use them, and located so they are protected from damage by moving equipment Extinguishers must be maintained in a fully charged and operable condition, and kept in their designated locations Extinguishers must be appropriate to the type (or class) of fire hazard likely to be found in the work area Standard signs and floor markings may be utilized to increase visibility Extinguishers should be located along normal paths of travel but protected from the direct line of traffic to avoid injury to personnel or mechanical damage Extinguishers are not required in workplaces where all employees will be required to evacuate the facility (total evacuation) upon the initial alarm sounding, unless extinguishers are required by a specific regulatory standard (i.e. welding, confined space, and some flammable liquid usages) Inspection and Testing. Extinguishers must be visually inspected monthly. Extinguishers must be maintained annually. Extinguishers must be physically (hydrostatically) tested every 5 years or 12 years depending on the type of extinguisher. When removed from service for maintenance or testing, or due to corrosion or damage, they must be replaced with an equivalent protective system Documentation of the inspection, maintenance and testing may be kept with the extinguisher or in a separate system, provided the records are accessible to employees or agencies that may be required to review these records. Documentation must be kept for the life of the extinguisher Employee Training Where extinguishers are located, but employees will not be required to use them, employees should be informed that they are for trained fire fighter use only. It is recommended that these extinguishers also be marked For Fire Department Use Only Where employees will be required to use extinguishers, employees must be trained annually in the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved in incipient (beginning) stage fire fighting. 5.5 Fire Brigades and On-Site Response Medical Teams (as appropriate): Fire Brigades and Medical Response teams must be trained to the level or type of emergency they will likely encounter. In most cases, verified training is required, and documentation must be maintained with periodic or annual refresher training Team members must be physically capable of performing their duties (including the use of respiratory protection, where required). Employees with known physical conditions (heart disease, emphysema or National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 138 of 389

139 epilepsy) or known mental or physical disabilities that would impair their ability to perform the expected duties may be required to be approved by a licensed physician prior to being allowed to participate on the team Teams must be provided with adequate equipment and protective clothing to perform their duties Equipment and clothing must be maintained in good working order. Equipment removed from service must be promptly repaired or replaced, or else team members must be informed that the equipment is no longer available Teams must be organized, with either elected or appointed leaders, and have specific written procedures that outline their responsibilities (and limitations) with regard to emergency response at the workplace. 5.6 Hot Work, Open Flame Work or Spark Producing Equipment: Permission and Permits. Any hot work or work with open flames should be performed only with the permission of company management. (Approvals may be required by the landlord or building owner, if different than company ownership.) Such work should be done only under specific restrictions and limitations to prevent fires or other hazards. This information and any restrictions or limitations should be documented. A signed permit system is recommended that outlines the details of the work and the restrictions or limitations Permanent Hot Work/Open Flame Permission - Permanent permission should be obtained for areas where hot work/open flame is regularly used, such as metal and welding shops or special laboratories and work areas Areas should be physically inspected by individuals who are knowledgeable about the hazards of the area and appropriate fire protection systems for these hazards. Annual reinspection for the duration of the permit/permission is recommended, at a minimum Temporary Hot Work/Open Flame Permission - Allows only specified personnel to perform a single operation. Areas where one-time use of flames is required (such as maintenance and construction operations, in areas such as buildings, sheds, yard areas, and streets and parking lots) should have areas physically inspected for fire hazards by a knowledgeable person Special Situations and Equipment: 6. Training and Information Thermogrip Solder Tongs, Electric Soldering Irons, Flameless Heat Guns are prohibited in areas where flammable vapors or gases, or combustible dusts are present Electric or Other Spark/Heat-Producing Tools in High-Fire Hazard Areas require special permission Pressure Vessels - All burning or welding operation, emergency or otherwise, are prohibited on any pressure vessel unless specific approval has been obtained from a qualified engineering specialist or the lead welder Contractors - shall obtain Hot Work/Open Flame Permits through the manager or supervisor in charge of the job or process. 6.1 Evacuation Programs must be reviewed with each employee: When the program is developed or when it is changed Upon initial assignment to a work area When the workplace changes (construction or remodeling) that require a different evacuation route National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 139 of 389

140 6.1.4 When an employee s responsibilities under the program change. 6.2 Fixed Suppression Systems. Employees where fixed suppression equipment agents activate (non-water systems) must be specifically trained in the alarm signal, and any protective equipment and controls needed to ensure their safety. They must have (and be trained to) specific evacuation programs from the area of discharge. 6.3 Emergency Response Team members must be trained based on the types of emergencies they will be expected to encounter. Fire fighting techniques, first aid treatment or both may be required, depending upon the duties and responsibilities of the team. 6.4 Fire extinguisher users must be trained annually in the general principles of fire extinguisher use and the hazards involved in incipient (beginning) stage fire fighting. 7. Definitions. Brigades A workplace team of employees who are specifically designated to respond and fight incipient fires. Fixed Suppression Equipment Fire extinguishing systems that are affixed in place. For example: sprinkler systems. Command Post A designated location that is set up for communications and direction of emergency responders. Incident Commander The person designated to direct the activities of an emergency response. This person normally remains at the command post. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 140 of 389

141 EXIT AND EGRESS (LIFE SAFETY) REQUIREMENTS This document defines and outlines the minimum requirements for safe means of egress from fire and other emergency situations as outlined in Federal Regulations (29CFR and associated Appendix B, and the Life Safety Code - NFPA101), additional Federal, State or Local codes may need to be considered. Elements of means of egress must be included in any written Emergency Action or Fire Prevention Plan. Provisions for accommodations for special needs individuals should also be given consideration and provided for. Responsibilities: Exits/Exit Paths Clear and Unobstructed Exit Markings Fire Doors and Hardware Occupancy and Exit Capacity Written Plan Training Employees X X(receive) Area Management X X X X X(provide) Landlords X X X X Safety X X(provide) General - Life Safety exits and exit paths shall comply with OSHA, NFPA Life Safety and State and Local codes. Assure that exits and paths are clear and unobstructed at all times. Materials are not to be placed or stored in exit paths, stairwells or hallways. Fire, exit, stair and smoke-stop doors and dampers will be kept closed at all times, except for those equipped with approved automatic releasing hold-open devices installed and maintained in accordance with regulatory requirements and guidelines. ALL penetration through fire rated walls and other enclosures will be sealed with a material that will maintain the integrity and rating of the wall. Assure that furnishings and/or decorations do not obstruct exits, access to exits, paths to exits, or the visibility of an exit. Flammable decorations and furnishings are prohibited in, on or near exits (and along egress routes). Mirrors are prohibited on or near exit doors, to prevent confusion in an emergency. Assure aisles are appropriately marked or designated. Occupancy Changes Notify the building owner, building manager and/or landlord if operations or personnel occupancy or classifications change to assure the capacity for safe discharge from exits is maintained. The number and capacity of exits, based on building or floor occupancy must be sufficient to allow safe egress from the building. Exit Arrangement and Discharge Exits must have a clear direction of travel and discharge to safe, clear spaces, not encumbered by traffic or other hazards. These areas of refuge must be of adequate size to accommodate the maximum personnel occupancy. External exit paths must be maintained free of ice and snow, and any other obstructions. Exits and egress routes shall be arranged to prevent travel through an area of higher hazard without fire-rated corridors or other protective barriers in place. Exits may not be through an area with locking mechanisms, unless the exit serves only that room i.e. bathrooms or kitchens). Doors and Hardware Report any broken or defective doors or hardware to the area management, building management and/or landlord for immediate repair. Doors and hardware must be permanently affixed or integral to the building, and constructed of approved components. Doors, passageways or stairways that are not exits, but could be mistaken for exits, shall be marked Not an Exit or with some other sign or indication of use. Alarmed doors, not normally used as exits during normal operations, but may be useable as exits during an emergency, shall be marked Do Not Block, Door to be Used in an Emergency, or an equivalent statement. Exit doors will swing in the direction of exit travel Rated doors shall be constructed of approved components and not modified or altered in any fashion. Repairs and modifications to fire rated doors must be made with hardware that will not compromise the integrity of the fire rating. Holes will not be drilled for such purposes as hanging signs. Holes shall be plugged in an appropriate manner. Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 141 of 389

142 Hazardous Material Storage No flammable or explosive material (or other high hazard chemicals or substances) will be brought into an area not normally classified for those substances without adequate safety precautions and specific safeguards. (For example, compressed gas cylinders, gaylords of combustible material, etc.) A safety review will be conducted prior to any of these materials being brought on-site. Exit Signs and Lighting Report faulty, inadequate or broken exit lighting to area management, the building manager and/or landlord. Adequate and reliable illuminated exit lighting must be maintained at all times. Emergency lighting must be provided for all components of egress (with battery backup, as required). Where reduction of normal lighting is permitted (i.e. darkrooms) alternative measures may be used. E X I T letters shall be legible and not less than 6 high, with each letter not less the ¾ wide and contrast with existing decorations and furnishings. Arrows indicating the direction of travel will be included when the path of travel is not readily apparent. Exit Enclosures (Stairwells, lobbies, etc.) Exit enclosures will have an approved fire rated door, will comply with approved fire resistance ratings and will have guards or railings on open sides. Enclosures will have level surface floors with stairs or ramps provided when not substantially level. Enclosures will have a permanent, straight path of travel with no dead ends in excess of 20 feet. Enclosures will comply with OSHA, Life Safety Code, State or Local codes and regulations, including height and headroom requirements. Alarms and Fire Protection Systems Emergency Evacuation Alarm, Fire Alarm and Sprinkler systems will be maintained in good operating condition. Maintenance would include, but not be limited to: testing frequency, inspection, maintaining an 18 inch clearance around and below all sprinkler heads, and assurance that ceiling tiles remain in place. Alarms will be less than 100dB but greater than the ambient noise levels in the area so they can be adequately heard. Emergency Evacuation and Fire Prevention Plans All employees, occupants, tenants and visitors will review their written plans upon initial assignment, whenever there are changes to the plan or when their responsibilities under the plan are changed. It is recommended that the plan be reviewed by all occupants at least annually. Paths of egress will be included in the site or building s written plans, or be posted throughout the building where they are accessible to employees throughout the building. Floor plans or workplace maps, if used, should clearly show the route of egress. Color codes these maps as applicable. Operating areas, in conjunction with the building s owner, manager or landlord, will establish specific types of evacuations, if applicable (i.e. partial building evacuations). Training will be provided to all persons who have additional duties or responsibilities under the Emergency Evacuation and Fire Prevention plans. All employees and occupants should participate in evacuation drills at least annually Other Conference rooms, Auditoriums and other areas of assembly with a capacity of greater than 50 people will have posted occupancy signs. Fire Retarding Paints and Coverings, if used, will be renewed at intervals sufficient to maintain the retarding properties. Safety Signs and Aisle Markings - The marking of interior aisles to provide unrestricted movement of personnel and material handling equipment in open manufacturing or storage areas is required. It is the responsibility of each area to assure aisles are properly marked and markings are readily visible. Consult with safety professionals for any deviations from this information. Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 142 of 389

143 Marking Requirements All aisles will be marked with painted lines, tape or other acceptable markers. All aisle widths will be dimensioned from the outside edges of the lines or markers The type of aisle-marking system used depends on the floor finish, type of traffic, anticipated length of service and exposure to water, chemicals, etc. PAINTED LINES are recommended for rough surfaces and areas of abrasive traffic. The lines will be between 3 and 4 inches in width. MARKERS are recommended on smooth-surfaced floors subject to foot traffic and trucking. In areas subject to chemical exposure (e.g. solvents, acids and heavy abrasive traffic) different types of markers may be tried until the most suitable one is identified. Use 3 inch diameter pressure sensitive (vinyl is recommended) dots spaced at 12 ½ inch centers. Dots may be applied by hand, or may also be ordered in rolls for application by automatic dispensing machines. TAPE is recommended for lines on smooth-surfaced floors for temporary or small marking jobs. Use 2 inch wide pressure-sensitive white (or other appropriate color). Vinyl is recommended. Where white lines do not give enough contrast, black-and-white lines (or markers of contrasting colors) may be substituted. At no time shall any materials be allowed to protrude onto or over the outside of the aisle lines. Aisle, Door and Stairway Width Requirements: Type of Aisle Aisle Width Pedestrian Side Aisle 1.1 m (44") Pedestrian Main Aisle 1.5 m (6') Truck - Ride-on Counterbalance 3.2 m (10'-6") to 3.7 m (12') depending upon truck capacity Truck - Ride-on Straddle 2.4 m (8') Truck - Walkie Counterbalance 2.9 m (9'-6") m (10'-6") depending upon truck capacity Truck - Walkie Straddle 2.1 m (7') Truck - Walkie Pallet/Platform 2.1 m (7') NOTE: Aisle widths are dependent upon the configuration of the truck. The above widths are given only as a general guide. Consult with regulatory guidelines (NFPA-101) for more details. 81 cm (32 ) each door minimum or as wide as any staircase that Exit doors serves the exit. Stairs 112 cm (44 ) - minimum Definitions: Area Management - Persons responsible for supervision or management of employees Written Plan - Building Emergency Action or Fire Prevention Plans. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA regulations) Egress - A continuous and unobstructed way of exit travel from any point in a building or structure to a public way (or safe area of refuge), and consists of three distinct parts: the way of exit access, the exit, and the way of exit discharge. Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 143 of 389

144 FIRE DRILL OR EVACUATION ASSESSMENT Evacuation Start time: Evacuation Routes Marked: Evacuation End time: Yes No Total time for evacuation process: Exit Signs Visible or Evacuation Routes Posted: Yes No Was the building completely evacuated? Yes No Was the evacuation signal heard in every area of the building? Yes No Did all employees meet at their designated relocation point? Yes No Have procedures for the handicapped been addressed? Yes No Did all equipment (stairwell doors, alarms, etc.) function properly? Problem or Issue Noted And Corrective Action To Be Taken: Yes No Name of Person Responsible for Corrective Action: Completed Date: Additional Comments/Requirements: Evaluator s Name: Signature: Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 144 of 389

145 FIRE PREVENTION PLAN COMPANY NAME: SITE ADDRESS OR LOCATION: ASSESSMENT DATE: Completed by: List all major fire hazards in the building or facility (>25 gallons of flammable liquids, large amounts of combustibles, etc Describe the type of fire protection equipment necessary to control each major hazard (sprinkler systems, extinguishers, et Reference specific written procedures for the proper handling and storage of hazardous materials: Ignition sources within 30 feet of flammable materials require control measures (list control measures): Reference specific written procedures to control accumulation of flammable and combustible waste materials: Reference specific written procedures for regular maintenance of any heat-producing equipment and their safeguards to pr Identify the job title of employees who are responsible for maintaining heat-producing equipment to prevent or control sou Identify the job title of employees who are responsible for controlling any fuel source hazards (flammable liquid, fuel or p Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 145 of 389

146 MONTHLY FIRE EXTINGUISHER REVIEW Person Conducting Review or Inspection: Date of Inspection: Extinguisher location Circle type extinguisher Sign Present at Location? A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO A B C D H YES NO Extinguisher OK? YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO Defects Noted (pin missing, not mounted, housing damaged, etc.) Page 18 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 146 of 389

147 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER EMERGENCY ACTION Emergency Action Training Includes: Escape Procedures Procedures to follow Account for employees Employee, rescue or medical duties Methods to report fires or other emergencies Contacts INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 19 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 147 of 389

148 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER FIRE EXTINGUISHER Fire Extinguisher Training Includes: Types of extinguishers Inspection methods PASS system When you should not fight a fire INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 20 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 148 of 389

149 TYPES OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS (Alarm Systems and Fire Protective Devices) The company enacts measures, in compliance with Federal, State and Local regulations as well as accepted NFPA and ANSI guidelines, to protect its personnel, property and the environment. Such measures include fire suppression systems, enforced smoking policies, restrictions on the use of open flames, procedures on companyowned fire extinguishers, alarms and alarm system networks, and the inspection and maintenance of fire doors. Restrictions on portable electric devices in hazardous areas may be detailed in another procedure, if applicable. Fire Doors - Companies should inspect and maintain fire doors based upon recognized fire and life safety standards from the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Federal regulations and State Uniform Fire Prevention, Building Codes and Insurance Specifications. Fire doors may not be obstructed, or blocked in an open position. Inspections - Annual Fire Door inspections can only be conducted by factory authorized technicians. Fire doors shall be tested and inspected annually, according to manufacturer's specifications for full closure doors, and any fire doors provided with automatic releases. o Doors may not be blocked or wedged open. The use of tape, wire, rope, or chains to hold doors open is forbidden. o Hardware and all moving parts are in good working order. o Doors, when closed, fit tight against the buck-frame and latch properly. o Automatic hold-open devices are in the proper position, fusible links are unpainted and all hardware is in good working condition. o The door and buck-frame are in good condition. Particular attention should be given to vertical guides for rolling steel fire doors. o Barriers designed to prevent the piling of material against sliding doors are in good condition. o Devices designed for the automatic closing or the self-closing of fire doors are in good operating condition. o Material is not stored in doorways or openings. Maintenance - Repairs and adjustments must be made immediately to ensure proper fire door operation at all times. Repairs may need to be made by factory authorized technicians. o Replacement of damaged doors and damaged wired glass. o Replacement or repair of any damaged or defective automatic release hold-open devices. o Only approved hardware is used. o Lubrication in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fire Alarm Systems - are generally heat or smoke activating devices which trigger an alarm system or some other protective action. There are specific requirements for these systems. ALARM SYSTEMS provide notice or warning for necessary emergency action. Alarms must be capable of being perceived above ambient noise or light levels by all employees, and be distinctive and recognizable as a signal to evacuate. Operational management shall explain to each employee the preferred means of reporting emergencies (pull box alarm, calling 911, etc.), and shall establish procedures for sounding emergency alarms. Alarms must meet requirements for Installation and restoration, and Maintenance and Testing. Special Definitions: o Types of Alarms Life Safety Alarms - alarm devices or systems that monitor fire detection and suppression systems, building evacuation, perimeter security, and personnel duress situations. Non-Life Safety Alarms - alarms monitoring other critical operations, processes and areas; including alarms designated as supervisory to life safety systems. Page 21 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 149 of 389

150 o Alarm Systems Safety Alarm System (SAS) - Provides notification for emergency response via automatic detectors, as well as manually operated indications of duress alarms. Simplex - Provides monitoring of alarms designated as supervisory to life safety functions, as well as monitoring non-life safety alarms signals. Fire Alarm Pull-Box system - Provides notification for emergency response via manually operated fire alarm boxes (includes Gamewell and Simplex pull stations). Matrix - Provides access control for company perimeters along with individual building premises. This system also provides monitoring for non-life safety alarms and alarms designated as supervisory to life safety functions. Trunked radio mhz radio system providing two-way communications for site emergency response groups. It also provides a "man-down" alarm feature. Radios equipped with this feature may be utilized as a lone operator "duress" alarm systems. Local Life Safety Alarm System - Provides life safety alarm annunciation, coordination, and control for individual building premises. Steps: o Alarm System components of all life safety systems at company sites shall be designed in conjunction with qualified, professional engineers. o Fire and Emergency Services providers and the company insurance carrier may oversee the installation and maintenance of all life safety systems at company sites. o Any impairment to the fire protection systems shall be coordinated by the Fire and Emergency Services provider. o Any requests to install additional fire protection alarm systems must be approved by the company insurance carrier. Automatic Fire Protection Systems AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS are usually overhead systems which, upon activation, spray water or other extinguishing material over a specified range. The specific requirements which automatic sprinkler systems must meet are: Design, Maintenance, Acceptance tests, Hose connections, Protection of piping, Drainage, Sprinklers, sprinkler alarms, and Sprinkler spacing. FIXED EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS are permanently installed systems which utilize extinguishing agents, designed and approved to extinguish fires through either partial or total flooding of an area. DRY/WET CHEMICAL SYSTEMS must have agents or components that are compatible with the hazard they are protecting. Dry chemical extinguishing agents of different compositions may not be mixed together. Where chemical discharge may obscure vision the employer shall provide a pre-discharge employee alarm. GASEOUS AGENT SYSTEMS are used for initial supply and replenishment shall be of the type approved for the system's application. The designed concentration of gaseous agents must be maintained until the fire has been extinguished or is under control; and employees may not be exposed to toxic levels of gaseous agent or its decomposition products. The designed extinguishing concentration must be reached within a specified time limit, depending upon the agent used. A pre-discharge employee alarm capable of being perceived above ambient light or noise levels must be utilized. Where egress from an area cannot be accomplished within specified time limitations, certain agents may not be used. Responsibilities: o A qualified engineer or safety professional should perform inspections per code and insurance specifications, and the company should retain all pertinent documentation. o Special Applications (Fixed Systems) - Fixed Extinguishing Systems are normally found in cafeteria ducts and fryer systems, foam systems, explosion suppression systems, and large CO2 systems. They must have documented semi-annual inspections, and be serviced at least annually. o Fire and Emergency Services providers should follow an established process for sprinkler system impairments and coordinate these efforts. Page 22 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 150 of 389

151 Steps: o Automatic Sprinkler Systems - These are the most reliable and widely used system in industry. They extinguish or control the size of a fire (and are sometimes equipped to automatically transmit an alarm to a centralized Communication Center. The system usually consists of: one or more sources of water under pressure water shut-off valves Manual Shut-off Valves shall be operated only by personnel authorized by the Fire and Emergency Services provider sprinkler heads alarms Alarms are devices that detect flow of water in the system and transmit an electrical signal to a centralized Communication Center and in some instances activate a local audible signal. The device is actuated when any of the following occur: o opening of a sprinkler head o opening of a valve in a deluge system o breakage or leakage of a sprinkler line o low air alarms (specialized systems only) o use of a safety shower (in some areas) o opening of the "High Point" test valve o 2" drain test for residual pressure. o Wet-Pipe systems Protect office areas, production areas, laboratories and warehouses if freezing temperatures are not encountered. Water is always in the system and is immediately discharged through the sprinkler heads when actuated by heat at their rated temperature. o Anti-Freeze Protect Small unheated areas, where it may be impractical to install separate dry-pipe systems. (e.g. refrigerated rooms, coolers, loading docks). Usually an extension of a wet-pipe system to which an anti-freeze solution is added to the section of sprinkler pipe in the unheated area to prevent freeze-up. Recommended maximum number of heads on these systems is 20 per system. o Dry-Pipe Protect larger areas subject to freezing temperatures, such as unheated buildings and larger refrigerated rooms. Lines are filled with pressurized air rather than water. The water valve is held closed by the air pressure, but opens automatically upon activation of a sprinkler head. o Pre-Action Protect areas where water may damage product or equipment, such as in electronic or computer areas, electrical control rooms and telephone switch rooms. Similar to the Dry-pipe system except that detectors are installed in conjunction with the sprinkler heads. When the smoke detector activates or when the rate of temperature rise exceeds a predetermined setting, the detector opens a valve allowing water to enter the system, but water will not be discharged until heat opens a sprinkler head. o Deluge Protect areas where a quick wet-down of a complete area is necessary, such as a cooling tower, outside flammable liquid storage area or handling area. Open sprinkler heads are used in this system. The main valve which admits water into the system is normally closed, but opens in response to heat-actuated sensors located throughout the area being protected. Page 23 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 151 of 389

152 o Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Systems Carbon Dioxide is a colorless, odorless and electrically non-conductive inert gas that extinguishes fires by displacing oxygen in the fire zone. It is effective only when the carbon dioxide blankets the fire. Normally installed over flammable-liquid coating stations and also in some electronic equipment rooms, to provide localized protection. Appropriate training of personnel who may work or access areas where CO2 systems are in place must be performed. Prior to activating a CO2 system, suitable safeguards shall be provided to ensure that no one will enter or be trapped inside an area of heavy CO2 discharge. o Dry Chemical Systems - consist of specific materials or powders stored in pressurized cylinders. The chemical particles extinguish a fire mainly by inhibiting the combustion chain. Normally installed in kitchen or cafeteria areas where grease fires may occur. o Wet Chemical Systems - consist of specific materials stored in pressurized cylinders. The chemical particles extinguish a fire mainly by inhibiting the combustion chain. Normally installed in kitchen or cafeteria areas where grease fires may occur. Smoking In all cases, the company should comply with Federal, State, County and Local ordinances and regulations with regard to smoking in the workplace. In some areas, possession of flame producing devices, such as lighters or matches may be restricted based on the hazards of the operational area. Smoking and use of tobacco and tobacco products may be restricted to designated areas or prohibited, based on the site policy of the company. Portable Electronically-Operated Devices used in Hazardous Areas May be restricted or prohibited in certain operational areas of the company. Definitions: Portable Electric Devices - devices capable of releasing electrical or thermal energy (except electrostatic) that could ignite a flammable vapor or combustible dust. These devices include, but are not limited to: Measuring instruments, Communications devices, Photographic equipment, Computation devices, Sound recording and amplifying devices, and miscellaneous devices such as prosthetic devices, flashlights, matches and lighters. Alarm Systems - alarms and alarm network systems which are designed to transmit and receive alarms monitoring critical or substantial loss potential conditions, including areas where human health or the environment may be at risk. FSS - Fire Suppression Systems Page 24 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 152 of 389

153 PROGRAM OVERVIEW ERGONOMICS AND MUSCULOSKELETAL DISORDER MANAGEMENT SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR 1910 General Duty Clause California CCR Chapter 7 Article 106 INTRODUCTION: Repetitive motions, use of force or pressure, or improper workstation set up are the primary causes of ergonomic disorders. This program allows for ergonomic evaluations for both office and manufacturing environments. Implementation of this program is required in California, when more than one person becomes symptomatic doing the same task at any workplace. TRAINING: Recommended for workplaces with high ergonomic risk. ACTIVITIES: Evaluate the need for an ergonomics program Implement controls to minimize or eliminate repetitive or force trauma tasks. FORMS: Office or Computer Workstation Assessment Work Area Screening Tool Program Assessment Tool Training Attendance Roster 22. Purpose 23. Scope 24. Responsibilities 25. Procedure 26. Safety Information 27. Training and Information 28. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 153 of 389

154 Ergonomics and Musculoskeletal Disorder Management Safety Program 1. Purpose. This document provides a program to enable an organization to effectively manage musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs) or repetitive strain injuries (RSI). 2. Scope. This program applies to all facilities and operations at the company. This program is limited to work-related musculoskeletal disorders. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management. Management should review the following roles and responsibilities and assign them to appropriate existing or new positions as they deem appropriate. Additionally, they have the following responsibilities: Ultimate responsibility to ensure program requirements are met Communicate the importance of the MSD management program Complete any required training under State regulations (California) Develop and approve the goals and objectives of the company s ergonomics program and regularly review progress Review organization procedures to ensure employee participation Appoint one or more persons from within the company to function as a local ergonomics coordinator, as needed Ensure adequate resources are available (i.e. personnel, time, equipment) to implement the program or any ergonomic initiatives undertaken Ensure that personnel performing specific tasks relative to the ergonomics program or initiatives are competent based on their education, training and experience Ensure, when feasible, controls to any identified ergonomic hazards are implemented Ensure supervisors and employees are held accountable for reporting ergonomic incidents, as needed (required in California). 3.2 Employees: Participate in specific job and process hazard analysis and evaluations, as needed Report MSDs, or MSD signs or symptoms, when recognized. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 154 of 389

155 3.3 Ergonomics Coordinator (may also be Safety Officer or other designated person). A minimum of one coordinator is recommended per company. The total number of persons assigned to this role shall be appropriate for the goals and deliverables of the program. The responsibilities for this role should be to: Function as centralized local resource of ergonomic services Complete any required training Maintain any documentation/records associated with the program Provide required training to employees, as needed or appropriate Monitor regulations related to musculoskeletal disorders and provide advocacy for the employees to the company Establish site wide goals and monitor performance related to continuous improvement and program management to minimize compliance concerns, where required. This may be accomplished by the following: Conducting a screening or prioritization of tasks, equipment, workplaces and processes Participating in reviews of new designs and modifications to existing processes, equipment, or tasks, including recommendations for controlling risk factors Consulting on issues of concern by conducting technical analysis, providing recommendations to improve identified problems, etc Regularly report to management on the status of program Coordinate internal audits of program against the corporate program. 3.4 Medical Service Provider (as needed or required): Coordinate case management process Provide health-care consultations and services. 3.5 Engineering Professional (as needed or required): Provide technical engineering consultation for ergonomic issues Assist in the development and implementation of ergonomic improvements. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 155 of 389

156 4. Procedure. 4.1 Elements of a Manufacturing-Based Program: # Program Element Deliverable Retention Period Allocate Resources and Define N/A Responsibilities Written Program Document UOS. Update annually. 1 Management Systems UOS. 3-year review; Annual MSD Program Implementation Checklist. review for targeted operations. Action Plan / Project Activity Log. Regular update. 3-year retention. Performance metric charts. UOS. Update annually. 2 Training Training Records. Regular update. 10-year retention. 3 Proactive Job Screening and Assessment Prioritized List of Jobs. Regular update. 3-year retention. 4 Proactive Review of New and Planned Modifications MSD Job Screening and Analysis 5 Incident Investigation Records. UOS. 5-year retention. 6 Investigation of Employee Control Implementation Records. Reports 7 Management of MSD Cases Medical case management. N/A UOS - Until Obsolete or Superseded National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 156 of 389

157 4.2 Figure 1 below illustrates the essential components and functions of a manufacturing based MSD management program and how they work together. Management Responsibility Employee Involvement Roles and Responsibilities Personnel Assigned Written Program Training ORGANIZATION EXISTING Jobs, Equipment, Workplaces, and Processes PLANNED Modifications NEW Design Proactive Screening Employee Reporting Safety, Health and Environmental Reviews Prioritized List of Jobs MSD Conditions of Concern Signs/Symptoms or Injury/Illness Action Plans Notify Medical Evaluation and Case Management Incident Investigation MSD Screening Tool (MST) No Do you meet or exceed the Actionable Levels? Yes Can you do a Quick Fix Design modification? MSD Analysis Tools No Job Analysis to identify Contributory Factors, Improvement Opportunities Yes Review Controls - Eliminate/Substitute - Engineering - Work Practices - Administrative - PPE Management Approval No Control Implementation to Limit Risk Factors or Exposure to Risk Factors Implement Controls Job Specific Training Yes Have risk factors Been reduced as Much as technically And economically Feasible? Yes Are any Actionable Levels Exceeded? No No further action except to maintain controls and training 4.3 Elements of an Office or Field-Service based Program: Where computer/office work or field service work is the majority (75%) of the work environment, the organization may incorporate a modified program as outlined below. Field service work does not imply manufacturing maintenance departments An office/field service based MSD management program should have the same components as shown in 5.1 with the following exceptions: Proactive screening (see associated document - Ergonomics Screening and Analysis Tools) is not required in field service work Proactive review of new and planned modifications (see associated document - Ergonomics Screening and Analysis Tools) is not required in field service work. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 157 of 389

158 4.3.3 Figure 2 below illustrates the essential components and functions of an office/field service based MSD management program and how they work together. Management Responsibility Employee Involvement Roles and Responsibilities Personnel Assigned Written Program Training ORGANIZATION EXISTING Jobs, Equipment, Workplaces, and Processes NEW Workplaces, Equipment Field Service Work Environments: Not required Proactive Screening Employee Reporting Field Service Work Environments: Not required MSD Conditions of Concern Signs/Symptoms or Injury Illness Action Plans Notify Medical Evaluation and Case Management Incident Investigation Computer/ Service Checklist No Action No Did you Identify any concerns? Yes Review Controls Control Implementation to Limit Risk Factors or Exposure to Risk Factors Management Approval Implement Controls Job Specific Training No Can you eliminate or reduce Risk Factors to a point that they meet the checklist? Yes No further action except to maintain controls and training 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Recordkeeping: Completion of any ergonomics training course should be entered into the training record of the employee. A training matrix is optional and may be used to track who has and has not taken recommended courses. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 158 of 389

159 5.1.2 A record of evaluated jobs and implemented controls should be maintained to assist in the evaluations of similar types of tasks or activities at the company. 5.2 Health Surveillance: Prior to initial job assignment, or transfer of job responsibilities, employees who are to be assigned to positions involving known or suspected exposures to ergonomic hazards may receive a baseline health surveillance examination to establish where any changes in employee health status may occur. This surveillance is also designed to assist the company in determining where ergonomic controls may be required. Note: the use of medical screening tests or evaluations has not been validated as a predictive measure of risk for determining MSD related injuries and illnesses. 5.3 Ergonomic Screening and Surveys: Checklist. A survey checklist may be used to assist in determining ergonomic risk factors such as: posture, materials handling, and upper extremity factors. The checklist will be tailored to the specific needs and conditions of the workplace Ergonomic Risk Factors. Identification of ergonomic hazards is normally based on ergonomic risk factors such as, conditions of a job process, work station, or work methods that contribute to the risk of developing problems associated with ergonomic stressors. Not all of these risk factors will be present in every job containing ergonomic stressors, nor is the existence of one of these factors necessarily sufficient to cause a problem associated with CTD. Supervisors should ensure that known risk factors for specific employees, jobs or tasks are conveyed to the ergonomic assessment committee for improvement or correction Personal Risk Factors include: Gender, Age, Anthropometry, Work method, Attitude, Training, Sight, Hearing, Smell, Physical strength, and Weight Upper Extremities Risk Factors include: repetitive and/or prolonged activities, forceful exertions (usually with the hands), pinch grips, prolonged static postures, awkward postures (reaching and twisting), continued physical contact with work surfaces, excessive vibration from power tools and inappropriate or inadequate hand tools Back Disorder Risk Factors include: body mechanics (bending, lifting and twisting), prolonged sitting with poor posture, lack of adjustable equipment (chairs, footrests, etc.), poor grips on handles, slippery footing, frequency of movement, duration and pace, load stability, reach distances and work height Environmental Risk Factors include: floor surfaces and platforms, temperature extremes, lighting, noise and vibration Multiple Risk Factors. Jobs, operations, or work stations that have multiple risk factors have a higher probability of ergonomic risk. The combined effect of several risk factors is sometimes referred to as "multiple causation." National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 159 of 389

160 5.4 Work Station Analysis and Design: Engineering Solutions. Engineering solutions, where feasible, are the preferred method of control for ergonomic hazards. The focus of the company ergonomics safety program is to make the job fit the person, not to make the person fit the job. This is accomplished whenever possible by redesigning the work station, work methods, or tool(s) to reduce the demands of the job Work Station Design. Work stations when initially constructed or when redesigned will be adjustable in order to accommodate the person who actually works at a given work station, it is not adequate to design for the "average" or typical worker. Work stations should be easily adjustable and either designed or selected to fit a specific task, so that they are comfortable for the workers using them. The work space should be large enough to allow for the full range of required movements, especially where hand-held tools are used Design of Work Methods. Traditional work method analysis considers static postures and repetition rates. This may be supplemented by addressing the force levels and the hand and arm postures involved. The tasks will be altered where possible to reduce these and the other stresses Repetitive motion. All efforts to reduce repetitive motion will be pursued. Examples of methods to reduce highly repetitive movements include: Increasing the number of workers performing a task Lessening repetition by combining jobs with very short cycle times, thereby increasing cycle time. (Sometimes referred to as "job enlargement.") Using automation where appropriate Designing or altering jobs to allow self-pacing or rest periods Force measurements. Force measurements, when taken, are noted as an estimated average effort, and a peak force. They are be recorded as "light," "moderate," and "heavy." These measurements include the number of manipulations per cycle, per time frame and per work shift Vibration measurements. Tools can be checked for excessive vibration. (The NIOSH criteria document on vibration should be consulted) Posture and lifting measurements. Hand, arm, and shoulder postures and movements can be assessed for levels of risk. Work stations having tasks requiring manual materials handling should have the maximum weight-lifting values calculated. (The NIOSH Work Practices Guide for Manual Lifting, 1981, should be used for basic calculations. Note that this guide does not address lifting that involves twisting or turning motions.) National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 160 of 389

161 6. Training and Information. 6.1 MSD Training Courses: With this program is a training course recommendation form which can assist companies in determining the training recommendations and frequency of training for employees involved. 6.2 General Awareness Training: General awareness training for ergonomics is recommended for new employees on initial assignment, and refresher training is recommended for current employees at a minimum of once every three years. Training using a video tape with a question and answer time period is also appropriate as refresher training. 6.3 In-depth Ergonomics Training: In-depth training is recommended for all new ergonomic coordinators and others regularly involved in assessment. In-depth training is also recommended for all new and current engineers/designers whose work will impact the design of new, modified or existing processes or work places. 6.4 Job Specific Training: 7. Definitions Job specific training may be provided on a case by case basis when work methods or engineering controls have been implemented Job Specific training is composed of the following topics: Instruction on the safe methods of using equipment Instruction of the identified work methods The reasons for job specific controls This training should take place in separate training sessions to the general awareness training. Ergonomics - A multi-disciplinary science that studies human physical and psychological capabilities and limitations. This body of knowledge can be used to design or modify the workplace, equipment, and products to improve human performance and reduce the likelihood of injury and illness. Ergonomics Coordinator - A designated person who is responsible for identifying and correcting ergonomic hazards in the workplace, including ergonomic professionals or other trained and qualified persons (such as health care providers, engineers, safety personnel or others who have received ergonomics training). National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 161 of 389

162 Ergonomic Hazards - Workplace conditions that pose a biomechanical stress to the worker. Such hazardous workplace conditions include, but are not limited to, faulty work station layout, improper work methods, improper tools, excessive tool vibration, and job design problems that include aspects of work flow, line speed, posture and force required, work/rest regimens, and repetition rate. They are also referred to as "stressors." Ergonomic risk factors - Conditions of a job, process, or operation that contribute to the risk of developing CTDs, MSDs or RSIs. Cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs - The term used in these guidelines for health disorders arising from repeated biomechanical stress due to ergonomic hazards. Other terms that have been used for such disorders include "repetitive motion injury," "occupational overuse syndrome," and "repetitive strain injury." CTDs are a class of musculoskeletal disorders involving damage to the tendons, tendon sheaths, synovial lubrication of the tendon sheaths, and the related bones, muscles, and nerves of the hands, wrists, elbows, shoulders, neck and back. The more frequently occurring occupationally induced disorders in this class include carpal Tunnel syndrome, epicondylitis (tennis elbow), tendonitis, tenosynovitis, synovitis, stenosing tenosynovitis of the finger, DeQuervain Disease, and low back pain. Musculoskeletal Disorder (MSD) - A disorder of the muscles, nerves, tendons, ligaments, joints, cartilage, blood vessels, or spinal discs. MSDs may include muscle strains and tears, ligament sprains, joint and tendon inflammation, tendonitis, epicondylitis, carpal tunnel syndrome, rotator cuff syndrome, DeQuervain's syndrome, trigger finger, tarsal tunnel syndrome, hand-arm vibration syndrome (HAVS), and low back pain, pinched nerves, sciatica, spinal disc degeneration, and herniated spinal disc. Injuries arising from slips, trips, falls, motor vehicle accidents, or similar accidents are not considered MSDs for the purposes of this program. Repetitive Strain Injury (RSI) - The terms MSD and RSI are analogous for the purposes of this program. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 162 of 389

163 ERGONOMIC OFFICE/COMPUTER SAFETY CHECKLIST Completed by: Date: PART I OFFICE/COMPUTER OVERVIEW: WORKING POSTURES The workstation is designed or arranged for doing computer tasks so it allows your: Head and neck to be upright or in-line with the torso (not bent down/back). If "no" refer to Monitors, Chairs and Work Surfaces in part 2. Head, neck, and trunk to face forward (not twisted). If "no" refer to Monitors or Chairs in part 2. Trunk to be perpendicular to floor (may lean back into backrest but not forward). If "no" refer to Chairs or Monitors in part 2. Shoulders and upper arms to be in-line with the torso, generally about perpendicular to the floor and relaxed (not elevated or stretched forward). If "no" refer to Chairs in part 2. Upper arms and elbows to be close to the body (not extended outward). If "no" refer to Chairs, Work Surfaces, Keyboards, and Pointers in part 2. Forearms, wrists, and hands to be straight and in-line (forearm at about 90 degrees to the upper arm). If "no" refer to Chairs, Keyboards, Pointers in part 2. Wrists and hands to be straight (not bent up/down or sideways toward the little finger). If "no" refer to Keyboards, or Pointers in part 2. Thighs to be parallel to the floor and the lower legs to be perpendicular to floor (thighs may be slightly elevated above knees). If "no" refer to Chairs or Work Surfaces in part 2. Feet rest flat on the floor or are supported by a stable footrest. If "no" refer to Chairs, Work Surfaces in part 2. SEATING Consider these points when evaluating the chair: YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Backrest provides support for your lower back (lumbar area). YES NO Seat width and depth accommodate the specific user (seat pan not too big/small). YES NO Seat front does not press against the back of your knees and lower legs (seat pan not too long). YES NO Seat has cushioning and is rounded with a "waterfall" front (no sharp edge). YES NO Armrests, if used, support both forearms while you perform computer tasks and they do not interfere with movement. YES NO KEYBOARD/INPUT DEVICE Consider these points when evaluating the keyboard or pointing device. The keyboard/input device is designed or arranged for doing computer tasks so the: Keyboard/input device platform(s) is stable and large enough to hold a keyboard and an input device. YES NO Input device (mouse or trackball) is located right next to your keyboard so it can be operated without reaching. YES NO Input device is easy to activate and the shape/size fits your hand (not too big/small). YES NO Wrists and hands do not rest on sharp or hard edges. YES NO Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 163 of 389

164 WORK AREA Consider these points when evaluating the desk and workstation. The work area is designed or arranged for doing computer tasks so the Thighs have sufficient clearance space between the top of the thighs and your computer YES table/keyboard platform (thighs are not trapped). Legs and feet have sufficient clearance space under the work surface so you are able to get YES close enough to the keyboard/input device. ACCESSORIES Check to see if the: Document holder, if provided, is stable and large enough to hold documents. YES NO NO NO Document holder, if provided, is placed at about the same height and distance as the monitor screen so there is little head movement, or need to re-focus, when you look from the document to the screen. Wrist/palm rest, if provided, is padded and free of sharp or square edges that push on your wrists. Wrist/palm rest, if provided, allows you to keep your forearms, wrists, and hands straight and in-line when using the keyboard/input device. Telephone can be used with your head upright (not bent) and your shoulders relaxed (not elevated) if you do computer tasks at the same time. GENERAL Workstation and equipment have sufficient adjustability so you are in a safe working posture and can make occasional changes in posture while performing computer tasks. Computer workstation, components and accessories are maintained in serviceable condition and function properly. Computer tasks are organized in a way that allows you to vary tasks with other work activities, or to take micro-breaks or recovery pauses while at the computer workstation. YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 164 of 389

165 PART II OFFICE/COMPUTER IN-DEPTH ASSESSMENT TIPS Monitors Make sure the screen is large enough for adequate visibility. Usually a 15 to 20-inch monitor is sufficient. Smaller units will make it difficult to read characters and larger units may require excessive space. The angle and tilt should be easily adjustable. Flat panel displays take less room on the desk and may be more suitable for locations with limited space. Keyboards Split keyboard designs will allow you to maintain neutral wrist postures. Keyboards with adjustable feet will accommodate a wider range of keyboard positions and angles. Adjustable feet on the front as well as the back will further aid adjustments. Increased adjustability will facilitate neutral wrist postures. The cord that plugs into the CPU should be long enough to allow the user to place the keyboard and the CPU in a variety of positions. At least six feet of cord length is desirable. Consider a keyboard without a 10-key keypad if the task does not require one. If the task does require one occasionally, a keyboard with a separate 10-key keypad may be appropriate. Keyboards without keypads allow the user to place the mouse closer to the keyboard. Consider the shape and size of the keyboard if a keyboard tray is used. The keyboard should fit comfortably on the tray. Consider keyboards without built-in wrist rest, because separate wrist rests are usually better. Keyboards should be detached from the display screen if they are used for a long duration keying task. Laptop keyboards are generally not suitable for prolonged typing tasks. Keyboard Trays Keyboard trays should be wide enough and deep enough to accommodate the keyboard and any peripheral devices, such as a mouse. If a keyboard tray is used, the minimum vertical adjustment range (for a sitting position) should be 22 inches to 28 inches from the floor. Keyboard trays should have adjustment mechanisms that lock into position without turning knobs. These are frequently over tightened, which can lead to stripped threads, or they may be difficult for some users to loosen. Desks and Work Surfaces The desk area should be deep enough to accommodate a monitor placed at least 20 inches away from your eyes. Ideally, your desk should have a work surface large enough to accommodate a monitor and a keyboard. Usually about 30 inches is deep enough to accommodate these items. Desk height should be adjustable between 20 inches and 28 inches for seated tasks. The desk surface should be at about elbow height when the user is seated with feet flat on the floor. Adjustability between seated and standing heights is desirable. You should have sufficient space to place the items you use most often, such as keyboard, mouse, and monitor directly in front of you. There should be sufficient space underneath for your legs while sitting in a variety of positions. The minimum under-desk clearance depth should be 15 inches for your knees and 24 inches for your feet. Clearance width should be at least 20 inches. Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 165 of 389

166 Desks and Work Surfaces [continued] Purchasing a fixed-height desk may require the use of a keyboard tray to provide adequate height adjustment to fit a variety of users. Desktops should have a matte finish to minimize glare. Avoid glass tops. Avoid sharp leading edges where your arms come in contact with work surfaces. Rounded or sloping surfaces are preferable. The leading edge of work surface should be wide enough to accommodate the arms of your chair, usually about 24 to 27 inches. Spaces narrower than this will interfere with arm wrests and restrict your movement. This is especially important in four-corner work units. Chairs The chair should be easily adjustable. The chair should have a sturdy five-legged base with good chair casters that roll easily over the floor or carpet. The chair should swivel 360 degrees so it is easier to access items around your workstation without twisting. Minimum range for seat height should be about 16 inches. Seat pan length should be 15 inches to 17 inches. Seat pan width should be at least as wide as the user's thighs. A minimum width of about 18 inches is recommended. Chair edges should be padded and contoured for support. Seat pan tilt should have a minimum adjustable range of about 5 degrees forward and backward. Avoid severely contoured seats as these limit seated postures and are uncomfortable for many users. Front edge of the seat pan should be rounded in a waterfall fashion. Material for the seat pan and back should be firm, breathable, and resilient. The seat pan depth should be adjustable. Some chairs have seat pans that slide forward and backward and have a fixed back. On others the seat pan position is fixed and the backrest moves horizontally forward and backward so the effective depth of the seat pan can be adjusted. Beware of chairs where the back only tilts forward and backward. These do not provide adequate adjustment for a wide range of users. The backrest should be at least 15 inches high and 12 inches wide and should provide lumbar support that matches the curve of your lower back. The backrest should widen at its base and curve in from the sides to conform to your body and minimize interference with your arms. The backrest should allow you to recline at least 15 degrees and should lock into place for firm support. The backrest should extend high enough to support your upper trunk and neck/shoulder area. If the backrest reclines more than about 30 degrees from vertical, a headrest should be provided. Armrests should be removable and the distance between them should be adjustable. They should be at least 16 inches apart. Armrest height should be adjustable between 7 inches and 10.5 inches from the seat pan. Fixed height armrests are not desirable, especially for chairs that have more than one user. Armrests should be large enough (in length and width) to support your forearm without interfering with the work surface. Armrests should be padded and soft. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 166 of 389

167 Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 167 of 389

168 Chairs [continued] Most chairs are designed for weights under 275 pounds. If the user weighs more than 275 pounds, the chair must be designed to support the extra weight. Document Holders The document holder needs to be stable but easy to adjust for height, position, distance, and viewing angle. If the monitor screen is your primary focus, purchase a document holder that will sit next to the monitor at the same height and distance. If the task requires frequent access to the document (such as writing on the document) a holder that sits between the keyboard and monitor may be more appropriate. Wrist Rests Wrist rest should match the front edge of the keyboard in width, height, slope, and contour. Pad should be soft but firm. Gel type materials are recommended. Wrist rest should be at least 1.5 inches deep (depth away from the keyboard) to minimize contact pressure on the wrists and forearm. Mouse/Pointing Devices Choose a mouse/pointer based on the requirements of your task and your physical limitations. There really is no difference, other than preference, among a mouse, trackball, or other device. A mouse should match the contour of your hand and have sufficient cord length to allow its placement next to the keyboard. If you choose a trackball, avoid ones that require the thumb to roll the ball--they may cause discomfort and possible injury to the area around your thumb. A smaller mouse may be more appropriate especially if you have small hands. Caution should be taken if a mouse is used by more than one person. A mouse that has sensitivity adjustments and can be used with either hand is desirable. Telephones If task requirements mandate extended periods of use or other manual tasks such as typing while using the phone, use a telephone with a "hands-free" headset. The telephone should have a speaker feature for "hands-free" usage. "Hands-free" headsets should have volume adjustments and volume limits. Desk Lighting Good desk lighting depends on the task you're performing. Use bright lights with a large lighted area when working with printed materials. Limit and focus light for computer tasks. The location and angle of the light sources, as well as their intensity levels, should be fully adjustable. The light should have a hood or filter to direct or diffuse the light. The base should be large enough to allow a range of positions or extensions. Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 168 of 389

169 ERGONOMIC WORK AREA SCREENING AND ANALYSIS TOOL Body Part Action Code Physical Risk Factor A Awkward Posture Shoulders A1 Working with the arms fully extended or Raising the hand(s) or the elbows above the shoulder(s) (48 for a 5 th %ile population) in either a long-duration static hold (i.e. 15 min.) or in a short-duration repetitive manner (more than once per minute). Duration (cumulative) 2 hrs or more per day Visual Aid Neck A2 Working with the neck bent more than 45º (without support or the ability to vary posture) 2 hrs or more per day A3 Working with the back bent forward more than 30º (without support or the ability to vary posture) 2 hrs or more per day Back A4 Working with the back twisted more than 20º 2 hrs or more per day A5 Repetitively (more than 2 times/minute) Working with the back twisted more than 20º 2 hours continuously Legs A6 Squatting, crouching or kneeling 2 hrs or more per day B Repeated Impact Hands, Knees B1 C Force Repetitively (more than 1 per 5 minutes) Using the hand (heel/base of palm) or knee as a hammer 2 hrs or more per day C1 Lifting more than 50 pounds at any one time; No figure Back, shoulders C2 Repetitively (more than once per minute) Lifting weight (in pounds) greater than the limits in the visual aid (Based on NIOSH 91 for a 50%ile person heights, and 5%ile reach) 4 hrs or more per day C3 Pushing/pulling with more than 50 pounds of initial force (e.g. truck with a total weight of 1000 pounds) 2 hrs or more per day No figure National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 169 of 389

170 Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 170 of 389

171 Body Part Action Code Physical Risk Factor Combined With Duration (cumulative) Visual Aid C Force (continued) Back C4 C5 Carrying 30 lbs or more at waist level More than 25 feet or more than once every 5 minutes More than 3 times / minute 2 hours or more per day 1.5 hrs or more per day No figure No figure C6 Pinching while exerting a force of 2 lbs or more per hand. (comparable to pinching half a ream of paper) Wrists bent in: flexion 30º or more, or extension 45º or more, or deviation 30º or more. 1 hrs or more per day Flexion Extension Deviation Arms, wrists, hands C7 No other risk factors 2 hrs or more per day C8 C9 Gripping an unsupported object(s) weighing 10 or more pounds per hand, or with a force of 10 pounds or more per hand (comparable to clamping light duty automotive jumper cables onto a battery) More than 3 times / minute Wrists bent in: flexion 30º or more, or extension 45º or more, or deviation 30º or more, 1.5 hrs or more per day 1 hrs or more per day No figure C10 Wide grasp 1 hrs or more per day No figure C11 No other risk factors 2 hrs or more per day No figure D Repetition / Recovery Neck, shoulders, elbows, wrists, hands D1 D2 Using the same motion more than twice per minute (excluding keying activities) No other risk factors Wrists bent in: flexion 30º or more, or extension 45º or more, or deviation 30º or more (see figures above). 6 hrs or more per day 2 hrs or more per day AND High force hand exertion(s) Awkward posture: including bent wrists (as D3 described above), Intensive keying and mousing extended arms, tilted 2 hrs or more per day neck, back leaned forward. D4 No other risk factors 7 hrs or more per day E Vibration / Contact Stress Hand, whole body E1 Pressure against soft tissue (e.g. square edge / ridge) 30 min or more per day Using vibrating tools or equipment that typically have high E2 vibration levels ( >10 m/s 2 30 min. or more per chainsaws, jack hammers, day percussive tools, riveting hammers) Using vibrating tools or equipment that typically have E3 moderate vibration levels (5 m/s 2 2 hrs or more per day jig saws, grinders) Flexion Extension Deviation National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 171 of 389

172 Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 172 of 389

173 ERGONOMIC AND MSD PROGRAM ASSESSMENT TOOL Organization/Department: Assessor: Date: This organization implements: Manufacturing Computer/Office or Field Service Requirement Explanation A program has been developed and implemented to ensure that musculoskeletal disorders are effectively managed. This program must address the following at a minimum: Long term and annual improvement goals and metrics of the program; Defined roles and responsibilities and names of assigned personnel; Local procedures for managing MSDs, such as job improvement procedures, if different than corporate procedures. Locations of program activity records such as training, job analysis records, etc. An ergonomics coordinator is the local contact for ergonomics services. Functions include authoring the written program, monitoring program activities, conducting prioritization of existing jobs, etc. A minimum of one coordinator is recommended per company. The total number of persons assigned to this role shall be appropriate for the goals and deliverables of the program. General awareness information is given to new employees on initial assignment General awareness information is given to current employees at a minimum of once every three years. In-depth training is provided to ergonomic coordinators and other as appropriate on initial assignment. Training is given to new and current engineers and designers. Existing jobs are ranked and prioritized based on physical stress and risk of experiencing an MSD. An action plan to implement control measures to improve existing, high-priority jobs is followed and updated on a regular basis. New designs and planned modifications to existing jobs, equipment, workplaces and processes are screened, and if appropriate, analyzed relative to MSDs. Appropriate design changes are incorporated to eliminate or reduce any MSD risk factors of concern prior to installation of the new or modified design. If no risk factors are significant, no further activity is necessary. Page 18 Elements To Verify Do you have a documented Musculoskeletal Disorder Management Program and is the appropriate program selected for the work conditions? Are an adequate number of ergonomics coordinators assigned? Is MSD training provided to appropriate personnel at the intervals specified and are records being maintained? Is a prioritized list of existing jobs maintained and an action plan developed which targets selected high priority jobs to be improved? Not required for Field Service. Are proactive reviews of job designs conducted and are records maintained? Not required for Field Service. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 173 of 389

174 Requirement Explanation Employees report MSD incidents or MSD signs and symptoms or conditions of concern. MSD incidents and condition of concern are screened, and if appropriate, analyzed as soon as possible after an employee report. If none of the risk factors are significant, the job should be placed into the prioritized list of jobs. Detailed analysis of jobs identified with risk factors are conducted where a quick fix is not practical or ineffective. Appropriate analysis tools are used during job analysis. Root causes are associated with each identified risk factor. Control recommendations are associated with each root cause analysis. Employees participate in the job analysis, control selection and implementation. Quick fixes are satisfactory if they can be implemented within 30 days of the screening. Feasible controls are implemented to eliminate or reduce risk factors or exposures to significant risk factors identified. Controls are appropriate to the root causes identified. The hierarchy of controls (eliminate, job and work place redesign, administrative, or work practices) is to be used. Controls are implemented as soon as possible after the analysis of the job. The infeasibility of implementing controls is documented. Progress is tracked on control implementation and verified that they are working as intended and have not created any new risk factors of concern. Affected employees are trained on the purpose and proper usage of the implemented control. Does the company periodically evaluate their program against their goals? Elements To Verify Are MSD incidents and employee concerns consistently screened and, if appropriate, evaluated as soon as possible after an employee reports them and are records maintained? Are analysis of jobs consistently conducted in appropriate situations and are job analysis records maintained? Are appropriate controls consistently implemented and are records maintained? Is the infeasibility of implementing controls documented? Are implemented controls consistently followed up on, to determine if they are working as intended and are records being maintained? Are employees consistently trained on the use of the controls and are records being maintained? Does the company establish performance metrics and periodically evaluate their program against their goals? Page 19 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 174 of 389

175 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER ERGONOMICS Office Ergo Training Includes: Definitions Stressors Temperatur/Lighting CTDs and Risk Factors Workstation/Computer Set Up Hazards and Controls Manufacturing Ergo Training Includes: Definitions and Benefits Causes and Risks Lifting and Work Postures Force motions and Vibration Workstation/Computer Set Up Kitchen/Restaurant Ergo Training Includes: Temperature/Lighting Work Hours Lifting and Carrying Postures (bending, reaching) Housekeeping ands slips/trips Materials Handling INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 20 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 175 of 389

176 Designation: Location: Date Assessed: Related Operating Procedures Reviewed: Location Marked and Entry Controlled: Yes No Yes No FALL HAZARD ASSESSMENT CHECKLIST Can an employee enter the area without restriction and perform work? Yes No Are fall prevention systems such as cages, guardrails, toeboards, man lifts in place? Yes No Have slipping and tripping hazards been removed or controlled? Yes No Have visual warnings of fall hazards been installed? Yes No Can the distance a worker could fall be reduced by installing platforms, nets etc.? Yes No Are any permanently installed floor coverings, gratings, hatches, or doors missing? Yes No Does the location contain any other recognized safety and or health hazards? Yes No Is the space designated as a Permit Required Confined Space? Yes No Have anchor points been designated and load tested? Yes No Assessment Information: (indicate specifics with initials) Initial Hazard Remarks/Recommendations Total potential fall distance: Number of workers involved: Frequency of task: Obtainable anchor point strength: Required anchor point strength: (not less than 5000 lbs) Additional Requirements: Potential environmental conditions that could impact safety: Initial Condition Remarks/Recommendations Possible required structural alterations: Initial Alteration Remarks/Recommendations Possible task modification that may be required: Initial Task Remarks/Recommendations Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 176 of 389

177 Breakdown of vertical and horizontal movement: (sketch out work task): Training requirements: Initial Requirement Remarks/Recommendations Personal protective equipment required: Initials Requirement Remarks/Recommendations Approved AUTHORIZATION I acknowledge that I have conducted a Fall Hazard Assessment of the above designated location and have detailed the findings of the assessment on this form. * Further detailed on attachment: Yes No Name: Signature: Title: Date: Time: ASSESSMENT FORM RETENTION INFORMATION ATTACHMENTS Permanent Retention File: Location: Yes No Date Filed: Filed By: Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 177 of 389

178 PROGRAM OVERVIEW FALL PROTECTION (PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEM) SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR , CFR 1926 Subpart M - 29 CFR CFR INTRODUCTION: Fall protection systems are required when working from heights greater than 6 feet in construction and greater than 4 feet in general industry and a guardrail system is not in place, above hazardous equipment and working in an aerial lift bucket. This program establishes procedures for fall hazard control, inspections, equipment maintenance, workplace evaluations and employee training. TRAINING: Employees trained initially in the type of fall protection system used. Training includes classroom instruction in the hazards of fall protection and the type of protective systems used, and (if used) a demonstration of the use of a Personal Fall Arrest System. Annual re-training is required in some states. ACTIVITIES: Evaluate hazards falls are evaluated in the workplace. Ensure these hazards are controlled through guardrail systems or that employees have appropriate training and equipment. FORMS: Fall Hazard Evaluation Equipment Inspection Checklist Program Assessment Requirements Example Chart Training Certificate Wallet Card Written Procedure Training Attendance Roster 43. Purpose 44. Scope 45. Responsibilities 46. Procedure 47. Safety Information 48. Training Information & Requirements 49. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 178 of 389

179 Fall Protection Safety Program 1. Purpose. The hazards of potential falls at heights of 4 feet and above (or 6 feet and above at construction sites) will be addressed in this document. This safety program describes a systematic approach that must be used to protect and prevent people from falling. This safety program also lists some of the most common fall hazards, and provides recommendations and guidelines for selecting fall arrest systems. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis, and more frequently as needed. 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR, that prompt revision of this document 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document 1.4 When there is an accident or close-call that relates to this area of safety 1.5 Review the safety program any time fall protection procedures fail 2. Scope. This program encompasses the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. It also applies to fall hazards on off-site jobs or activities to which company employees are exposed. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management/Supervisors: Assess the workplace, or each job site, for fall hazards Provide fall protection equipment, as needed or required Enforce the use of appropriate fall protection systems and equipment Ensure employees are properly trained in the use of fall protection systems and equipment Ensure equipment is inspected prior to each use, when subjected to falls or impact loads, and on a frequent and regular basis Write fall protection procedures and ensure they are followed Ensure fall protection systems are installed and set up by a professional engineer or other qualified person. 3.2 Employees: Attend appropriate training. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 179 of 389

180 3.2.2 Utilize fall protection systems and equipment, as needed or required Inspect equipment before each use. Equipment that has been subjected to a fall or impact-load must be removed from service until inspected by the manufacturer or designated professional engineer Report hazards and hazardous conditions to your Supervisor immediately. 3.3 Safety Officer, Fall Protection Program Coordinator, or Other Designee (as needed or required): Assist in the development and implementation of this program. 3.4 Contractors: 4. Procedure In addition to complying with the fall protection requirements that apply to all employees, each contractor who is retained to perform operations that involve fall protection will: Obtain any available information regarding fall hazards and protective measures Coordinate fall protection operations, when both company personnel and contractor personnel will be working in or near recognized fall hazard locations Inform the contractor of the company s Fall Protection Safety Program. The contractor must agree to follow the company s policy with regard to any of any hazards confronted or created in conducting operations involving fall protection within company owned facilities. This debriefing will take place immediately prior to the operation. 4.1 Facility/Department Evaluation. The workplace will be assessed before each assigned job for potential fall hazards Proper fall arrest equipment will be used for jobs requiring fall protection when elimination of the hazard(s) is not possible The company will evaluate the facilities by department or job site to determine fall hazards. The Fall Hazard Evaluation Form may be used to document fall hazards A complete list of fall hazard locations and protective measures procedures will be maintained, as needed. Each site or location will be evaluated and the appropriate fall protection measures will be taken based on the hazards identified. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 180 of 389

181 4.2 Fall Hazard Control Procedures (Fall Prevention) Control Procedures Development. Once a facility evaluation has been accomplished, procedures will be developed, documented and utilized for the control of potential fall hazards. Fall Prevention Safety Programs will be designed by competent individuals or other competent personnel. Company engineers (where utilized) or other competent personnel will be provided with any required specialized training to recognize fall hazards, to understand and address fall prevention techniques, and to become familiar with fall arrest equipment and procedures. It is critical that they consider fall protection design for the safety of operations where employees must work at elevated heights. Safety during access and egress from elevated work sites will also be considered. The following guidelines will be used when planning work at elevated heights: Involve the Safety Department early in the project planning/job planning so that they can recommend appropriate fall-protection measures and equipment Involve qualified Engineers when load rating of anchorage points must be determined or is in doubt. Required training will be provided as necessary Involve Engineering and Maintenance when anchorage points must be installed The Safety Officer and Engineering Departments will use the expertise of fall protection equipment manufacturers such as Rose Manufacturing Company, Miller Equipment Company, Research and Trading Company and DBI/SALA The company will be specific in dealing with fall hazards when developing contracts. Contractors will be required to provide a written safety program which describes the Contractors fall protection policies and procedures when they will be working at elevated heights Procedural Format. The following format will be followed when developing fall protection procedures. The Safety Officer will be responsible for the implementation of these procedures. The procedures will clearly and specifically outline the scope, purpose, authorization, rules, and techniques to be utilized to control fall hazards, and the means to enforce compliance including, but not limited to, the following: A specific statement of the intended use of the procedure A review of accident records, including OSHA Recordkeeping logs and Workers Compensation documentation Interviews with employees and groups of employees whose work environment may include fall hazards. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 181 of 389

182 Physical observations of the work environment(s) that involve fall hazards or the potential of such Observations of individuals and their job tasks and work habits that expose them to existing or potential fall hazards The procedures contained in the company s Fall Protection Safety Program Specific procedural steps for the use and operation of body harness systems, and other fall protection systems Specific procedural steps for the placement, erection, inspection, maintenance, disassembly and transfer of fall protection systems or devices and the person(s) responsible for them Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment to determine and verify the effectiveness of the fall protection control measures (not load testing) The correct procedures to rescue employees who have fallen The role of each employee in this safety program and applicable policies Specific requirements for testing fall protection systems or equipment. 4.3 Fall Protection Systems. When fall hazards cannot be eliminated through any other means, fall arrest systems will be used to control falls. Proper training on the use of fall arrest equipment is essential and will be provided prior to use Full Body Harness Systems. A full body harness system consists of a full-body harness, lanyard, energy shock absorber, and self-locking snap hook. Before using a full-body harness system, the supervisor and/or the user must address such issues as: Has the user been trained to recognize fall hazards and to use fall arrest systems properly? Are all components of the system compatible according to the manufacturer s instructions? Have appropriate anchorage points and attachment techniques been reviewed? Has free fall distance been considered so that a worker will not strike a lower surface or object before the fall is arrested? Have swing fall hazards been eliminated? National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 182 of 389

183 Have safe methods to retrieve fallen workers been planned? Has the full-body harness and all of its components been inspected both before each use and every 6 months? Is any of the equipment, including lanyards, connectors, and lifelines, subject to such problems as welding damage, chemical corrosion, or sandblasting operations? Retractable Lifelines. A retractable lifeline is a fall arrest device used in conjunction with other components of a fall arrest system. Retractable lifelines should be used by one person at a time A properly inspected and maintained retractable lifeline, when correctly installed and used as part of the fall arrest system, automatically stops a person s descent in a short distance after the onset of an accidental fall Retractable lifelines may be considered when working in areas such as on roofs and scaffolds, or in tanks, towers, vessels, and manholes. Also, retractable lifelines should be considered when climbing such equipment as vertical fixed ladders. Before using a retractable lifeline, the supervisor and/or the user must address the following questions: Has the user been trained to use a retractable lifeline correctly? Is the retractable lifeline being used in conjunction with a complete fall arrest system? Is the equipment under a regular maintenance program? Has the equipment been inspected within the last six months? Standard Harnesses. Harnesses for general purpose work should be Class III, constructed with a sliding back D-ring. Standard harnesses are suitable for continuous fall protection while climbing, riding, or working on elevated personnel platforms. They are suitable for positioning, fall arrest, and the rescue and evacuation of people who are working at elevated heights. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Protective Materials and Hardware. Appropriate fall protection devices will be provided for potential fall hazards. Selection of the equipment will be based on the fall protection evaluation. Evaluations will be conducted by authorized personnel to evaluate fall protection requirements. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 183 of 389

184 5.1.1 Selection Criteria Fall Protection devices will be singularly identified; will be the only devices(s) used for controlling falls; will not be used for other purposes; and will meet the following requirements: Capable of withstanding the environment to which they are exposed for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected Anchor points will not deteriorate when located in corrosive environments such as areas where acid and alkali chemicals are handled and stored Capable of withstanding the ultimate load of 5,000 lbs. for the maximum period of time that exposure is expected Standardization within company facilities. Fall protection devices will be standardized whenever possible. 5.2 Inspection and Maintenance. To ensure that fall protection systems are ready and able to perform their required tasks, a program of inspection and maintenance will be implemented and maintained. The following as a minimum, will comprise the basic requirements of the inspection and maintenance program: Equipment manufacturer s instructions will be incorporated into the inspection and preventive maintenance procedures All fall protection equipment will be inspected prior to each use, and a documented inspection at intervals not to exceed 6 months, or in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines The user will inspect his/her equipment prior to each use and check the inspection date Any fall protection equipment subjected to a fall or impact-load will be removed from service immediately and inspected by a qualified person (sent back to the manufacturer) Check all equipment for mold, damage, wear, mildew, or distortion Hardware should be free of cracks, sharp edges, or burns Ensure that no straps are cut, broken, torn or scraped Special situations such as radiation, electrical conductivity, and chemical effects will be considered. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 184 of 389

185 5.2.9 Equipment that is damaged or in need of maintenance will be tagged as unusable, and will not be stored in the same area as serviceable equipment A detailed inspection policy will be used for equipment stored for periods exceeding one month Anchors and mountings will be inspected before each use by the user and supervisor for signs of damage. 5.3 Most Common and Most Dangerous Fall Hazards. The tasks and situations listed below present inherent fall hazards. Give special attention to providing fall prevention and/or fall control for them, remembering that this attention is necessary in the design, engineering, planning, and execution stages of work. Supervisors will give special consideration to fall protection for the following tasks: Working from crane booms and tower cranes Working on top of machinery and equipment, such as overhead cranes, furnaces, conveyors and presses Other work that involves fall hazards, such as off-chutes from main piping in duct work or boilers Working on roofs, with deteriorating or unsupported sections and framing Working over chemical tanks or open pits Working from fixed or portable ladders, or climbing systems Performing work on water towers, product tanks, silos, pipe racks, presses, and floor pits. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 A safety training program will be provided for all employees who will be exposed to fall hazards in the work area, and will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be limited to: A description of fall hazards in the work area Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems Equipment limitations The elements encompassed in total fall distance Prevention, control and fall arrest systems Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 185 of 389

186 6.2 Generally, workers will be trained to recognize the hazards of falling from elevations and to avoid falls from grade level to lower levels through holes or openings in walking/working surfaces. Safety training programs will include prevention, control, and fall arrest systems. It must be ensured that appropriate fall arrest systems are installed, and that employees know how to use them before beginning any work that requires fall protection. 6.3 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. The company will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of fall protection is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application and usage is acquired by employees. This program will be provided to, and read by all employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following: Types of fall protection equipment appropriate for use Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be completed and the locations of such Load determination and balancing requirements Procedures for removal of protection devices from service for repair or replacement All other employees whose work operations are or may be in an area where fall protection devices may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level concerning hazards associated with fall protection operations Fall protection equipment identification. Fall protection equipment having identification numbers will be checked for legibility. Fall protection equipment having illegible identification markings will be turned in to the supervisor for inspection Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements Equipment donning and doffing procedures Equipment strengths and limitations Verification. The company will verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The documentation will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel. 6.4 Refresher training. Refresher training must encompass all the requirements for initial training, and be provided whenever there is reason to believe the employee s knowledge is insufficient Retraining will be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of fall protection equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which affects the Fall Protection Safety Program Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever there is reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of fall protection equipment or procedures. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 186 of 389

187 7. Definitions Whenever a fall protection procedure fails The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary Verification. The company will verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The documentation will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel. Anchorage - A secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or deceleration devices. Body belt A strap with means both for securing it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or deceleration device. Body harness - Straps which may be secured about the employee in a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it to other components of a personal fall arrest system. Competent person A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous conditions in any personal fall arrest system or any component thereof, as well as in their application and use with related equipment. Connector A device which is used to couple (connect) parts of the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together. It may be an independent component of the system, such as a carabineer, or it may be an integral component of part of the system. Deceleration device - Any mechanism with a maximum length of 3.5 feet, such as a rope grab, rip stitch lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards, self-retracting lifelines, etc. which serves to dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest. Energy shock absorber - A device that limits shock-load forces on the body. Failure - Load refusal, breakage, or separation of component parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is exceeded. Fall arrest system - A system specifically designed to secure, suspend, or assist in retrieving a worker in or from a hazardous work area. The basic components of a fall arrest system include anchorage, anchorage connector, lanyard, shock absorber, harness, and self-locking snap hook. Free fall - The act of falling before a personal fall arrest system begins to apply force to arrest the fall. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 187 of 389

188 Free fall distance - The vertical displacement of the fall arrest attachment point on the employee s body belt or body harness between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply force to arrest the fall (maximum of 6 feet). This distance excludes deceleration distance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they operate and fall arrest forces occur. Hole - A gap or void 2 inches or more in its least dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface. Lanyard - A flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline or anchorage. Leading edge - The edge of a floor roof, or formwork for a floor or other walking/working surface which changes location as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are placed, formed or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an unprotected side and edge during periods when it is not actively and continuously under construction. Lifeline - A component consisting of a flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch horizontally and which serves as a means for connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the anchorage. Opening - A gap or void 30 inches or more high and 18 inches or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which employees can fall to a lower level. Personal fall arrest system - A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited. Positioning device system - A body belt or body harness system rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning. Qualified person - One with a recognized degree or professional certificate and extensive knowledge and experience in the subject field who is capable of design, analysis, evaluation and specifications in the subject work, project, or product. Retractable lifeline - A fall arrest device that allows free travel without slack rope, but locks instantly when a fall begins. Rope grab - A deceleration device which travels on a lifeline and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the principle of inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both. Safety-monitoring system - A safety system in which a competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall hazards. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 188 of 389

189 Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard - A deceleration device containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum and arrests the fall. Snap-hook - A connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically closes to retain the object. Snap-hooks are generally one of two types: The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection or disconnection. The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. As of January 1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of personal fall arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited. Toe-board - A low protective barrier that will prevent the fall of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from falls for personnel. Walking/Working surface - Any surface, whether horizontal or vertical on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on which employees must be located in order to perform their job duties. Warning line system - A barrier erected on a roof to warn employees that they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge, and which designates an area in which roofing work may take place without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to protect employees in the area. Work area - That portion of a walking/working surface where job duties are being performed. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 189 of 389

190 FALL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT INSPECTION CHECKLIST Equipment Assessed: Assessor: Date: Safety Belt and Harness Inspection Visual inspections of fall protection equipment shall be conducted before each use. If any defects described in this checklist are found, the equipment must not be used. Beginning at one end, holding the body side of the belt/harness toward you, grasp the belt with your hands, placing them six to eight inches apart. Bend the belt into an inverted U and examine the surface for damaged or broken fibers, pulled stitches, cuts, abrasions or chemical damage. FOLLOW THIS PROCEDURE ALONG THE ENTIRE LENGTH ON THE INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF THE BELT/HARNESS. CONDITION PASS FAIL Inspect for frayed or broken strands. Broken webbing strands appear as tufts on the webbing surface. Check for thread separation or rotting both inside as well as outside of the body pad. Buckle tongues should be free of distortion in shape and motion. They should overlap the buckle frame and move freely back and forth in their socket. The roller should turn freely on frame. Check for distortion or sharp edges. The tongue or billet of the belts receives heavy wear from repeated buckling and unbuckling. Inspect for loose, distorted or broken grommets. Belts using punched holes without grommets should be checked for torn or elongated holes causing slippage of the buckle tongue. Check for excessive elongation or distortion. Rivets should be tight and unmovable with fingers. Body site rivet base and outside rivet burr should be flat against the material. Bent rivets will fail under stress. Note the condition of D ring rivets and D ring metal wear pads (if any). Discolored, pitted or cracked rivets indicated chemical corrosion. Friction buckles must be inspected for distortion. The outer bars and center bars must be straight. Pay special attention to corners and attachment points of the center bar. Sliding bar buckles must have the buckle frame and sliding bar inspected for cracks, distortion and sharp edges. The sliding bar should move freely. The knurled edge will slip if worn smooth. Inspect the corners and ends of the sliding bar carefully. NEVER CUT OR PUNCH ADDITIONAL HOLES IN THE SAIST STRAP OR STRENGTH MEMBERS Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 190 of 389

191 Safety Strap, Lanyard and Hardware Inspection Only use snaps and D rings which are compatible with each other. When inspecting lanyards, begin at one end and work to the opposite end. Slowly rotate the lanyard so that the entire circumference is checked. CONDITION PASS FAIL Inch by inch visual inspection for fiber laceration or stitch damage is done by flexing the strap in an inverted U. Strap buckles shall be inspected in the same banner as waist belt/harness buckles. (Buckle tongues should be free of distortion in shape and motion. They should overlap the buckle frame and move freely back and forth in their socket. The roller should turn freely on frame. Check for distortion or sharp edges.) Snap hooks shall be checked for distortion of the hook or frame attachment to the belt. The keeper (latch) should seat into the snap nose without binding or obstruction and the keeper spring should have sufficient force to close the keeper firmly. The thimble must be movable in the eye of the splice and the splice shall have no loose or cut strands. The thimble must be free of sharp edges, distortion or cracks. All rivets shall be tight, free of distortion or wear and without cracks, sharp edges or corrosion. Inspect wire rope lanyards for cuts or broken strands and unusual wearing patterns. Inspect fiber rope lanyards for weakened areas by examining changes in the original diameter. Inspect closely the forged steel D rings for cracks or other defects. Inspect the assembly of the D rings to the body pad or D ring saddle. If the D ring can be moved vertically, independent of the body pad or D saddle, the belt should be replaced. The D ring bar shall be at a 90 degree angle with the long axis of the belt and should pivot freely. Webbing Inspection Type of webbing Cotton Nylon and Cordura Polyester, Dacron Heat Scorches at 200 degrees to 250 degrees F, and turns a yellow color. Turns brown at 285 degrees F and is destroyed. In excessive heat nylon becomes brittle and has a shriveled, brownish appearance. The fibers will break when flexed. Should not be used above 200 degrees F. Same as nylon except do not use above 180 degrees F. Chemical Changed in color depend on chemical exposure. Changes to light color or turns brown. Fibers may break when pulled or stressed. Change in color usually appearing as a brownish smear or smudge. Transverse cracks when the belt is bent over. Loss of elasticity. Same as nylon. Molten Metal or Flame Charred black marks or brown pockmarks. Holes through the webbing. Webbing strands fuse together. Hard shiny spots which are brittle. Will not support combustion. Same as nylon except will support combustion. Paint or Solvents Paint which has saturated the webbing causing hardening and fiber breaks. Paints containing lead will attack webbing fibers. Paint which penetrates and dries restricts movement of fibers. Drying agents and solvents in some paints will appear as chemical damage. Same as nylon. Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 191 of 389

192 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM ASSESSMENT Area or Job Site Assessed: Assessor: Date: Description of Requirement Compliant? Fall Protection - General Are locations that require the use of fall protection equipment readily identified via facility survey or a Job Hazard Analysis? Have appropriate fall protection devices and systems been determined for each operation by the competent or qualified person? Have employees been medically cleared to perform the required duties with regard to the fall protection systems and equipment? Are emergency procedures in place? Yes No Are any employees working above dangerous equipment protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, PFAS or safety net systems? Fall Protection Equipment and Devices Have fall protection devices been authorized by the Competent/Qualified person? Yes No Have all issued safety harnesses and lanyards been appropriately inspected? Yes No Is an inventory of fall protection equipment available, and can this equipment be accessed in a timely manner? Is there a written record of inspection and or maintenance for all fall protection equipment? Are procedures in place and followed that ensure the fall protection system or equipment is utilized throughout the operation? Fall Protection Procedures and Training Have written fall protection procedures been developed and reviewed (initially and upon any changes within the procedure or process) by the company s competent/qualified person? Have these written fall protection procedures been reviewed with applicable employees at the start of each new operational task (and at periodically for on-going tasks)? Are these written procedures available and accessible by employees who require them? Can employees demonstrate the donning, doffing, and adjustment of fall protection equipment? Have all applicable employees received formal fall protection training prior to commencing operations? Has training been documented appropriately? Yes No Does training include elevated platforms, protection systems, review of Federal, State and Local regulations, the written procedures and the inspection procedures for fall protection systems and equipment? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 192 of 389

193 Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 193 of 389

194 Description of Requirement Compliant? Fall Protection Materials Handling Are separate lines used for personnel fall protection and hoisting of equipment and materials. Are PFAS components such as harnesses used for personnel only and not used to hoist or lower materials? Fall Protection Emergency and Rescue YES YES NO NO Are appropriate rescue personnel readily available to respond in an emergency? YES NO Are these rescue personnel appropriately trained in the techniques needed for operations with regard to heights and fall protection equipment and/or confined spaces? Are rescue drills that include fall protection systems conducted at least annually by the rescue personnel? Fall Protection Safe Use YES YES NO NO Is each person utilizing a PFAS attached to individual or separate lifelines? YES NO Is each individual component of any personal fall arrest system properly inspected by the individual utilizing the equipment prior to use? Is any fall arrest system component that has been subjected to impact loading been removed from service until the competent/qualified person can inspect the device? Are all fall arrest system components tested to their rated capacity and frequently inspected to assure their functionality? Fall Protection - Contractors Do contractors have a fall protection plan or program in place that has been reviewed by the designated company representative? Is a competent/qualified person on site to monitor the work area and ensure proper use of the equipment? Have contractors conducted a fall hazard analysis at the start of the operation by reviewing movement and number of workers in the work area, frequency of operation, obstructions, emergency plan and environmental conditions? Has this analysis been reviewed with the company representative? YES NO Is a mechanism in place to report any difficulties or problems to the company representative? Do contract employees have the necessary equipment, skills and training to safely conduct the operation? Is all fall protection system equipment utilized safely and properly? YES NO Fall Protection - Communications YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A mechanism is in place that enables and encourages employees involved with fall protection systems and procedures to report any difficulties, concerns or problems with the equipment, process or devices. Any reported concerns, difficulties or problems are handled and properly managed or remediated before work is continued. YES YES NO NO Page 18 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 194 of 389

195 FALL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS EXAMPLE CHART This chart provides guidance on what type of fall protection system is approved for some common operations. This listing is NOT all-inclusive of fall protection needs and systems. Where Fall Protection is Required at Any Level Each employee shall be protected from falling (at any height) into or onto Dangerous equipment Excavations (including trenches) - at any depth shall have adequate physical barrier protection to protect employees from cave-in and falls into open excavations. Rail/coal cars or tankers (including 5th wheel tankers) moving or located away from buildings, loading platforms or other structures. Preferred Fall Protection System (In Priority Order) Guardrails or equipment guards shall be used when performing tasks on a routine basis. Guardrails, Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Safety Net Systems or combinations, shall be used when working in a nonroutine situation. Guardrail Fence or barricade Cover - strong enough to carry 2x the intended load without breaking, warping or flexing Attendants Contact the local HSE professional or competent/qualified person to determine if the job task to be done on top of rail cars and tankers is safe and free from hazards to allow employees to perform their duties. Rail/coal cars or tankers (including 5th wheel tankers, positioned insider or contiguous to a building, platform or other permanent structure. When Fall Protection is Required at the 4 Foot Level Each elevated work surface designed or used primarily as a walking/working surface 4 ft. or more above a lower level Any surface upon which employees are required or allowed to walk or work while performing tasks on a routine basis 4' or more above a lower level. Permanent floor openings - 12 inches or more in the least dimension, and 4' or more above a lower level. Permanent Hoist areas - 4' or more above a lower level. Where guardrails are removed to facilitate the hoisting operation, the employee shall be protected by a Personal Fall Arrest System. Horizontal Fall Protection System where feasible or Professionally engineered Fall Protection system of another design. Preferred Fall Protection System (In Priority Order) Guardrails Guardrails Guardrails with Toe Board Cover - rated to carry 2x the intended load without breaking, warping or flexing. Guardrails Personal Fall Arrest system (PFAS) Page 19 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 195 of 389

196 Where Fall Protection is Required at the 6 Foot Level Temporary wall openings - 6' or more above the lower level Temporary Floor openings - 12 inches or more in the least dimension and 6' or more above a lower level. Temporary Hoist Areas - 6' or more above a lower level. Where guardrails are removed to facilitate the hoisting operation, the employee shall be protected by a Personal Fall Protection System. Overhand Bricklaying and related work equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level. Overhand Bricklaying and related work equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level and 10" reach below work surface. Work on Low slope roof equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level and within 6' of a roof edge Work on steep roof equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level Pre-cast concrete erection equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level. Residential Construction equal to or greater than 6' above a lower level. Preferred Fall Protection System (In Priority Order) Guardrail Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Safety Net Guardrail Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Cover - Strong enough to carry 2x the intended load without breaking, warping or flexing. Guardrail Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Guardrail Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Safety Net Controlled Access Zone (CAZ) Guardrail Safety Net Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Guardrail Safety Net Combination of Warning Line System and Guardrail System Combination of Warning Line System and Safety Net Combination of Warning Line System and Personal Fall Arrest System Guardrail System with Toeboards Safety Net System Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Guardrail System Safety Net System Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Fall Protection Plan Guardrail System Safety Net System Personal Fall Arrest System (PFAS) Fall Protection Plan Page 20 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 196 of 389

197 This certificate verifies that Employee Name has successfully completed Fall Protection Training Company Name on Date National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 197 of 389

198 5 Fall Protection Wallet Card THIS IS TO VERIFY THAT HAS SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED TRAINING IN THE USE OF FALL PROTECTION-PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS. 3 COMPANY NAME DATE 4 Page 22 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 198 of 389

199 FALL PROTECTION WRITTEN PROCEDURE The company is dedicated to the protection of employees from potential falls. All employees have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of this program is to: Identify specific fall protection methods for this project where conventional methods pose greater hazards to the individual; Supplement standard safety operating procedures by providing safety requirements specifically designed to cover fall protection on this job, and; Ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the safety provisions which are to be implemented by this program prior to job-start. Program Specifics: Location of Job: Date of Job Start: Program Approved By: Specific Activity: Program Prepared By: Program Supervised By: Fall Protection System(s) to be Used: Approved By: Verification: I hereby acknowledge that I have review this completed Fall Protection Program and agree that the Fall Protection System(s) to be used are appropriate for the activity being conducted. Signed: Title: Date: The below signed individuals working on this job acknowledge that they have been trained in fall protection equipment usage and procedures and have reviewed and agree to comply with the requirements of this Fall Protection Program: Name: Name: Name: Name: Date: Date: Date: Date: Page 23 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 199 of 389

200 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 200 of 389

201 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER FALL PROTECTION (PFAS) Fall Protection (PFAS) Safety Training Includes: Definitions and Hazard Assessment When PFASs are required and Guardrail systems Components of a PFAS and how to wear a PFAS Calculation of Fall Distance Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Special Systems Use (aerial lifts, scissors lifts, etc,) INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 24 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 201 of 389

202 PROGRAM OVERVIEW FIRST AID AND EMERGENCY MEDICAL RESPONSE SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR CFR , INTRODUCTION: This program is designed to assist the company to insure that medical personnel are readily available for emergency response and applies to all company facilities and employees, including any on-site emergency medical response personnel. TRAINING: All employees and supervisors trained on how to summon emergency assistance Where required, employees trained in the use of emergency eyebaths and safety showers Any on-site emergency response teams trained appropriately in skills and bloodborne pathogens First Air training must be obtained from the American Red Cross or Equivalent and must provide completion certificate to management. ACTIVITIES: Determine if on-site first aid or emergency response teams or designated and trained personnel are required (if ambulance or EMT/fire department is more than 3-4 minutes away) Designate, train and equip emergency response personnel, if appropriate Establish agreements with local ambulance or fire/emt services to provide emergency medical response, if appropriate Evaluate potential for injuries and implement hazard controls where possible Write and communicate policies and procedures FORMS: Required only if incident: Exposure Incident Report 50. Purpose 51. Scope 52. Responsibilities 53. Procedure 54. Safety Information 55. Training Information & Requirements 56. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 202 of 389

203 First Aid and Emergency Medical Response Safety Program (Including Industrial Burns) 1. Purpose. This program is designed to provide guidance and information to companies with regard to first-aid and emergency medical response situations. Included in this program is information on the treatment and prevention of industrial burns. 2. Scope. This program applies to all company facilities and employees, including any on-site emergency medical response personnel. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Determine if on-site first aid or emergency response teams or designated and trained personnel are required. If trained emergency medical response (an ambulance or EMT/fire department) is more than 5 minutes from the facility or site, a certified and trained first aid response person is required to be present at the work site for each work shift Designate, train and equip emergency response personnel, if appropriate. Training is at no cost to the employee and is provided at a reasonable time and place whenever possible; OR Establish agreements with local ambulance or fire/emt services to provide emergency medical response, if appropriate Inform employees on how to summon emergency assistance In conjunction with the Safety Officer and/or Human Resources, notify the injured/ill employee s family of the incident, as needed or required. 3.2 Employees: Summon emergency medical assistance, when required Notify management, as soon as possible Notify the Safety Officer or Human Resources as soon as possible after the emergency response personnel have taken charge of the situation. 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): Assist in the development and implementation of this program Verify contents of first aid kits shall be periodically assessed to ensure the availability of adequate first aid supplies, such as weekly or monthly In conjunction with management and/or Human Resources, notify the injured/ill employee s family of the incident. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 203 of 389

204 3.4 On-Site Medical Response Team/Person (as appropriate): 4. Procedure Attend Basic First Aid or EMT training Attend Bloodborne Pathogen training Maintain training Provide basic first aid for injured or ill employees who require assistance Maintain supplies and equipment, as needed, for emergency response. 4.1 Summoning Emergency Response Personnel: Employees must be informed of the proper procedure to summon emergency medical assistance from their work area or job site (e.g. telephoning 911 or another number) It is highly recommended that if summoning assistance is other than dial 911, that the emergency phone number be placed on each telephone to assist employees during an emergency Information should be provided to the emergency service provider on: The nature of the injury/illness, if known The specific location (company address or specific work area) of the injured employee Any other pertinent details of the incident Any procedures or escorts required to enter the facility If possible, remain with the injured or ill employee to provide comfort and support. Designate another employee to meet the emergency response personnel, if appropriate. 4.2 Potential for Industrial Burns: Jobs where there is potential injury from either chemical burns or heat producing equipment that may cause burns to the skin or body must be evaluated and appropriate control measures put into place to protect employees from these hazards Control measures include engineering and design controls to prevent contact (insulating materials or enclosures), administrative controls (procedures, substitution of less hazardous materials or equipment), or personal protective equipment (gloves, clothing, other PPE). National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 204 of 389

205 4.2.2 Training is provided to employees on the heat or chemical hazards of the task or activity, and the first aid procedures for treatment Signs are posted in areas where there is a reasonable likelihood of burn injury from heat producing equipment Signs should read Danger Heat-Hazard Area. Thermal Protective Clothing or Equipment required, or similar language Signs must be in English, although additional languages may be used in addition to English. 4.3 Control Measures for Reducing Heat or Burn Injury: Engineering Controls - should reduce heat levels to the lowest level reasonably achievable Controls include: Placement of shielding or barriers between equipment and employees Isolating heat sources through enclosures Mechanizing or modifying processes or operations Administrative Controls - should be implemented when engineering controls can not reduce heat to the desired level Controls include: Limiting the amount of time workers spend performing the task or activity The use of specialized tools to the extent possible Enforcement of specific written procedures that outline the steps to safely work with the heat producing equipment Protective Equipment - should be implemented after it has been determined that engineering and administrative controls can not reduce heat exposures to the desired levels Protective equipment includes: Heat resistant gloves and clothing Respiratory protection. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 205 of 389

206 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Eyebaths and Safety Showers: Where eyes or body of any person can be exposed to injurious, corrosive or highly hazardous chemicals, or where these chemicals are used or stored in the workplace, facilities for the quick drenching of eyes and the body are required Equipment must meet the requirements of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for Eyebaths and Safety Showers ANSI Z Employees will be trained in the use of emergency eyebaths and safety showers, as needed or required. 5.2 Types of Burns: Correct assessment of a burn s severity is one of the first critical steps in properly treating and managing the injury. Burns are classified both by their depth and amount of body surface area injured. First, second, and third degree burns identify the layers of skin damaged while the terms minor, moderate and critical describe both the depth and extent of the tissue injured First-degree burns. These are burns involving only the outer layers of the epidermis. Characterized by redness, itching, and burning, these burns are generally considered minor and don t require the attention of a physician. Mild sunburns are typical firstdegree burns Second-degree burns. These are burns that damage both the epidermis and the dermis (second layer of skin). These burns cause blisters and are prone to infection, often requiring medical attention. Second-degree burns are also sub-classified as superficial or deep dermal depending on the extent of injury. Burns are also described by their cause, such as thermal, chemical, electrical, radiation, and flash Third-degree burns. These are burns that destroy both the epidermis and the dermis. These burns are distinguished by their dry surface and pearly white or charred appearance. Third-degree burn patients often experience no pain following their injury because nerve endings are impaired. Third-degree burns always require the attention of a hospital burn center Thermal (heat burns). These are burns that are caused by contact with substances at temperatures above the boiling point of water. These burns often occur in conjunction with other types of burns Chemical burns. These are burns that are caused by contact with materials such as sodium hydroxide, phenol, sulfuric or hydrochloric acid. These corrosive substances generate heat, creating a thermal burn in addition to a chemical burn. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 206 of 389

207 6. Training and Information Electrical burns. These are burns that are common among gas and electrical workers and are also considered thermal burns because heat is created while the current passes through the body. These burns are more treacherous than they first appear because the body conducts the electrical current to the heart, muscular and vascular system causing extensive internal damage. Because they may be electrocuted themselves, bystanders are strongly cautioned against touching these types of burn victims until the electrical source has been removed Sun-burns. These are the most common type of radiation burns. Other sources of ultraviolet or nuclear radiation can also cause burns Flash-burns. These are burns that are usually minor cornea injuries, the consequences of looking directly into an extremely bright light. Welders and those working with highpowered electrical equipment often experience this syndrome. Flash burn symptoms include watery eyes, searing pain and photophobia (a marked sensitivity to light), occurring four to six hours following the injury. Although flash burns are regarded as more of an annoyance than a serious injury, prolonged exposure to a powerful light source without protective eyewear can result in permanent blindness. 6.1 Employees will be trained in: How to summon emergency medical assistance The use of emergency eyebaths and safety showers, as needed or required The use of personal protective equipment and other controls required to reduce heat exposure levels The basic first aid treatment of the various types of burns if they work with heat exposure hazards, as needed or required. 6.2 On-site emergency response personnel will be trained (and certified) in basic first aid or EMT level response, and annually in the requirements of the Bloodborne pathogens standard. Certifications must be maintained appropriately. 7. Definitions. EMT Emergency Medical Technician. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 207 of 389

208 FIRST AID KIT SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Based on the number of employees the following items should be available in First Aid Kits located at the job site. (Kits are required for California Construction sites) First Aid Kit Required Supplies: 1-5 Employees 6-15 Employees Employees Over 200 Employees Adhesive dressings X X X X Adhesive tape rolls, 1-inch wide X X X X Eye dressing packet X X X X 1-inch gauze bandage roll or compress X X X X 2-inch gauze bandage roll or compress X X X X 4-inch gauze bandage roll or compress X X X X 2-inch square sterile gauze pads X X X X 4-inch square sterile gauze pads X X X X Sterile surgical pads suitable for pressure dressings X X Triangular bandages X X X X Safety pins X X X X Tweezers and scissors X X X X *Additional equipment to be readily available, but not necessarily in First Aid Kit: Cotton-tipped applicators X X Forceps X X Emesis basin X X Flashlight X X Magnifying glass X X Portable oxygen and its related breathing equipment Tongue depressors Appropriate Record Forms X X X X Up-to-date First Aid Textbook, Manual, or Equivalent X X X X X X Page 3 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 208 of 389

209 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER FIRST AID BASICS First Aid (Basics) Training Includes: General Requirements First Aid Kit Content Treating lacerations, abrasions, contusions, sprains and strains Treating amputations, broken bones, Treating shock, eye injuries, head injuries, back pain Treating heat or cold injury and burns INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed. Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 4 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 209 of 389

210 PROGRAM OVERVIEW GENERAL SAFETY AWARENESS PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA General Duty Clause INTRODUCTION: This program assists in establishing clear company goals and objectives for safety. It provides for the identification, evaluation and mitigation of safety hazards. It establishes employee training requirements and details general work rules, recordkeeping, emergency evacuation planning, audits and inspections and records retention. TRAINING: Recommended training for an overview of workplace hazards. ACTIVITIES: Ensure the workplace is maintained free of a hazard to which employees of the employer were exposed Inspect the workplace for hazards that are likely to cause death or serious physical harm Ensure processes are in place to correct hazards FORMS: General Safety Rules New Employee Safety Orientation Training Training Attendance Roster Verification for Supply Requirements for First Aid Kits 29. Purpose 30. Scope 31. Responsibilities 32. Procedure 33. Safety Information 34. Training and Information 35. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 210 of 389

211 General Safety Awareness Program 1. Purpose. This document provides a written general safety program for the company. This program is designed to establish clear company goals and objectives and will be communicated to all employees. 2. Scope. Applies to all employees at company facilities and sites. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Area Management will: Identify and evaluate any safety hazards Prioritize and address safety hazards based on risk level Provide reasonable solutions to reduce or eliminate recognized safety hazards Enforce federal, state and company safety rules and regulations in the workplace. 3.2 Employees will: Report safety concerns and hazards to your Supervisor Participate in the resolution of the recognized safety hazards, as needed or required Conduct their work activities in a safe manner Abide by all the safety rules and regulation established by the company Assist in maintaining their work area in a clean and neat condition. 3.3 Safety Representative must (as needed): 4. Procedure Provide assistance to management in the resolution of recognized safety hazards. 4.1 General Work Rules: General Duty Clause OSHA s general duty clause states that companies must provide a place of employment that is free from recognized hazards Each employee is responsible to comply with the standards and regulations that are applicable to their work activities. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 211 of 389

212 4.1.2 Housekeeping Every safety management program includes standards for general housekeeping. Housekeeping ensures that materials and contaminants do not accumulate and cause hazards to employee safety and health Workplaces will be cleaned on a regular basis Restrooms will be kept in a sanitary condition Materials will be stored in designated areas and not allowed to accumulate in places where employee safety could be at risk (i.e. aisles, corridors, stairwells, near exits, around machinery or equipment where employees work, etc.) Tools and equipment will be stored in their appropriate places Chemicals will be handled according to their instructions. Spills or leaks will be cleaned up immediately and prevented from reoccurring Protective equipment will be used, as needed or required. 4.2 Written Standard Operating Procedures: Job Hazard Analysis (Identifying Hazards) - Each job task will be reviewed for safety hazards. Recognized safety hazards will be prioritized and addressed based on their risk level Written Procedures Develop written procedures outlining the steps to take to reduce or eliminate recognized safety hazards. These procedures must identify when the use of personal protective equipment (PPE) is necessary All companies must have: Emergency Evacuation and Fire Prevention Programs (written if >10 employees) Hazard Communication Program in workplaces where chemicals are used or stored Written procedures are required if there are exposures to: Blood or bloodborne pathogens Hazardous chemical exposures Confined spaces National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 212 of 389

213 Control of hazardous energy (Lock-out/Tag-Out) Live electrical energy (>50 volts) Noise levels >85 dba Laboratories Forklifts PPE required activities Physical hazards Radiation Respiratory hazards Shipping and handling of hazardous materials Lasers (>Class 2) 4.3 Recordkeeping (Accident and Incident Investigation and Reporting): Incidents are work-related activities that cause concern for the health or safety of employees. All accidents and injuries (and work-related illnesses) are considered incidents Reporting of incidents is required for many companies. Specific information about incidents must be identified and recorded on specific OSHA forms Investigation may be required to determine some information that is required to be reported Exemptions from Recordkeeping exist for some industries in general and for employers with fewer than 10 employees. For a full listing of exempted industries, see the OSHA website at or reference the listing in the OSHA Recordkeeping Exemption Listing form associated with this program. 4.4 Emergency Evacuation Planning: All companies must have a program for emergency evacuation of their employees Companies with more than 10 employees must have this information in writing Companies should post their evacuation routes to assist employees and others during an evacuation situation. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 213 of 389

214 4.4.4 A review of the emergency action program must occur for every employee when the program is developed, upon initial assignment or new hire, when the employee s responsibilities under the program change and whenever the program is changed Any employees that have specific duties and requirements under the program (i.e. assisting others, locking sensitive information, area searchers or wardens, etc.) must be specifically trained in their duties and responsibilities. 4.5 Hazard Communication: Every employee exposed or potentially exposed to hazardous chemicals in the workplace must be trained and informed of the hazards of those chemicals and the measures to be used to protect themselves from exposure. This training must occur initially and whenever changes to hazards in the workplace occur Material Safety Data Sheets are required for all hazardous chemicals or mixtures used or stored in the workplace A hazardous chemical inventory list must be maintained at the workplace (either one master listing or individual area listings) that list the hazardous materials by name (as it appears on the MSDS) the manufacturer s name and phone number and any common names that the company may call the product (if they are different than the MSDS name) A written program must be present in the workplace describing how the requirements of the regulation are implemented All hazardous chemicals must have labels indicating the name, manufacturer and hazards of the hazardous components of the product. 4.6 Electrical Safety Any exposure greater than 50 volts requires electrical safety training and information be provided to employees. Employees with such exposure require the knowledge to understand the magnitude of the hazard they are exposed to and the measures needed to prevent injury from such exposure All electrical installations and equipment must meet the installation and maintenance requirements under the National Electrical Code. 4.7 Audits and Inspections: Companies must ensure that electrical service panel boxes and equipment shutoffs are clear and unobstructed at all times for use during an emergency Electrical service panel boxes must have covers and those covers must remain in the closed position when the panel is not being accessed Electrical sources and outlets within 3 feet of any water source (such as a sink or drinking fountain) must be GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt) protected Safety audits are formal reviews of employee activities, workplace processes and systems, and documentation. Audits normally use pre-established or written protocols or inspection reports to assure that the written procedures and process flows indicate what the employees are supposed to do, and that employees are following the procedures as written. Audits will normally have a final written summary report of the non-conformances that is presented to management. Each finding or non-conformance will have corrective actions assigned by management to correct the deficiency in the system Inspections are informal reviews of employee activities, workplace processes, systems and documentation. Inspections may use pre-established written checklists, or may be even less-formal. The checklists are normally in a yes/no format that indicates whether or not the activity or process is National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 214 of 389

215 compliant with what is required. Inspection findings are generally discussed with area supervisors or management, and the retention of the checklist (to assure that the items have been corrected before the next inspection) is normally the only documentation maintained Some regulations require that procedures or activities be inspected, and that the inspection documentation be retained for a specified period of time. However, inspection reports are generally kept only until all action items are addressed or they are superseded by subsequent inspection reports. 4.8 Communications: Employees are encouraged to voice concerns and suggestions to their supervisors or to the Safety Officer. These communications can be verbal or written Management will provide employee training as the need arises or regulations require. 4.9 Safety Committee: Some states require safety committees if companies have more than 20 employees. It is generally recommended that any company with more than 20 employees establish a safety committee Committees should meet at least quarterly and be comprised of at least 3 employees. A member of management and/or the safety officer may serve as additional members of the committee. The committee chairperson should not be a member of management or the company Safety Officer Safety committees should discuss safety concerns at the company. They may be charged with performing area inspections, injury report reviews and investigations, training, or other safety-related duties that are appropriate to the business needs of the company. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 215 of 389

216 4.10 Records Retention: Training Records are maintained until they are superseded by new training Audit Reports are kept for 5 years or until all findings are corrected, whichever is longer Inspection Reports are kept until all findings are corrected, the reports are superceded by new reports, or for a duration specified by a specific regulation, whichever is longer OSHA 300 logs and associated Injury and Illness Records are kept for 5 years Certain hazardous chemical exposure records (e.g. cancer causing agents, benzene, asbestos, and mercury) and biological exposure records (e.g. needle stick injuries of contaminated blood or body fluids) are kept for the duration of employment plus 30 years Other safety records are generally kept only until the actions that are required to be taken are complete. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Ventilation General building ventilation systems are usually adequate to remove particulate matter and circulate fresh air throughout the building. Ventilation concerns are generally caused by: faulty filters in fresh air ducts corridors leading from outside areas (where dust and particulate matter can be drawn into the building) enclosed rooms where several printers or copiers are located in a small space (due to paper dust and/or toner dust being generated). 5.2 Lighting. The role of proper lighting is to provide a safe, comfortable and efficient visual environment. The following safe lighting criteria will be used to evaluate lighting conditions in office areas Bare light sources will not be placed in the visual working field of any employee. Light sources will be properly shielded in these instances The luminance and reflectance of surfaces of furnishings, shades, louvers, acoustic screens, will be considered to reduce their reflectance Windows will be covered where appropriate Wall surface colors and degree of reflectance will be appropriate to the work area Furniture should be arranged so that the luminaire is beside rather than in front of the operator. Light will then be directed across the work surface rather than into the worker's eyes. 5.3 Eye Strain. Adjusting the screen for the minimum amount of glare and best contrast will reduce the amount of eyestrain our employees experience Monitor/VDT problems. Correct placement of the VDT can relieve stress on the neck and shoulders. Adjust the monitor so screens can be read with the head up and facing forward (at about eye level). Employees with bifocals should be able to read without tilting their head. Distance is key in that employees should not have to move to focus Glare and contrast. The two major sources of eye strain from working with a VDT are glare and poor contrast. Most offices have diffused overhead lighting to reduce screen glare, but glare from windows or other light sources, like lamps, should be shielded. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 216 of 389

217 Blinds can be closed to reduce light glare. Desks and work areas can be repositioned to reduce glare, or the brightness and contrast controls on a VDT can be adjusted Minimizing Eye Strain. Reading from a VDT for hours at a time can be very hard on the eyes. The characters on a VDT screen are not as sharp as print on paper--they are almost always a little bit fuzzy. They are also always moving, and even though they may not move enough to notice, they move enough to make focusing difficult. Employees should be encouraged to take micro breaks or switch to other non-computer based tasks to reduce eye strain Supervisor involvement. Encourage employees to have their eyes examined annually--more often if they are having vision problems or if their eyes feel tired at the end of the day. Even when VDT work does not cause a vision problem, the strain of reading from a monitor for long periods will make it difficult for employees to continue ignoring uncorrected or undercorrected vision problems they might already have. 5.4 Ergonomic Improvements. Ergonomic improvements can dramatically improve worker safety and productivity. Employees are most likely to work efficiently and accurately when they do not have to strain. Supervisors should be given adequate training in recognition and control of ergonomic improvements Problem recognition. Supervisors should know the symptoms of Cumulative Trauma Disorders (CTD) and recognize when the stress involved in a particular job has the potential for contributing to a CTD. Make sure employees are working in the best way possible Cumulative trauma disorders. The most common CTDs are Tendinitis (inflammation of a tendon, usually at the wrist or elbow), Carpal Tunnel Syndrome (CTS) (caused by pressure on the nerve in the wrist) symptoms include numbness, difficulty holding objects and restricted movement), and lower back problems (strains caused improper lifting, or improper seating or poor work station design). National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 217 of 389

218 5.4.3 Data entry. Data entry is probably the biggest contributor to CTS. With the fingers resting on the home keys of the keyboard, and shoulders relaxed, the employee's wrists and forearms should be in a straight line and more or less parallel to the floor. Surface or chair height adjustments may help (so employees type or write with body erect with feet flat on the floor The edge of the seat should not contact the back of the knees. Arm rests and keyboard wrist rests can be provided to relieve the pressure on the upper body. Footrests can assist in relieving strain on the back. Keyboard placement or copy stands, and telephone headsets may improve working postures. Back supports or lumbar supports on chairs can help prevent strain. Repetitive force and lifting can be minimized to prevent injury, or frequent breaks can be offered. Employees should be encouraged to take stretch breaks even if only for a minute or two Supervisor involvement. Make changes slowly, one at a time, and follow up on the effects. Observation and open communication with employees are our two most valuable tools for reducing the risks of ergonomic disorders in the workplace. If an employee has symptoms of a CTD, encourage him or her to get medical attention and work with the employee to find out if changes should be made in the job design. 5.4 Disciplinary Actions for Willful Unsafe Acts. Employees who willfully endanger themselves or the safety of their co-workers will be subject to the disciplinary action procedures stipulated by company policy or the Employee Handbook. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 Employee Orientation and General Safety Training: All new employees will be provided with a general safety orientation upon initial assignment. This orientation will include: A review of the employee responsibilities with regard to workplace safety and an overview of the general safety workplace rules The hazards that may be encountered in the workplace The process for reporting hazards, accidents, injuries and near-misses It is additionally recommended that the orientation include information on office safety and ergonomics Employees who transfer or change jobs within the company will be provided with work area specific training in the hazards they may encounter. 7. Definitions. MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. CTD - Cumulative Trauma Disorder is a medical condition caused by repetitive forces or motion. CTS - Carpal Tunnel Syndrome is a medical disease that affects the nerves in the wrist. VDT - Visual Display Terminals like computer monitoring equipment. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 218 of 389

219 GENERAL SAFETY RULES FOR ALL DEPARTMENTS The company establishes the following safety rules as General Safety Rules for all departments/sections: Never operate any machine or equipment unless you are authorized and trained to do so. Obtain full instructions and training from your Supervisor before operating an unfamiliar machine. Do not operate defective equipment or broken hand tools. Report them to your Supervisor immediately. Frayed or damaged electrical cords should be replaced. Never start on any hazardous job without being completely familiar with the safety techniques that apply to it. Check with your Supervisor if in doubt. Make sure all safety attachments are in place and properly adjusted before operating any machine. Do not operate any machine or equipment at unsafe speeds. Shut off equipment that is not in use. Wear all protective garments and equipment necessary to be safe on the job. Wear proper shoes; sandals or other open-toed or thin-soled shoes should not be worn. Do not wear loose, flowing clothing or long hair while operating moving machinery. Never repair or adjust any machine or equipment unless you are specifically authorized to do so by your Supervisor or specifically trained to do so. Never oil, clean, repair, or adjust any machine while it is in motion. Never repair or adjust any electrically driven machine without specific Lock-Out/Tag-Out training. Put tools and equipment away when they are not in use. Do not lift items that are too bulky or too heavy to be handled by one person. Ask for assistance. Keep all aisles, stairways, and exits clear of materials, storage, equipment, and spillage. Do not place equipment and materials so as to block emergency exit routes, fireboxes, sprinkler shutoffs, machine or electrical control panels, or fire extinguishers. Stack all materials neatly and make sure piles are stable. Keep your work area, machinery and all company facilities that you use clean and neat. Do not participate in horseplay, or tease or otherwise distract fellow workers. Do not run on company premises - always walk. Power-truck operators must be properly trained and licensed to operate the vehicle. Filing cabinets, desks, storage cabinets, and other storage devices should have drawers closed when not in use to prevent tripping hazards. Extension cords are temporary measures only and should not replace permanent wiring. Cords should be placed so that they are flush to the ground and do not present a tripping hazard and be inspected on a monthly basis. Electrical outlets should be properly used and never overloaded and inspected on a monthly basis. Burned out light bulbs should be replaced immediately. Never take chances. If you're unsure, you re unsafe! National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 219 of 389

220 Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 220 of 389

221 NEW EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION TRAINING LIST Employee s Name: Date assigned: Department: Job Title: Supervisor s Name: Date of Review: Signature: Instructions to Supervisor: Check all boxes that apply. Review the duty requirements of the new employee and select the safety topics that the employee must be trained on. SAFETY TOPIC Accident Reporting Procedures Back Safety Bloodborne Pathogens Exposure Burn Safety Chemical Safety Awareness Compressed Gas Safety Confined Spaces Awareness Crane and Sling Safety Disciplinary Actions for Unsafe Acts Electrical Safety Awareness Emergency Action Plan Eye and Face Protection Fall Protection Awareness Fire Extinguisher Fire Prevention Flammable/Combustible Liquids Food/Beverage Consumption on Duty Forklift Safety Awareness Hand & Power Tool Safety Hazard Communication Hazard Markings Hazard Signage Hearing Conservation Heat Stress Issues Housekeeping Requirements Job Hazard Analysis Awareness Lock Out Tag Out Awareness Machine Guarding Awareness New Products Safety OSHA Recordkeeping Personal Protective Equipment Respiratory Protection Restricted Areas Slips, Trips, and Falls Safety Smoking Restrictions Spill Prevention and Control Violent Acts EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE DATE TRAINER National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 221 of 389

222 Waste Disposal Procedures Welding Safety Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 222 of 389

223 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER GENERAL SAFETY Topic: INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 223 of 389

224 HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOL GUARDING AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Portable Circular Saws Power Abrasive Wheel Tools Vertical Portable Grinders Portable Belt Sanding Machines Pneumatic Power Tools and Hoses Explosive Actuated Fastening Tools Power Lawn Mowers Jacks Table Of Contents Portable Circular Saws o All portable, power-driven circular saws having a blade diameter greater than 2 in. will be equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. o The upper guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. (Does not apply to circular saws used in the meat industry for meat cutting purposes). o For authorized use the following conditions must be met. An upper guard must cover the entire blade of the saw. A retractable lower guard must cover the teeth of the saw. Except when it makes contact with the work material, the lower guard must automatically return to the covering position when the tool is withdrawn from the work. Power Abrasive Wheel Tools o Abrasive wheels shall be used only on tools/equipment provided with safety guards. (A safety guard is an enclosure designed to restrain the pieces of the grinding wheel and furnish all possible protection in the event that the wheel is broken in operation.) Exceptions. These requirements do not apply to the following classes of wheels and conditions: Wheels used for internal work while within the work being ground. Mounted wheels used in portable operations 2 inches and smaller in diameter. Mounted wheels, usually 2 inch diameter or smaller, and of various shapes, may be either organic or inorganic bonded abrasive wheels. They are secured to plain or threaded steel mandrels. (Organic wheels are wheels which are bonded by means of an organic material such as resin, rubber, shellac, or other similar bonding agent.) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19 cones, and plugs, and threaded-hole pot balls where the work offers protection. o Guard covers. Employees will ensure that a safety guard covers the spindle end, nut, and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to maintain proper alignment with the wheel and the strength of the fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard. Exception. Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a suitable measure of protection to the operator may be so constructed that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed. Where the nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel, the side covers of the guard may be omitted. Exception. The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on portable machines designed for and used with type 6, 11, 27, and 28 abrasive wheels, cutting off wheels, and tuck pointing wheels. (Tuck pointing wheels, usually Type 1, are reinforced organic bonded wheels which have diameter, thickness and hole size dimension. They are subject to the same limitations of use and mounting as Type 1 wheels. Limitation: Wheels used for tuck pointing should be reinforced, organic bonded. Tuck pointing is the removal, by grinding, of cement, mortar, or other nonmetallic jointing material. The term reinforced as applied to grinding wheels shall define a class of organic wheels which contain strengthening fabric or filament. The term reinforced does not cover wheels using such mechanical additions as steel rings, steel cup backs or wire or tape winding.) Type 1 straight wheels have diameter, thickness, and hole size dimensions and should be used only on the periphery. Type 1 wheels shall be mounted between flanges. Limitation: Hole dimension (H) should not be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical, centerless, or surface grinding applications. Maximum hole size for all other applications should not exceed National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 224 of 389

225 one-half wheel diameter. Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 225 of 389

226 o Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types 6 and 11) shall be protected by: Safety guards as specified. Special "revolving cup guards" which mount behind the wheel and turn with it. They shall be made of steel or other material with adequate strength and shall enclose the wheel sides upward from the back for one-third of the wheel thickness. The mounting features shall conform to all regulations. It is necessary to maintain clearance between the wheel side and the guard. The clearance shall not exceed one-sixteenth. Type 6 cup wheels have specific diameter, thickness, hole-sizes, rim thickness, and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Limitation: Minimum back thickness, E dimension, should not be less than one-fourth T dimension. In addition, when unthreaded hole-wheels are specified, the inside flat, K dimension, must be large enough to accommodate a suitable flange. Type 11 flaring cup wheels have double diameter dimensions D and J, and in addition have thickness, hole size, rim and back thickness dimensions. Grinding is always performed on rim face, W dimension. Type 11 wheels are subject to all limitations of use and mounting listed for Type 6 straight sided cup wheels definition o General safety precautions. Before being mounted it should be inspected closely and sound- or ring- tested to be sure that it is free from cracks or defects. To test, wheels should be tapped gently with a light non-metallic instrument. If they sound cracked or dead they could fly apart in operation and so must not be used. A sound and undamaged wheel will give a clear metallic tone or ring. Employees will not locate themselves directly in front of the wheel as it accelerates to full operating speed. Employees will always use eye protection. Power will be turned off when not in use. Hand held grinders are never placed in vises. Mounting and inspection of abrasive wheels. Immediately before mounting, all wheels shall be closely inspected and sounded by the user using the ring test to make sure they have not been damaged in transit, storage, or otherwise. The spindle speed of the machine shall be checked before mounting of the wheel to be certain that it does not exceed the maximum operating speed marked on the wheel. Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and remain free under all grinding conditions. A controlled clearance between the wheel hole and the machine spindle (or wheel sleeves or adaptors) is essential to avoid excessive pressure from mounting and spindle expansion. To accomplish this, the machine spindle shall be made to nominal (standard) size plus zero minus.002 inch, and the wheel hole shall be made suitably oversize to assure safety clearance under the conditions of operating heat and pressure. All contact surfaces of wheels, blotters, and flanges shall be flat and free of foreign matter. When a bushing is used in the wheel hole it shall not exceed the width of the wheel and shall not contact the flanges. Excluded machinery. Natural sandstone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, or paper discs having a layer of abrasive on the surface are not covered by these requirements. Vertical Portable Grinders o Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. Safety guards used on machines known as right angle head or vertical portable grinders shall have a maximum exposure angle of 180 and the guard shall be located between the operator and the wheel during use. Adjustment of guard shall be such that pieces of an accidentally broken wheel will be deflected away from the operator. (See 29 CFR , Figure P-4.) o Other portable grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on other portable grinding machines shall not exceed 180 and the top half of the wheel shall be enclosed at all times. o Portable grinding is a grinding operation where the grinding machine is designed to be hand held and may be easily moved from one location to another. Portable Belt Sanding Machines o Supervisors will ensure that all belt sanding machines used by their personnel be provided with guards at each nip point where the sanding belt runs onto a pulley. These guards will effectively prevent the hands or fingers of the operator from coming in contact with the nip points. The unused run of the sanding belt shall be guarded against accidental contact. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 226 of 389

227 Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 227 of 389

228 Pneumatic Power Tools and Hoses o Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. Prior to use the following requirements will be complied with: o Tool retainer. A tool retainer will be installed on each piece of utilization equipment which, without such a retainer, may eject the tool. o Air-hoses. Hose and hose connections used for conducting compressed air to utilization equipment will be compatible with the pressure and service to which they are subjected. Explosive Actuated Fastening Tools o General safety precautions: Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. Operators and assistants using tools shall be safeguarded by wearing eye protection. Head and face protection shall be used as required by working conditions. Before using a tool, the employee will inspect it to determine to his satisfaction that it is clean, that all moving parts operate freely, and that the barrel is free from obstructions. When a tool develops a defect during use, the operator shall immediately cease to use it until it is properly repaired. Tools will not be loaded until just prior to the intended firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any workmen. No tools shall be loaded unless being prepared for immediate use and will not be left unattended. Misfire instructions (general). o Know the manufacturers instructions. o Hold the tool in the operating position for at least 30 seconds. o Try to operate the tool a second time. o Wait another 30 seconds, holding the tool in the operating position; then proceed to remove the explosive load in strict accordance with the manufacturer instructions. A tool will never be left unattended in a place where it would be available to unauthorized persons. Fasteners will not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including but not limited to cast iron, glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow tile. Driving into materials easily penetrated will be avoided unless such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying-missile hazard on the other side. Low-velocity tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR will be used. Employees contemplating purchase of low-velocity tools will consult the OSHA Regulatory Standard before final tool selection. The manufacturer s inspection criteria will be followed for pre-use inspection. Low-velocity piston type tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR will be used. Employees contemplating purchase of low-velocity piston type tools will consult the OSHA Regulatory Standard before final tool selection. The manufacturer s inspection criteria will be followed for pre-use inspection. o A low-velocity piston tool is a tool that utilizes a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface. It will not cause such stud, pin, or fastener to have a mean velocity in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel. o Fasteners will not be driven directly into materials such as brick or concrete closer than 3 inches from the unsupported edge or corner or into steel surfaces closer than one-half inch from the unsupported edge or corner, unless a special guard, fixture, or jig is used. (Exception: Low-velocity tools may drive no closer than 2 inches from an edge in concrete or one-fourth inch in steel.) o When fastening other materials, such as a 2X4 inch wood section to a concrete surface, it is permissible to drive a fastener of no greater than 7/32 inch shank diameter not closer than 2 inches from the unsupported edge or corner of the work surface. o Fasteners will not be driven through existing holes without positive guides for accurate alignment. o No fastener will be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory fastening. o Tools will not be used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere. o All tools will be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the manufacturer. Protective shields or guards are devices or guards attached to the muzzle end of the tool, which is designed to confine flying particles o Any tool found not in proper working order will be immediately removed from service and turned over to the job site supervisor for repair in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 228 of 389

229 High-velocity tools. Only tools meeting the design specifications of 29 CFR will be used. Employees contemplating purchase of high-velocity tools will consult the OSHA Regulatory Standard before final tool selection. The manufacturer s inspection criteria will be followed for pre-use inspection. High-velocity tools are tools or machines which, when used with a load, propels or discharges a stud, pin, or fastener, at velocities in excess of 300 feet per second when measured 6.5 feet from the muzzle end of the barrel, for the purpose of impinging it upon, affixing it to, or penetrating another object or material. (A stud, pin, or fastener is a fastening device specifically designed and manufactured for use in explosive-actuated fastening tools.) A hammer-operated piston tool--low-velocity type, is a tool which, by means of a heavy mass hammer supplemented by a load, moves a piston designed to be captive to drive a stud, pin, or fastener into a work surface, always starting the fastener at rest and in contact with the work surface. Power Lawnmowers o Supervisors will ensure all employees are thoroughly familiar with and use strict work practices in accordance with the manufacturer instructions. General requirements: o Power lawnmowers will have power-driven chains, belts, and gears so positioned or otherwise guarded to prevent the operator's accidental contact therewith during normal starting, mounting, and operation of the machine. o A shutoff device will be provided to stop operation of the motor or engine. This device will require manual and intentional reactivation to restart the motor or engine. o All positions of the operating controls will be clearly identified. o The words "Caution. Be sure the operating control(s) is in neutral before starting the engine" shall be clearly visible at an engine starting control point on self-propelled mowers. o The mower blade will be enclosed except on the bottom and the enclosure shall extend to or below the lowest cutting point of the blade in the lowest blade position. Guards which must be removed to install a catcher assembly will be affixed to the mower near the opening stating that the mower will not be used without either the catcher assembly or the guard in place. The word "Caution" (or stronger wording) will be placed on the mower at or near each discharge opening. Proper precautions will be taken when refueling mowing equipment. Mowing equipment will never be left unattended while running. Will constantly be mindful of persons working near the operation of the mower. Jacks o Jack. A jack is an appliance for lifting and lowering or moving horizontally a load by application of a pushing force. Jacks may be either lever and ratchet or screw and hydraulic types. o The operator will make sure that the jack used has a rating sufficient to lift and sustain the load. The rating of a jack is the maximum working load for which it is designed to lift safely that load throughout its specified amount of travel. To raise the rated load of a jack, the point of application of the load, the applied force, and the length of lever arm should be those designated by the manufacturer for the particular jack considered. o The rated load will be legibly and permanently marked in a prominent location on the jack by casting, stamping, or other suitable means. o In the absence of a firm foundation the base of the jack will be blocked. If there is a possibility of slippage of the cap, a block shall be placed in between the cap and the load. o The operator will watch the stop indicator, which shall be kept clean, in order to determine the limit of travel. The indicated limit will never be overrun. o After the load has been raised, it will be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once. o Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be supplied with adequate antifreeze liquid. o All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals. Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 229 of 389

230 HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOL PROGRAM ASSESSMENT Unit Assessed: Assessor: Date: Description of Requirement Compliant? Purchase of Tools Are all electrical tools been listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as Underwriters Laboratory (UL)? Are all tools company owned or leased (no personally owned tools)? Yes No Are modifications made to tools required to be inspected by a qualified person to assure the modifications meet existing electrical standards? Yes Yes No No Tool Inspection Are procedures are in place to conduct visual inspections of tools prior to use? If testing is required (e.g., GFCI testing before each use), are procedures in place to ensure compliance? Safe Work Practices Yes Yes No No Do employees understand and follow manufacturer's instructions? Yes No Are tools routinely inspected prior to use? Yes No Do employees use the tools only for the purpose for which they were designed and intended? Are ergonomically designed tools (for repetitive tasks and for those jobs for which a job hazard analysis or ergonomic assessment indicates a need for such tools) made available, as appropriate? Do employees understand that unsafe behavior while using tools shall result in corrective action (e.g., retraining, disciplinary action)? Are employees fully aware of the hazards associated with the particular tool and task before a job is started? Are tools producing 100 db (A) of noise labeled with a "Hearing Protection Required" sticker? Are adjusting keys and wrenches removed before connecting to the power supply? Yes No Are users of power tools appropriately dressed for the job (i.e. no loose clothing/jewelry, long hair is confined, gloves and other PPE are worn as appropriate)? Are tools (pliers, rakes, or hooks) used to pull or dislodge chips or turning from tools or parts (not fingers)? Are air powered tools hooked up only to lines supplied for the purpose (i.e. not compressed gas lines)? Are tools carried in a way that prevents the starting trigger or button from being accidentally actuated? Are appropriate precautions utilized when tools are used in a wet location (i.e. GFCI and appropriate gloves and other PPE)? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 230 of 389

231 Description of Requirement Compliant? Are tools disconnected when not in use? Yes No Are all tools disconnected from the power source prior to lubricating, cleaning, or adjustment? Are the manufacturer's instructions for lubricating, changing accessories, and inspection followed? Maintenance and Repair Is a maintenance program is in place to identify and repair defective or unsafe tools? Yes No Are repairs to portable electrical tools only made by an authorized manufacturer's tool service/repair group or by the approved company tool repair service? Are tools that are damaged or defective removed from service? Yes No Training Is training conducted (as part of an apprenticeship program or other Company recognized training forums)? Can employees who indicate they have had prior training demonstrate understanding and capabilities prior to being assigned to work? Are manufacturer's instructions retained for training/reference purposes? Yes No Specialized Applications Are hand and power tools that may generate sparks or high temperatures prohibited from use in areas that are hazardous due to the presence of flammable or combustible materials? In hazardous locations, is the use of non-sparking tools required (unless monitoring ensures levels below 25% of the lower explosive limit (LEL))? Has training in the use of a powder-actuated tools been provided by the manufacturer? Yes No For such powder-actuated tools, is a license issued after training? Yes No Do individuals using powder-actuated tools have the license on their person when using the tool? Is a record of powder-actuated tool training kept in personnel files (or equivalent recordkeeping system)? Electrical Applications and Safeguards Is either Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Protection or an Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program provided for all 120V (or greater) powered tools? Are adapters that interrupt the continuity of the equipment-grounding conductor prohibited (e.g., 3-wire to 2-wire adapter)? Do double-insulated tools require GFCI protection (they do not require an equipmentgrounding conductor (3rd wire) in the cord)? Are power cords or hoses kept in good operating condition and not abused during use (i.e. yanked for disconnect, protected from heat, oil and sharp edges)? Are cords and hoses routed in such a manner as to not create a tripping hazard? Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 231 of 389

232 PROGRAM OVERVIEW HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR CFR INTRODUCTION: Tools can present a variety of hazards including cuts, lacerations, blindness from flying particles, and serious contusions if caught in rotating parts or nip points. Tools must be inspected and, when required, employees trained in the proper use, inspection and maintenance of the tools and their guarding systems. Personal protective equipment (such as safety glasses or gloves) may frequently be required, even if guarding systems are in place. TRAINING: Training is recommended for power tool use Training and licensing is required for tools that use explosive charges (powder-actuated) ACTIVITIES: Inspect tools before use to ensure they are in good operating condition. Look for items such as housing integrity, complete insulation on cord systems, and that grounding pins have not been removed from plug-sets. FORMS: Guarding and Safety Requirements Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster 57. Purpose 58. Scope 59. Responsibilities 60. Procedure 61. Safety Information 62. Training Information & Requirements 63. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 232 of 389

233 Hand and Portable Power Tools 1. Purpose. The company requires that hand and portable power tools be purchased, maintained, and used only by qualified personnel who understand the limitations and requirements for the safe use of such tools. This safety program will be reviewed and evaluated: 1.1 On an annual basis or more frequently as needed. 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR that prompt revision of this document. 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. 2. Scope. Applies to all locations where portable hand and power tools are used or maintained. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management/Supervisors: Purchase only those electrical tools that have been listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as Underwriter s Laboratory (UL) Ensure that procedures are in place to conduct visual inspections of tools prior to use If testing is required (e.g., GFCI testing before each use) procedures will be in place to ensure compliance Ensure that employees using tools understand and follow manufacturer's instructions, routinely inspect tools, and use them only for the purpose for which they were designed Be aware of and make available, as appropriate, ergonomically designed tools for repetitive tasks and for those jobs for which a job hazard analysis or ergonomic assessment indicates a need for such tools Ensure that a maintenance program is in place to identify and repair defective or unsafe tools. Repairs to portable electrical tools may only be made by an authorized manufacturer's tool service/repair group or by the approved company sources Training may be conducted as part of an apprenticeship program or in other recognized training forums Employees who indicate they have had prior training will be required to demonstrate understanding and capabilities prior to being assigned to work Retain manufacturer's instructions for training/reference purposes Ensure that periodic assessments and inspections of tools and tool use are performed. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 233 of 389

234 3.2 Employees: Use only company provided or approved tools. Tools brought from home must have prior permission from the company and may be subject to inspection Attend training, as needed or required, for tool use Report incidents, accidents or signs and symptoms of injury to your supervisor. 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of this program. 4.1 General Requirements: No one will use an unsafe/defective tool. Tools that are damaged or defective will be removed from service Hand and power tools that may generate sparks or high temperatures will not be used in areas that are hazardous due to the presence of flammable or combustible materials The company is responsible for supplying proper power and specialized application tools for employee use Only qualified/trained personnel will operate powder-actuated tools Before a job is started, the supervisor or designee will ensure that the employee is fully aware of the hazards associated with the particular tool to be used Either Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Protection or an Assured Equipment Grounding Conductor Program will be provided for all 120V (or greater) powered tools Adapters that interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding conductor will not be used (e.g., 3- wire to 2-wire adapter.) Double-insulated tools do not require an equipment grounding conductor (3rd wire) in the cord, but they do require GFCI protection Modifications will not be made to any tool or related equipment. Follow site or business unit established procedures when repairs are necessary Do not abuse power cords or hoses. Never carry tools by the cord or hose or yank to disconnect. Protect cords and hoses from heat, oil, and sharp edges Cords and hoses will be routed in such a manner as to not create a tripping hazard. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 234 of 389

235 4.2 Types of Tools Appropriate for Use: Ensuring the type of tool is appropriate for the job requires: Recognition of applicable hazards associated with the work to be completed Tool determination and additional requirements Procedures for removal of a tool from service Where tools are used which could present a hazard to anyone other than the user, all other employees will be instructed concerning hazards Tool identification. Tools having identification numbers will be checked for legibility. 4.3 Pre-Use Safety: Use the correct tool for the job Tools producing 100 db (A) of noise will be labeled with a "Hearing Protection Required" sticker or tag Remove adjusting keys and wrenches before connecting to the power supply. 4.4 Pre-Use Inspection: Prior to each use, visually inspect all portable electric tools and accessories for damages or defects, per the following: Portable electric tools-check: Tool general condition Cord for damage or deterioration Cord grip tightness Plug cap condition (grounding prong integrity) Inspect extension cords and equipment for loose parts and damaged cords Portable GFCI's - Test per manufacturer's specifications Before using the tool, check workplace for nails, defects, or similar hazards/imperfections. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 235 of 389

236 4.5 In-Use Safety: Attachment Plug/Connector Body/Cord; check for: Dress appropriately for the job General condition Cord grip tightness Grounding Prong integrity Polarization integrity Condition of outer cord jacket. Cord will not be spliced and must be replaced if outer jacket is damaged Boot and visible parts of body for damage, loose parts, or deterioration Portable lights-check Handle, guard and other visible parts for damage, loose parts or deterioration Lamp (should be rough-service type) Low voltage lights (12 volts) to ensure that transformer has not been by-passed. Check lamp voltage rating Do not wear loose clothing or dangling jewelry Confine long hair in a hair-net, cap, or fasten securely to the back of the head Use extreme care when wearing gloves Appropriate PPE will be provided at no cost to the employee. When the possibility of occupational exposure is present, PPE will be provided. Safety glasses are the minimum requirement when using any tool; additional PPE requirements may be necessary depending upon tool being used and job application provided to the employee at no additional charge (e.g., face shield, side shields, goggles, etc.) Use hearing protection if required Use all tools per manufacturer's recommendations Keep cutting tools in good condition. Sharpen/replace when necessary Never use fingers to pull or dislodge chips or turnings from tools or parts. Use pliers, rakes, or hooks. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 236 of 389

237 4.5.5 In some areas, compressed gas lines have been installed for specific uses. Be sure that air powered tools are hooked up only to lines supplied for the purpose Do not set down or carry a portable power tool in any way so that the starting-trigger or button can be accidentally struck Appropriate precautions will be utilized when tools are used in a wet location (e.g., electrically insulated gloves). 4.6 Post-Use Safety: Disconnect tools when not in use Never lubricate, clean, repair, or adjust a tool while it is connected to a power source After a job is finished, clean all scrap and debris from the work table and surrounding area. Use proper receptacles Take care of all tools. Keep them sharp and clean. Follow manufacturer's instructions for lubricating, changing accessories, and inspection. 4.7 Repair: All electric tool repairs will be made by a factory authorized tool repair service or company designated portable power tool repair service The only exception is cord plugs and connector bodies that may be replaced by a qualified person with an electrical background. Upon completion of plug or body replacement, ground integrity will be tested No repairs will be made to portable GFCIs. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Specialized Applications: Hand and power tools that may generate sparks or high temperatures will not be used in areas that are hazardous due to the presence of flammable or combustible materials. Use of non-sparking tools will be required unless monitoring ensures levels below 25% of the lower explosive limit (LEL). For more information, reference Portable Electronic Devices in Hazardous Areas Training for use of a powder actuated tool is provided by the manufacturer (usually HILTI) A license is issued after training; individuals using powder actuated tools must have the license on their person when using the tool A record of training will be kept in personnel training files or equivalent recordkeeping system. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 237 of 389

238 5.2 Power Tool Precautions: Power tools can be hazardous when improperly used. The company uses several types based on the power source they use such as electric, liquid fuel, hydraulic, pneumatic, and powder-actuated. The following precautions will be taken by employees to prevent injury Power tools will always be operated within their design limitations Eye protection, gloves, and safety footwear are recommended during operation Store tools in an appropriate dry location when not in use Work only in well illuminated locations Tools will not be carried by the cord or hose Cords or hoses will not be yanked to disconnect it from the receptacle Cords and hoses will be kept away from heat, oils, and sharp edges or any other source that could result in damage Tools will be disconnected when not in use, before servicing, and when changing accessories such as blades, bits, and cutters Observers will be kept at a safe distance at all times from the work area Work will be secured with clamps or a vice where possible to free both hands to operate tools To prevent accidental starting, employees should be continually aware not to hold the start button while carrying a plugged in tool Tools will be maintained in a clean manner and properly maintained in accordance with the manufacturer s guidelines Ensure that proper shoes are worn and that the work area is kept clean to maintain proper footing and good balance Ensure that proper apparel is worn. Loose clothing, ties, or jewelry can become caught in moving parts Tools that are damaged will be removed from service immediately and tagged "Do Not Use". They will be reported and turned over to the job site supervisor or Safety Officer for repair or replacement Cracked saws. All cracked saws will be removed from service. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 238 of 389

239 5.3 Methods of Guarding: Grounding. Portable electric power tools will meet the electrical requirements of this safety program and 29 CFR Compressed air used for cleaning. Compressed air will not be used for cleaning purposes except where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip guarding and personal protective equipment One or more methods of guarding will be provided where required to protect the operator and other employees in the area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, in-running nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of guarding methods are barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices, electronic safety devices, etc. The guard will be such that it does not offer an accident hazard in itself. Employees will: 5.4 Self Assessment: Inspect tools without guards for signs of guard removal. If it is evident that a guard is required, tag-out the tool and obtain a replacement. Tools will not be energized during inspection Inspect tools having guards for proper operation and maintenance prior to use. Tools will not be energized during inspection Never remove a guard during use Each division/work unit should conduct a self-assessment to assess compliance with this standard and develop action plans to correct deficiencies. See Section 6 for more information. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 Powder Actuated Tools: Users of powder-actuated tools must be licensed and trained Training may be conducted as part of an apprenticeship program or in other recognized training forums Employees who indicate they have had prior training will be required to demonstrate understanding and capabilities prior to being assigned to work Manufacturer's instructions will be retained for training/reference purposes. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 239 of 389

240 6.2 Initial and Re-Training: This safety program will be provided to and read by all employees receiving training. Training will be conducted on an as needed basis or when the following conditions are met: 6.3 Verification: 7. Definitions Re-training will be provided for all authorized and affected employees whenever (and prior to) there being a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of tools used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment Additional re-training will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals (or whenever there is sufficient reason to believe) there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of tools The re-training will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary The company will verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The documentation will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Powder Actuated Tools A tool that uses an explosive charge to drive a bolt or nail. Normally used in concrete construction or steel erection. Electrically powered nail guns are not considered a powder actuated tool. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 240 of 389

241 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER HAND AND PORTABLE POWER TOOLS Hand and Portable Power Tool Training Includes: General Requirments Types of Tools Hazards Protection and Guarding Abrasive, Electric, Pneumatic and Powder Actuated Tools, and Jacks INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 241 of 389

242 EMPLOYEE NAME: AUTHORIZED LASER OPERATOR RECORD REGISTRATION #: HAZARD CLASS: TYPE: The above named individual has completed the required instruction and received Laser Operator Training in the past two years. They have proven their safety and proficiency to me on the above laser. I authorize this person to use this laser. NAME OF TRAINEE SIGNATURE DATE PRINCIPAL AUTHORIZED LASER OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE LASER SAFETY OFFICER SIGNATURE DATE Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 242 of 389

243 LASER OPERATING PROCEDURE Only trained and authorized personnel are allowed to operate or access the laser and work in the laser area. Type or Manufacturer Name of Laser is A diagram of the laser area is attached to this procedure (yes) Laser characteristics (describe or check off as applicable): o Classification (3a, 3b, 4a, etc) o Type of Beam (check as applicable) open beam partially enclosed beam fully enclosed beam o Type of hazard target area absorbing media severity of potential accidents other o Beam Characteristics divergence aperture diameter pulse length repetition rate maximum output Purpose, application or use of laser: Controls (describe) o Access controls (door interlocks, signs, signals) o Beam controls (key-lock, enclosures, shutters, stops) o Electrical controls (light on power supply, HV signs) o Eye protection (optical density required for beam) o Other controls Operation (describe) o Area preparation key position warning lights on interlock activated restrictions of personnel o PPE (eyewear, protective barriers) o Preparation of target area (alignment, safety tests) o Countdown procedures o Shutdown procedures o Emergency procedures Training o General Laser safety and Laser-specific safety training are required for all operators. Additionally LOTO training is required for maintenance and repair personnel is responsible for identifying employees who require training. is responsible for conducting the training. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 243 of 389

244 Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 244 of 389

245 LASER PROGRAM ASSESSMENT Unit Assessed: Assessor: Date: Description of Requirement Compliant? Administrative Are lasers classified appropriately (2, 3a, 3b, 4a, 4b)? Yes No Are Standard Operating Procedures written and available? Yes No Are alignment procedures written and available? Yes No Are viewing cards or similar systems used for alignment? Yes No Do laser operators attend appropriate training? Yes No Is an inventory maintained? Yes No Labeling and Posting Is an identification label affixed to the machine? Yes No Are class designation and appropriate warning label(s) present? Yes No Is radiation output information on the label? Yes No Is an aperture label present? Yes No Are appropriate warning/danger sign(s) at the entrance to the laser area? Yes No Is a warning posted for invisible radiation exposure? Yes No Control Measures Is the protective housing present and in good condition? Yes No Is the beam attenuator present? Yes No Is the laser table below eye level? Yes No Is the beam enclosed as much as possible? Yes No Is the beam pointed away from any doors or windows? Yes No Are beams terminated with fire-resistant beam stops? Yes No Do surfaces minimize specular reflections? Yes No Are controls located so that the operator is not exposed to beam hazards? Yes No Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 245 of 389

246 Description of Requirement Compliant? Personal Protective Equipment Is eye protection appropriate for the wavelength? YES NO Does eye protection have adequate OD (optical density)? YES NO Can warning/indicator lights be seen through protective filters? Class 3b and 4 Lasers YES NO Are interlocks provided on protective housing? YES NO Is the service access panel present and kept closed? YES NO Is there limited access to other employees or persons? YES NO Has a nominal hazard zone been determined and marked? YES NO Is a process in place to assure that operators do not wear watches or reflective jewelry while laser is operating? Are viewing portals present and used where the MPE (maximum permissible exposure) is potentially exceeded? (recommended) Class 4 Lasers Are failsafe interlocks located at entry to controlled areas? YES NO Are areas restricted to only authorized personnel? YES NO Are lasers capable of being fired remotely? YES NO Are curtains or other materials fire-resistant (if present)? YES NO Are areas designed to allow and facilitate rapid egress and exit during an emergency? Pulsed are interlocks designed to prevent firing of the laser by dumping the stored energy into a dummy load? CW are interlocks designed to turn off power supply or interrupt the beam by means of shutters? Is a process in place to assure that operators do not wear ties or other loose clothing around the operating laser, and that any long hair is restrained? If applicable, do they sign the entry permit? YES NO Non-Beam Hazards Is any high voltage equipment properly grounded? YES NO Is high voltage equipment located away from wet surfaces or water sources (and operators trained not to operate equipment with wet hands)? Is a high voltage-warning label in place? YES NO Are any compressed gases properly secured? YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 246 of 389

247 Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 247 of 389

248 PROGRAM OVERVIEW LASER SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR , Non-ionizing Radiation 21 CFR 1040, FDA Laser Requirements ANSI - Z136.1, Safe Use of Lasers INTRODUCTION: Provides specific requirements and guidelines ensuring the safety of laser operators and other individuals likely to be exposed to laser hazards. This program contains training, medical surveillance and warning signs requirements. It also has provisions for written safe operating procedures, design and construction and laser classification. TRAINING: Operators must be aware of the hazards encountered and the protective control measures required for use, based on the class and type of laser and the level of hazard encountered. ACTIVITIES: Determine the type and class of laser used Ensure all class 3 and higher lasers have appropriate labels and signs Ensure employees using class 3 and higher lasers are appropriately trained Write safe laser operating procedures for class 3 and higher lasers FORMS: Authorized laser operator record (for class 3 or higher laser) Laser Operating Procedure (for class 3 or higher laser) Program Assessment Training Attendance Roster 64. Purpose 65. Scope 66. Responsibilities 67. Procedure 68. Safety Information 69. Training Information & Requirements 70. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 248 of 389

249 Laser Safety Program 1. Purpose. This laser safety program is intended to provide specific requirements and guidelines based on ANSI Z136.1 to ensure the safety of laser operators and other individuals likely to be exposed to laser hazards. In practice, the hazard classification of a laser is determined, and then the appropriate controls are applied taking into account the laser environment and the potential for excessive personnel exposure. The company will evaluate this program: 1.1 On an annual basis, or more frequently as needed. 1.2 When changes occur to 29 CFR , Non-ionizing Radiation and ANSI Z136.1, Safe Use of Lasers, that prompt revision of this document. 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. 2. Scope. This program applies to all lasers operated by company employees, and all lasers owned by the company. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management/Supervisor: Evaluate laser needs and usage Ensure any lasers used or purchased are evaluated for safety controls and requirements before being placed into service Ensure controls and protective equipment is provided Provide appropriate storage containment for lasers when not in use Appoint a designated person to serve as the Laser Safety Officer, if required Train employees Provide for appropriate medical surveillance systems for the operators (primarily eye examinations) Enforce the use of written procedures Provide registration and tags, as appropriate Provide for emergency services, as needed Maintain documentation and records. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 249 of 389

250 3.2 Laser Operators (employees): Follow written procedures Attend Training Participate in medical surveillance systems, as needed or required Use protective equipment and controls, as appropriate Operate lasers only when trained, and in a safe and responsible manner. 3.3 Laser Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of this program Oversee the storage, use and shipment of lasers and laser-products Ensure training and surveillance systems are maintained appropriately Maintain documentation and records, including registration and tags Assist in determining laser classifications and needs. 4.1 General Safety Requirements: Class 3b and 4 lasers will receive a preliminary safety review and approval by the Laser Safety Officer prior to acquisition or fabrication of the laser. These lasers also will receive a final safety review and approval by the Laser Safety Officer prior to initial use of the laser. The final review will cover user qualifications, safe operations, including electrical safety, area controls, and written procedures, if required Each laser (except Class 1) will be registered with the Laser Safety Officer and carry a laser identification tag with its unique laser registration number (assigned by the company). This is in addition to Material Control inventory numbers, if any. The tag will be installed in a manner not obstructing laser installation/mounting and so that it can easily be read Each laser and laser application will meet the safety standards of ANSI Z136.1 or an equivalent level of safety approved by the Laser Safety Officer. The requirements specific to each laser class are listed and keyed to applicable sections of ANSI Z All lasers will carry a warning label containing the laser classification, type, and other information required by ANSI Z This label normally comes affixed to lasers that have been purchased commercially. The label will not interfere with laser operation or mounting. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 250 of 389

251 4.1.5 Class 3b or 4 lasers will be used in controlled areas in order to restrict access of unauthorized personnel. The level of control depends on the laser class Each controlled laser area will be posted with an appropriate warning sign Each operator of a Class 2, 3a, 3b or 4 Laser will meet company training and medical surveillance requirements, as applicable Each operator of a Class 3b or 4 laser will wear protective equipment (e.g., eyewear), as required Written safety program requirements will be met. 4.2 Electrical Safety Requirements: Lasers will meet electrical and safety requirements as required by OSHA and ANSI regulatory standards. These requirements are too detailed for this document. The requirements of ANSI Z136.1 should be reviewed. Some examples include: Fail-safe Control Systems Barriers and Safety Interlocks Safety Interlocks for Transmission Lines Remote-control Interlocks Laser Activation Warning Systems and Enunciators Grounding Methods Temporary Bypassing of Safety Interlocks Safety Watch and CPR trained personnel Types of Hazards. Some examples include: Inadequate shock-reaction space Induced voltages in closed magnetic circuits High impedance in grounding conductors Improper tagging practices. 4.3 Design and Construction Practices: A fail-safe control system maintains the desired protective function when the systems final control element returns to the safe position upon activation of its initial control device and upon failure of its power source Fail-safe control systems will be analyzed successfully using the Single Failure Criterion of IEEE Standard 379 before completion of the design Energy barriers, where required in the Laser Safe Operating Procedures and where readily removable, will have their positions monitored by initial control devices, such as limit, photocell, or proximity switches, which will be considered part of the personnel-safety interlock system for the laser. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 251 of 389

252 4.3.4 Personnel, equipment, and service access-door positions will be monitored where required in the Laser Safe Operating Procedure by initial control devices having hardwired final control elements arranged to de-energize the power supply for the laser upon unauthorized access attempts Where transmission-line enclosures are used, plug and receptacle or pin and socket connectors having one end shorted should be run parallel to transmission-line enclosures and across breaks to ensure continuous enclosure while the beam is operating Remote control of Class 3b or Class 4 beam operation will be delegated by sequentially keyed localremote control stations. The sequential keying will be considered part of the personnel-safety interlock system for the laser Visual indicators used in laser-activation warning systems and enunciators will have self-checking features, such as push-to-test lights, included in the system design Laser control elements and devices and emission delay periods will be listed in the Laser Safe Operating Procedure together with any exceptions to the applicable safety-related design criteria accepted by the Laser Safety Officer Where single-point grounding systems are used with laser power supplies, systems, or structures, their design criteria will be documented and approved by the Laser Safety Officer or other designated person. Covered copper braid or flat copper bar will be considered for use as grounding conductors in circuits having fast rise-times Laser safety training, when required by the Laser Safe Operating Procedure, will include capacitor bank assessor certification and orientation to the safety tagging procedures of Lockout/Tagout of Energy Isolation Devices Periodic safety inspections will be performed on personnel safety interlock systems and capacitor banks within operational laser systems. 4.4 Written Laser Safe Operating Procedures: An approved written Laser Safe Operating Procedure is required for certain lasers that are high powered or that emit invisible radiation. However, the Laser Safety Officer may recommend or require a written procedure for any laser or laser application where it is deemed necessary for ensuring adequate safety controls. The following Class 3b lasers require an approved written procedure: Those that produce beams invisible to the eye Continuous wave (cw) lasers that produce visible beams with greater than 15 mw power. (HeNe lasers with 15 mw or less normally do not require a written procedure. However, all other safety requirements apply.) 4.5 Laser Medical Surveillance: All Class 4 lasers and laser systems require a written Laser Safe Operating Procedure Required written Laser Safe Operating Procedure normally is prepared by the principal authorized laser operator. The procedure will follow the outline in Appendix 1 and will receive Laser Safety Officer and line management approval before the laser is operated. Laser Safe Operating Procedure standard cover sheets are available from the Laser Safety Officer. The Laser Safe Operating Procedure will be reviewed and updated every two years (or as changes occur by the principal authorized laser operator). National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 252 of 389

253 4.5.1 All employees who are routinely engaged in work where they may be exposed to laser radiation from any class laser that requires a written safe operating procedure must comply with the company laser medical surveillance program The purpose of laser medical surveillance is twofold. The first purpose is to establish a baseline of ocular conditions before exposure to laser radiation. The second purpose is to detect and document, as early as possible, ocular damage in the event of a suspected exposure incident. Both serve to assess the effectiveness of control measures and to institute appropriate therapeutic measures Laser medical surveillance includes a preliminary baseline eye exam. Additional eye exams may be required in the event of exposure or suspected exposure to laser radiation above the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE). An eye exam also is required upon termination of laser work or upon termination of employment. Other routine eye exams are not required. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Laser Protective Equipment: The Laser Safety Officer will review and approve protective eyewear to assure that it is appropriate for the use for which it is intended. The eyewear to be used will depend on the wavelength(s) and intensity of the accessible radiation In some cases, other protective equipment, such as clothing to protect the skin, may be required. Such requirements will be addressed in written Laser Safe Operating Procedure. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 253 of 389

254 5.2 Laser Warning Signs: In some cases, other protective equipment, such as clothing to protect the skin, may be required. Such requirements will be addressed in written Laser Safe Operating Procedure Laser warning signs will meet the standards of ANSI Z Class 1 lasers do not require a sign The word CAUTION will be used with all Class 2 and Class 3a lasers. The word DANGER will be used with all Class 3b and Class 4 lasers Precautionary instructions and protective actions: Class 2: Laser Radiation - Do Not Stare Into Beam. Do Not Direct the Beam Towards the Eye of Individuals Class 3: Laser Radiation - Avoid Direct Exposure to Beam Class 4: Laser Radiation - Avoid Eye or Skin Exposure to Direct or Scattered Radiation Additional precautionary instructions and protective actions that may be required are Invisible Laser Radiation; Knock Before Entering; Do Not Enter When Light Is On; Restricted Area, etc All warning signs and labels will be displayed conspicuously in locations where they best will serve to warn individuals of potential safety hazards. Normally, warning signs are posted at entryways (e.g., on doors) to laser controlled areas. Warning labels are affixed to the lasers in a conspicuous location Posted laser warning signs will be removed by the laser operator if the laser has been removed from the room or area. Laser Requirement Summary This Requirement For These Lasers Warning Label 1 2 3a 3b 4 Warning Sign 2 3a 3b 4 Registered with the Laser Safety Officer 2 3a 3b 4 Read & Sign Information Sheet 2 3a Laser Safety Operator Training 3b 4 Laser Safe Operating Procedure 3b 4 Medical Surveillance 3b 4 *If invisible to the eye, and if cw laser, visible beams > 15 mw power. 5.3 Safe Laser Practices: The following control measures are recommended as a guide to safe laser use. Some of the measures may be required, particularly in the case of high-powered lasers or lasers that emit invisible radiation. See ANSI Z Recommended Work Area Controls A laser should be isolated from areas where the uninformed and curious would be attracted by its operation. Doors should be closed or locked to keep out unwanted onlookers The illumination in the area should be as bright as practicable in order to constrict the eye pupils of users The laser should be set up so that the beam path is not at normal eye level, i.e., so it is below 4.5 feet and above 6.5 feet. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 254 of 389

255 Where practical, the laser system or beam should be enclosed to prevent accidental exposure to the beam The potential for specular reflections should be minimized by shields and by removal of all unnecessary shiny surfaces Windows to hallways or other outside areas should be provided with adequate shades or covers The main beams and reflected beams should be terminated or dumped. Note that this is required for any accessible laser for which the Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) could be exceeded The active laser never should be left unattended unless it is a part of a controlled environment Good housekeeping should be practiced to ensure that no specular reflector is left in or near the beam Warning devices should be installed for lasers with invisible beams to warn of operation Recommended Laser Use Controls Avoid looking into the primary beam at all times Do not aim the laser using the eye; direct reflections could cause retinal damage Avoid looking at the pump source Clear all personnel from the anticipated path of the beam Before operating the laser, warn all personnel and visitors of the potential hazard, and ensure all safety measures are satisfied Be especially cautious around lasers that operate at frequencies not visible to the human eye. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 255 of 389

256 Do not wear bright, reflective jewelry or other objects Use proper eye protection. Keep in mind: No matter how good the glasses, no protection is provided unless they are worn. 5.4 Associated (non-beam laser hazards): All safety glass lenses may shatter, and all plastic lenses may melt when the maximum radiant exposure for the particular lens is exceeded Laser safety glasses may not provide eye protection with other than the laser for which they are specified, unless the frequency produced is the same and power output is not greater Depending on the type of laser used, associated hazards other than those from beam radiation may be involved. Such hazards to personnel, if they exist, should be addressed in written Laser Safe Operating Procedure Atmospheric Contamination Vaporized target material: Materials may include carbon monoxide, ozone, lead, mercury, lithium, and other metals Gases from flowing gas lasers or by-products of laser reactions such as fluorine, hydrogen cyanide, and many others Gases or vapors from cryogenic coolants Chemicals - Chemicals, including dyes and solvents, from certain dye lasers have been shown to be carcinogenic, toxic, or otherwise hazardous Cryogenic Coolants - Cryogenic liquids, such as liquid nitrogen or hydrogen, may cause burns Electrical Hazards - The potential for electrical shock is present in most laser systems. Pulsed lasers utilize capacitor banks for energy storage and cw lasers generally have high voltage DC or RF electrical power supplies Explosive Hazards - The potential exists for explosions at capacitor banks or optical pump systems during the operation of some high power lasers. Explosive reactions of chemical laser reactants or other gases used within the laser laboratory could cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel Jewelry - The use of jewelry (watches, rings, etc.) is often an overlooked source of exposure to a beam reflected by a mirror-like surface. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 256 of 389

257 5.4.9 Ultraviolet Radiation - Either direct or reflected from flash lamps and cw laser discharge tubes may cause eye injury. Usually, ultraviolet radiation is a problem only when quartz tubing or windows are used Visible Radiation (non-laser) - High luminance radiation emitted from unshielded pump lamps may cause eye injury X rays - Potentially hazardous X rays may be generated from high voltage (over 15kV) power supply tubes. 5.5 Laser Classifications and Entry Controls: Laser classifications and entry controls are summarized below along with a summary of essential requirements Class 1. Class 1 denotes exempt lasers or laser systems that cannot, under normal operating conditions, produce a hazard Equipment such as laser printers that completely enclose the laser and laser beam are normally specified as Class Class 1 lasers must be labeled, but are exempt from other requirements Class 2. Class 2 denotes low-powered visible-radiation lasers or laser systems. Visible cw HeNe lasers above Class 1, but not exceeding 1-milliwatt (mw) radiant power, are common examples of this class. Because of the normal human aversion responses, these lasers normally do not present a hazard, but may present some potential for hazard if viewed directly for extended periods of time Class 2 lasers must be labeled and registered with the Laser Safety Officer. The warning label or sign will caution users to avoid staring into the beam or directing the beam toward the eye of individuals, and will be placed on or near the laser in a conspicuous location Class 3a. Class 3a denotes lasers or laser systems that normally would not produce a hazard if viewed for only momentary periods with the unaided eye. They may present a hazard if viewed using collecting optics. Visible cw HeNe lasers above 1 milliwatt (mw), but not exceeding 5 mw radiant power, are common examples of this class Class 3a lasers must be labeled and registered with the Laser Safety Officer. The warning label or sign will caution users to avoid staring into the beam or directing the beam toward the eye of individuals, and will be placed on or near the laser in a conspicuous location. Lasers used as pointers in auditoriums, classrooms or similar training environments are restricted to be no higher than Class 3a. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 257 of 389

258 5.5.5 Class 3b. Class 3b denotes lasers or laser systems that can produce a hazard if viewed directly. This includes intrabeam viewing or specular reflections. Except for the higher power Class 3b lasers, this class laser will not produce hazardous diffuse reflections. Visible cw HeNe lasers above 5 mw, but not exceeding 500 mw radiant power, are examples of this class Class 3b lasers will be used in areas where entry by unauthorized personnel can be controlled. Entry into the area by personnel untrained in laser safety may be permitted by the laser operator if instructed as to safety requirements and are provided with protective eyewear, if required Class 4. Class 4 denotes lasers or laser systems that can produce a hazard not only from direct or specular reflections, but also from a diffuse reflection. In addition, such lasers may produce fire and skin hazards. 6. Training and Information Class 4 lasers will be operated by authorized operators in areas dedicated to their use. Failsafe interlocks will be used to prevent unexpected entry into the controlled area, and access will be limited by the laser operator to persons who have been instructed as to safety procedures and who are wearing proper laser protection eyewear (if required by written procedures) when the laser is capable of emission. Authorized operators are responsible to provide information and safety protection to untrained personnel who may enter the laser controlled area as visitors For pulsed systems, interlocks will be designed so as to prevent firing of the laser by dumping the stored energy into a dummy load. For continuous wave lasers, the interlocks will turn off the power supply or interrupt the beam by means of shutters The existence of homemade lasers will be made known to the Laser Safety Officer so that a proper hazard classification based on ANSI standards can be made on the laser. 6.1 All new users of Class 2 and Class 3a lasers and laser pointers will read and sign an information sheet. This will provide proof of training required by ANSI Z All new users of Class 3b and Class 4 lasers will attend a laser safety training. This course will include, but not be limited to, laser classification, biological effects, safety requirements, and recommended safe practices. An exam must be passed for successful completion of the laser safety course. 6.3 All users of Class 3b lasers requiring written Laser Safe Operating Procedure and all users of Class 4 lasers will complete additional training specific to the safe operation of the laser or laser system they are required to operate. The specific training requirements will be defined in the written Laser Safe Operating Procedure. The principal authorized laser operator must complete an "Authorized Laser Operator" form (Appendix 2) for all laser operators trained on the laser. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 258 of 389

259 7. Definitions Authorized Laser Operator - An individual who has met all applicable laser safety training, medical surveillance, and approval requirements for operating a laser or laser system. Aversion Response - Movement of the eyelid or the head to avoid an exposure to a noxious stimulant or bright light. It can occur within 0.25 seconds, including the blink reflex time. Continuous Wave (cw) - The output of a laser, operated in a continuous rather than a pulsed mode. For purposes of safety evaluation, a laser operating with a continuous output for a period 0.25 s is regarded as a cw laser. Controlled Area - An area where the occupancy and activity of those within is subject to control and supervision for the purpose of protection from laser radiation and related hazards. Diffuse Reflection - Change of the spatial distribution of a beam of radiation when it is reflected in many directions by a surface or by a medium. Energy (Q) - The capacity for doing work. Energy content is commonly used to characterize the output from pulsed lasers and is generally expressed in joules (J). Failsafe Interlock - An interlock where the failure of a single mechanical or electrical component of the interlock will cause the system to go into, or remain in, a safe mode. Infrared Radiation - Electromagnetic radiation with wavelengths that lie within the range 0.7 m to 1 mm. Intrabeam Viewing - The viewing condition whereby the eye is exposed to all or part of a laser beam. Irradiant (E) (at a point of a surface) - Quotient of the radiant flux incident on an element of the surface containing the point at which irradiance is measured by the area of that element. Unit: watt per cm2. Laser - A device that produces an intense, coherent, directional beam of light by stimulating electronic or molecular transitions to lower energy levels. An acronym for Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. Laser Operator - See Authorized Laser Operator. Laser Safe Operating Procedure - A set of operating instructions for a particular laser or laser system. The procedure specifies measures that, if followed, will ensure safe and correct use of the laser or laser system. Laser Safety Officer - One who has the authority to monitor and enforce the control of laser hazards and effect the knowledgeable evaluation of controls. Laser System - An assembly of electrical, mechanical, and optical components that includes one or more lasers. Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) - The level of laser radiation to which a person may be exposed without hazardous effect or adverse biological changes in the eye or skin. MPE is expressed in terms of either radiant exposure (joules/cm2) or irradiance (watts/cm2). The criteria for MPE are detailed in ANSI Z Nominal Hazard Zone (NHZ) - The nominal hazard zone describes the space within which the level of the direct, reflected, or scattered radiation during normal operation exceeds the applicable MPE. Exposure levels beyond the boundary of the NHZ are below the appropriate MPE level. Optical Density (Dl) - Logarithm to the base ten of the reciprocal of the transmittance: Dl = -log T, where T is the transmittance Principal Authorized Laser Operator - The authorized laser user who assumes responsibility for the control and safe use of a laser or laser system. Power - The rate at which energy is emitted, transferred, or received. Unit: watts (joules per second). Also called radiant power. prf - Abbreviation for pulse repetition frequency. (See repetitively pulsed laser.) National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 259 of 389

260 Pulsed Laser - A laser that delivers its energy in the form of a single pulse or a train of pulses. The duration of a pulse is regarded to be 0.25 s. Q-Switched Laser - A laser that emits short (~30 ns), high-power pulses by means of a Q-switch. Radiant Exposure (H) - Surface density of the radiant energy received. Unit: joules per cm2. Radiant Flux - Power emitted, transferred, or received in the form of radiation. Unit: joule (J). Repetitively Pulsed Laser - A laser with multiple pulses of radiant energy occurring in sequence with a prf 1 Hz. Specular Reflection - A mirror-like reflection. Transmittance - (T) The ratio of total transmitted radiant power to total incident radiant power. Ultraviolet Radiation - Electromagnetic radiation that wavelengths smaller than those of visible radiation; for the purpose of this section on laser safety, 0.2 to 0.4 m. Visible Radiation (Light) - Electromagnetic radiation that can be detected by the human eye. This term is used commonly to describe wavelengths that lie in the range 0.4 to 0.7 m. Wavelength (g) - The distance between two successive points on a periodic wave that have the same phase. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 260 of 389

261 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER LASER SAFETY Laser Safety Training Includes: Definitions and Classes of Lasers Responsibilities and Requirements Controls and Signs Hazards and Safe Use Requirements Medical Surveillance Personal Protective Equipment Requirements Employee Specific Training Requirements Written Procedures and Recordkeeping INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 18 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 261 of 389

262 NOISE EXPOSURE AND HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAM ASSESSMENT Facility or Area: Assessor: Date: Description of Requirement Compliant? Hearing Conservation Coordinator (HCC) Has management designated a Hearing Conservation Coordinator (HCC)? Yes No Does management understand the responsibilities of the HCC and provide sufficient time, resources and authority? Has the (HCC) attended training presented by an Audiologist? Yes No Has the HCC read and understood the Hearing Conservation regulations? Yes No Has the HCC read the most current company noise exposure report(s)? Yes No Does the HCC understand that he/she must be aware of any changes that could increase/decrease noise exposure in the areas and assess these changes? Does the HCC understand that he/she must be notified prior to any change in the length of scheduled work shifts to assess the effects on noise exposures? Exposure Controls Does any new equipment or machinery meet an 80 db noise limit? Yes No Has the HCC verified that any hearing/noise reduction recommendations made have been implemented, or that a plan and timeline exist? Has the HCC or management explored feasible noise control engineering for each area, or has a plan and timeline to do so? Is a plan and timeline in place to reduce exposure of persons in noise zones to less than 100% dose (90 dba as an 8-hour average)? Noise Zone Member Training Has each member of the Noise Zone attended the introductory training class? Yes No Has each member of the Noise Zone received localized, site-specific annual training taught by a trained and qualified HCC or other designated person? Hearing Protection Equipment Is a variety of hearing protection readily available? Yes No Does management enforce the use of hearing protection in the Noise Zone? Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No Page 11 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 262 of 389

263 Description of Requirement Compliant? Noise Zone Compliance Is a copy of OSHA 29CFR posted in the Noise Zone? YES NO Has each member of the Noise Zone been made aware of the details of the Noise Zone and which operations require the use of hearing protection? Does each member of the Noise Zone receive annual audiograms? YES NO Is a process or procedure in place that ensures any new members of the Noise Zone receive baseline audiograms within 6 months of assignment? Has the HCC verified that the appropriate Noise Zone Hearing Protection Required signs are properly displayed at the entrance to Noise Zones? Are Hearing Protection required stickers affixed to identified tools? YES NO Do all members of the noise zone wear hearing protection when required? YES NO YES YES YES NO NO NO Page 12 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 263 of 389

264 PROGRAM OVERVIEW NOISE EXPOSURE AND HEARING CONSERVATION SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR CFR INTRODUCTION: OSHA mandates employers to protect their employees against occupational noise exposure when sound levels exceed established thresholds (85 dba). This program ensures adherence to the OSHA standard by detailing requirements for audiometric testing, hearing conservation, and training. It also contains recordkeeping parameters and offers guidance in computing noise exposure and estimating the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation. TRAINING: Institute an annual training program for all employees who are exposed to noise at or above an 8- hour time weighted average of 85 decibels ACTIVITIES: Determine where noise levels exist above regulatory levels, conduct monitoring Appoint a Hearing Conservation Coordinator Establish a written Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program Establish engineering controls, administrative controls or protective equipment requirements (in that order) to reduce or eliminate the health and safety effects of noise Notify employees exposed at or above action levels Ensure employees in noise zones receive baseline and annual audiograms Record any noise related hearing loss as required on OSHA recordkeeping forms Ensure protective equipment and materials are available, as needed or required Track employee training to assure annual and refresher training programs are provided FORMS: Program Assessment Computation and Rating Tables Text of Standard Training Attendance Roster 71. Purpose 72. Scope 73. Responsibilities 74. Procedure 75. Safety Information 76. Training Information & Requirements 77. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 264 of 389

265 Noise Exposure Safety Program 1. Purpose. Company policy is to protect employees from potentially harmful noise by implementing appropriate hearing conservation and noise control measures. Exposure to excessive noise can result in permanent hearing impairment, and can interfere with necessary speech communication and perception of auditory warning signals. The degree to which these effects occur depends on the intensity, spectrum, periodicity and duration of noise exposure in addition to individual susceptibility, the purpose of an occupational Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program is to prevent hearing impairment related to noise exposure at the work-site. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis, or more frequently as needed or required. 1.2 Upon changes (to equipment, tools or processes) that affect this program. 1.3 As changes are noted to regulations which require revision of this document. 2. Scope. This program applies to all company facilities or job-sites where noise exposures exist above regulatory levels. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management/Supervisors: Establish Noise Zone Areas, where required Appoint a Hearing Conservation Coordinator. This person can be the Safety Officer for the company or another designated person Ensure employees in noise zones receive annual audiograms Establish a written Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program Ensure protective equipment and materials are available, as needed or required Establish engineering controls, administrative controls or protective equipment requirements (in that order) to reduce or eliminate the health and safety effects of noise Notify employees of the occurrence of, problems with or changes to audiometric testing Provide employees the opportunity to observe (or participate in) audiometric testing. 3.2 Employees: Report signs and symptoms of noise exposure to supervisors immediately Attend required training Utilize hearing protective devices, when required. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 265 of 389

266 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): Assist in the development and implementation of this program. 3.4 Hearing Conservation Coordinator (HCC): 4. Procedure Implement a Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program that includes audiometric testing and training for employees who work in noise zones Ensure employees who work in noise zones are appropriately trained Ensure employees who work in noise zones utilize protective equipment, as required Track employee training to assure annual and refresher training programs are provided. 4.1 Audiometric Testing Program: An audiometric testing program will be maintained that is free of charge for employees whose exposures equal or exceed regulatory action levels (85dBa over 8 hours) Audio metric tests will be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist, otolaryngologist, or other physician, or by a technician who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation. A technician who performs audiometric tests must be responsible to an audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician All audiograms will meet the established regulatory requirements Company management will provide protection against the effects of noise exposure when the sound levels within our facility exceed the established limits. PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES Duration per day, hours Sound level dba slow response ½ ½ 110 ¼ or less When noise levels are determined by octave band analysis, they may then be converted to the more common A-Weighted Scale via a mathematical graph conversion. (This process is outlined in 29 CFR ) The A-Weighted sound level will be used to determine exposure limits When employees are subjected to sound levels exceeding the established limits, the company will provide for audiometric examinations, obtain valid audiograms, and National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 266 of 389

267 ensure proper controls are reviewed and implemented where feasible. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels to established guidelines, personal protective equipment will be provided and used to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table If the variations in noise level involve intervals of 1 second or less, it will be considered continuous. When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect will be considered, rather than the individual effect of each Exposure to impulsive or impact noise will not exceed 140 db peak sound pressure levels. 4.2 Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program: The designated Hearing Conservation Coordinator will administer a continuing, effective Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program, whenever employee noise exposures equal or exceed an 8 hour time weighted average sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels measured on the A scale (slow response) or, equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. For purposes of the Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program, employee noise exposures will be computed without regard to any attenuation provided by the use of personal protective equipment. (An 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent will also be referred to as the action level.) Monitoring. When information indicates that any employee's exposure may equal or exceed an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels, this monitoring program will be implemented The company will conduct sampling on an annual basis, at a minimum, where noise levels are known or suspected to exceed regulatory thresholds. Sampling is designed to identify employees for inclusion in the Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program and to enable the proper selection of hearing protectors Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant variations in sound level, or a significant component of impulse noise make area monitoring ineffective, the Hearing Conservation Coordinator, or other trained and qualified person will use representative personal sampling to comply with the regulatory monitoring requirements All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from 80 decibels to 130 decibels will be integrated into the noise measurements Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure will have been calibrated to ensure measurement accuracy Monitoring will be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or controls increases noise exposures to the extent that: Additional employees may be exposed at or above the action level. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 267 of 389

268 The attenuation or reduction in noise levels provided by hearing protectors are or may be rendered inadequate to meet the requirements Employee notification. The company will notify each employee exposed at or above an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring Observation of monitoring. The company will provide affected employees or their representatives with an opportunity to observe any noise measurements conducted Baseline audiogram. Within 6 months of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level, the company will establish a valid baseline audiogram against which subsequent audiograms can be compared. Where baseline audiograms cannot be obtained within this timeframe, employees will wear hearing protectors until the baseline audiogram is obtained Testing to establish a baseline audiogram will be preceded by at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that baseline audiograms be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. The company will notify employees of the need to avoid high levels of non-noise exposure during the 14-hour period immediately preceding the audiometric examination Annual audiogram. At least annually after obtaining the baseline audiogram, the company will obtain a new audiogram for each employee exposed at or above an 8- hour time weighted average of 85 decibels Evaluation of audiogram. Each employee's annual audiogram will be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift has occurred. This comparison may be done by an individual trained to the audiometric technician level. If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a standard threshold shift, a retest will be accomplished within 30 days and the results considered as the annual audiogram Problem audiograms. The company will ensure that an audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician review problem audiograms and determine whether there is a need for further evaluation. The reviewer will be provided the following information: The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of the employee to be evaluated Measurements of background sound pressure levels in the audiometric test room, (if the testing was not conducted at the reviewer s facility) Records of audiometer calibrations, (if the testing was not conducted at the reviewer s facility) Follow-up procedures. If a comparison of the annual audiogram to the baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift has occurred, the employee will be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of the determination. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 268 of 389

269 Standard threshold shift. A standard threshold shift is a change in hearing threshold relative to the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 db or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear. In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging (presbycusis) to the change in hearing level by correcting the annual audiogram in accordance with the regulatory standards. Unless a physician determines that the standard threshold shift is not work related or aggravated by Noise exposure, the company will ensure that the following steps are taken when a standard threshold shift occurs: Employees exposed or potentially exposed to high noise will be fitted with hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use them. For known high noise job assignments, employees will be fitted and trained prior to job assignment Employees already using hearing protectors will be refitted and retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary Employees will be referred for a clinical audiological evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional testing is necessary or if it is suspected that a medical pathology of the ear is caused or aggravated by the wearing of hearing protectors Employees will be informed of the need for an otological examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the use of hearing protectors is suspected If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose exposure to noise is less than an 8 hour TWA of 90 decibels indicates that a standard threshold shift is not persistent, the company: Will inform the employee of the new audiometric interpretation May discontinue the required use of hearing protectors for that employee Revised baseline. An annual audiogram may be substituted for the baseline audiogram when, in the judgment of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician who is evaluating the audiogram determine that: The standard threshold shift revealed by the audiogram is persistent The hearing threshold shown in the annual audiogram indicates significant improvement over the baseline audiogram Audiometric test requirements. Audiometric tests conducted will meet all regulatory requirements and be administered by a licensed audiologist or other equivalent professional. Audiometric examinations will be administered in a room meeting the regulatory requirements for Audiometric Test Rooms. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 269 of 389

270 Audiometer calibration. The functional operation of the audiometer will be checked and calibrated before each day's use, in accordance with manufacturer s requirements and/or regulatory standards An exhaustive calibration will be performed at least every two years. Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this calibration Hearing protectors. The company will make hearing protections available to all employees exposed to an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or greater at no cost to the employees. Hearing protectors will be replaced at no cost as necessary. The company will ensure that hearing protectors are worn: By any employee who is required by previous testing to wear personal protective equipment By any employee who is exposed to an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or greater, and who: has not yet had a baseline audiogram established, or has experienced a standard threshold shift Employees will be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from a variety of suitable hearing protectors provided The company will provide training in the use and care of all hearing protectors provided to employees The company will ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the correct use of all hearing protectors Hearing protector attenuation. The company will evaluate hearing protector attenuation for the specific noise environments in which the protector will be used in accordance with regulatory requirements. One of the evaluation methods described in Appendix B: Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protection Attenuation will be used. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Recordkeeping: Selected hearing protectors will attenuate employee exposure at least to an 8 hour time weighted average of 90 decibels For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift, selected hearing protectors must attenuate their exposure to an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels or below The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation will be re-evaluated whenever employee noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may no longer provide adequate attenuation. More effective hearing protectors will be provided where necessary. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 270 of 389

271 5.1.1 Exposure measurements. The company will maintain an accurate record of all employee exposure measurements Audiometric tests. The company will maintain accurate records of the measurements of the background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms. Additionally, all employee audiometric test records will be retained. These employee records will include as a minimum: Name and job classification of the employee Date of the audiogram The examiner's name Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer Employee's most recent noise exposure assessment Record retention. The company will retain audiometric and related records for at least the following periods Noise exposure measurement records will be retained for two years Audiometric test records will be retained for the duration of the affected employee's employment Access to records. All records cited in this safety program will be provided upon request to employees, former employees, representatives designated by the individual employee, and representatives of OSHA. Copies of this program and the text of the regulation (29CFR ) will be available and will be posted in the work place noise zone Transfer of records. If the company ceases to do business, the records will be transferred to the successor employer and maintained by the successor employer. Should the company cease to function entirely, the records will be provided to the respective employees, or as required by current law. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 The company will institute a training program for all employees who are exposed to noise at or above an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels, and will ensure employee participation in such program. 6.2 The training program will be repeated annually for each employee included in the Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program. Information provided in the training program will be updated to be consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes. Each employee will be informed of the following: The effects of noise on hearing The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 271 of 389

272 7. Definitions The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the test procedures. Action level--an 8-hour time weighted average of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale, slow response, or equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. Audiogram--A chart, graph, or table resulting from an audiometric test showing an individual's hearing threshold levels as a function of frequency. Audiologist--A professional specializing in the study and rehabilitation of hearing that is certified by the American Speech-Language-Hearing Association or licensed by a state board of examiners. Baseline audiogram--the audiogram against which future audiograms are compared. Criterion sound level--a sound level of 90 decibels. Decibel (db)--unit of measurement of sound level. dba (Decibel "A" weighted) - A sound level measured using the "A" weighted scale of a sound level meter. HCC - Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program Coordinator a person designated to oversee the HCP. HCP - Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program. Hertz (Hz)--Unit of measurement of frequency, numerically equal to cycles per second. Medical pathology--a disorder or disease. For purposes of this instruction, a condition or disease affecting the ear, which should be treated by a physician specialist. Noise dose--a function of both the sound level (dba) and duration of exposure in hours per day compared to a maximum allowable exposure, expressed as a percent. For example: A 50% noise dose is the exposure level at which a Noise Exposure and Hearing Conservation Program is required. It is equivalent to an exposure of 85 dba for 8 hours, 83 dba for 10 hours or 82 dba for 12 hours. A noise dose of 100% is equivalent to an average exposure of 90 dba for 8 hours, 88 dba for 10 hours, and 87 dba for 12 hours. Engineering or administrative controls are required when employee exposure reaches 100% dose. Noise dosimeter--an instrument that integrates a function of sound pressure over a period of time in such a manner that it directly indicates a noise dose. Noise Exposure Zone (Noise Zone) - an area or an operation within an operating unit, where a person, or group of persons, is identified as routinely receiving a 50% or greater noise dose. Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) - The reduction in sound level that may be obtained by a hearing protection device if it is worn properly. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 272 of 389

273 Otolaryngologist--A physician specializing in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of the ear, nose and throat. Representative exposure--measurements of an employee's noise dose or 8-hour time weighted average sound level that the employers deem to be representative of the exposures of other employees in the workplace. Sound level--ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the square of the measured A- weighted sound pressure to the square of the standard reference pressure of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (db). For use with this instruction, SLOW time response, in accordance with ANSI S (R1976), is required. Sound level meter--an instrument for the measurement of sound level. Standard Threshold Shift (STS) - defined by OSHA as "a change in hearing threshold relative to the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 dba or more at 2000, 3000 and 4000 Hz in either ear". Time weighted average sound level--that sound level, which if constant over an 8-hour exposure, would result in the same noise dose as is measured. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 273 of 389

274 NOISE EXPOSURE COMPUTATION AND RATING TABLES Age Correction Values in Decibels (reference tables F-1 and F-2). Audiometric test frequency (Hz) Age Difference The difference represents the amount of hearing loss that may be attributed to aging in the time period between the baseline audiogram and the most recent audiogram. In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 3 db. This value is subtracted from the hearing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjustments. Then the hearing threshold in the baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is subtracted from the adjusted annual audiogram-hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus, the age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 db (as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 db without age correction). Appendix A, 29 CFR Noise Exposure Computation Computation of Employee Noise Exposure When the sound level, L, is constant over the entire work shift, the noise dose, D, in percent, is given by: D = 100 C/T where C is the total length of the work day, in hours, and T is the reference duration corresponding to the measured sound level, L, as given in Table G-16a below or by the formula shown as a footnote to that table. When the work-shift noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise at different levels, the total noise dose over the work day is given by: D = 100 (C1/T1+C2/T Cn/Tn) Where Cn indicates the total time of exposure at a specific noise level, and Tn indicates the reference duration for that level as given by Table G-16a (as per attached). The eight-hour time weighted average sound level (TWA), in decibels, may be computed from the dose, in percent, by means of the formula: TWA = log10 (D/100) +90. For an eight-hour work shift with the noise level constant over the entire shift, the TWA is equal to the measured sound level. Conversion Between "Dose" and "8-Hour Time-Weighted Average" Sound Level Compliance will be determined by the amount of exposure to noise in the workplace, usually measured with an audio dosimeter which gives a readout in terms of "dose" and then converted to an "8 hour time weighted average" (TWA). Reference Table A-1 of the regulations to make the conversion. If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less than or greater than, the values found in Table A-1, the TWA may be calculated by using the formula: TWA = log10 (D/100) +90 where TWA = 8-hour time weighted average sound level and D = accumulated dose in percent exposure. Page 13 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 274 of 389

275 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 275 of 389

276 Appendix B, 29 CFR Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protector Attenuation For employees who have experienced a significant threshold shift, hearing protection provided will have an attenuation that is sufficient to reduce employee exposure to a TWA of 85 db. The following method will be used to estimate the adequacy of hearing protector attenuation (reduction or protectiveness). The Noise Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) will be used. Only approved hearing protection equipment showing the NRR on the hearing protector package will be used by the company. The NRR will be related to an individual employee's noise environment in order to assess the adequacy of the attenuation of a given hearing protector. When using the NRR to assess hearing protector adequacy, one of the following methods will be used: Dosimeter (C-weighted): o Obtain the C-weighted dose for the entire work shift, and convert to TWA. o Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. Dosimeter (not capable of C-weighted measurements): o Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA. o Subtract 7 db from the NRR. o Subtract the remainder from the A-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A weighted TWA under the ear protector. Sound level meter (set to the A-weighting network): o Obtain the A-weighted TWA. o Subtract 7 db from the NRR, and subtract the remainder from the A-weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted TWA under the ear protector. Sound level meter (set to the C-weighting network): o Obtain a representative sample of the C-weighted sound levels in the area. o Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted average sound level to obtain the estimated A- weighted TWA under the ear protector. When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter set to the A-weighing network. o Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question. o Subtract 7 db from the NRR and subtract the remainder from the A-weighted sound level for that area. When using area monitoring procedures and a sound level meter set to the C-weighting network: o Obtain a representative sound level for the area in question. o Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted sound level for that area. Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 276 of 389

277 NOISE EXPOSURE RATINGS TABLE A-1 Dose or percent noise TWA exposure Dose or percent noise TWA exposure Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 277 of 389

278 NOISE EXPOSURE RATINGS TABLE F-1 Age Correction Values in Decibels for Males Audiometric test frequency (Hz) Years Years & under & over Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 278 of 389

279 NOISE EXPOSURE RATINGS TABLE F-2 Age Correction Values in Decibels for Females Audiometric test frequency (Hz) Years Years & under & over Page 17 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 279 of 389

280 NOISE EXPOSURE RATINGS TABLE G 16-A A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) Reference duration, T (hour) A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) Reference duration, T (hour) In the above table the reference duration T is computed by where L is the measured A-weighted sound level. 8 T = (L-90)/5 Page 18 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 280 of 389

281 Text of Noise and Hearing Conservation Standard Must be posted in work areas where hearing protection is required (a) Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table G-16 when measured on the A scale of a standard sound level meter at slow response. When noise levels are determined by octave band analysis, the equivalent A-weighted sound level may be determined as follows: Equivalent sound level contours. Octave band sound pressure levels may be converted to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by plotting them on this graph and noting the A-weighted sound level corresponding to the point of highest penetration into the sound level contours. This equivalent A-weighted sound level, which may differ from the actual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is used to determine exposure limits from Table 1.G-16. Page 19 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 281 of 389

282 (b)(1) When employees are subjected to sound exceeding those listed in Table G-16, feasible administrative or engineering controls shall be utilized. If such controls fail to reduce sound levels within the levels of Table G-16, personal protective equipment shall be provided and used to reduce sound levels within the levels of the table (b)(2) If the variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of 1 second or less, it is to be considered continuous. TABLE G-16 - PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES (1) Duration per day, hours Sound level dba slow response / / /4 or less Footnote(1) When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect should be considered, rather than the individual effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions: C(1)/T(1) + C(2)/T(2) C(n)/T(n) exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be considered to exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total time of exposure at a specified noise level, and Tn indicates the total time of exposure permitted at that level. Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 db peak sound pressure level (c) "Hearing conservation program." (c)(1) The employer shall administer a continuing, effective hearing conservation program, as described in paragraphs (c) through (o) of this section, whenever employee noise exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels measured on the A scale (slow response) or, equivalently, a dose of fifty percent. For purposes of the hearing conservation program, employee noise exposures shall be computed in accordance with appendix A and Table G-16a, and without regard to any attenuation provided by the use of personal protective equipment (c)(2) For purposes of paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section, an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or a dose of fifty percent shall also be referred to as the action level (d) "Monitoring." (d)(1) When information indicates that any employee's exposure may equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels, the employer shall develop and implement a monitoring program (d)(1)(i) The sampling strategy shall be designed to identify employees for inclusion in the hearing conservation program and to enable the proper selection of hearing protectors (d)(1)(ii) Where circumstances such as high worker mobility, significant variations in sound level, or a significant component of impulse noise make area monitoring generally inappropriate, the employer shall use representative personal sampling to comply with the monitoring requirements of this paragraph unless the employer can show that area sampling produces equivalent results. Page 20 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 282 of 389

283 (d)(2)(i) All continuous, intermittent and impulsive sound levels from 80 decibels to 130 decibels shall be integrated into the noise measurements (d)(2)(ii) Instruments used to measure employee noise exposure shall be calibrated to ensure measurement accuracy (d)(3) Monitoring shall be repeated whenever a change in production, process, equipment or controls increases noise exposures to the extent that: (d)(3)(i) Additional employees may be exposed at or above the action level; or (d)(3)(ii) The attenuation provided by hearing protectors being used by employees may be rendered inadequate to meet the requirements of paragraph (j) of this section (e) "Employee notification." The employer shall notify each employee exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels of the results of the monitoring (f) "Observation of monitoring." The employer shall provide affected employees or their representatives with an opportunity to observe any noise measurements conducted pursuant to this section (g) "Audiometric testing program." (g)(1) The employer shall establish and maintain an audiometric testing program as provided in this paragraph by making audiometric testing available to all employees whose exposures equal or exceed an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels (g)(2) The program shall be provided at no cost to employees (g)(3) Audiometric tests shall be performed by a licensed or certified audiologist, otolaryngologist, or other physician, or by a technician who is certified by the Council of Accreditation in Occupational Hearing Conservation, or who has satisfactorily demonstrated competence in administering audiometric examinations, obtaining valid audiograms, and properly using, maintaining and checking calibration and proper functioning of the audiometers being used. A technician who operates microprocessor audiometers does not need to be certified. A technician who performs audiometric tests must be responsible to an audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician (g)(4) All audiograms obtained pursuant to this section shall meet the requirements of Appendix C: "Audiometric Measuring Instruments." (g)(5) "Baseline audiogram." (g)(5)(i) Within 6 months of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level, the employer shall establish a valid baseline audiogram against which subsequent audiograms can be compared (g)(5)(ii) "Mobile test van exception." Where mobile test vans are used to meet the audiometric testing obligation, the employer shall obtain a valid baseline audiogram within 1 year of an employee's first exposure at or above the action level. Where baseline audiograms are obtained more than 6 months after the employee's first exposure at or above the action level, employees shall wear hearing protectors for any period exceeding six months after first exposure until the baseline audiogram is obtained. Page 21 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 283 of 389

284 (g)(5)(iii) Testing to establish a baseline audiogram shall be preceded by at least 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise. Hearing protectors may be used as a substitute for the requirement that baseline audiograms be preceded by 14 hours without exposure to workplace noise (g)(5)(iv) The employer shall notify employees of the need to avoid high levels of non-occupational noise exposure during the 14-hour period immediately preceding the audiometric examination (g)(6) "Annual audiogram." At least annually after obtaining the baseline audiogram, the employer shall obtain a new audiogram for each employee exposed at or above an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels (g)(7) "Evaluation of audiogram." (g)(7)(i) Each employee's annual audiogram shall be compared to that employee's baseline audiogram to determine if the audiogram is valid and if a standard threshold shift as defined in paragraph (g)(10) of this section has occurred. This comparison may be done by a technician (g)(7)(ii) If the annual audiogram shows that an employee has suffered a standard threshold shift, the employer may obtain a retest within 30 days and consider the results of the retest as the annual audiogram (g)(7)(iii) The audiologist, otolaryngologist, or physician shall review problem audiograms and shall determine whether there is a need for further evaluation. The employer shall provide to the person performing this evaluation the following information: (g)(7)(iii)(A) A copy of the requirements for hearing conservation as set forth in paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section; (g)(7)(iii)(B) The baseline audiogram and most recent audiogram of the employee to be evaluated; (g)(7)(iii)(C) Measurements of background sound pressure levels in the audiometric test room as required in Appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms (g)(7)(iii)(D) Records of audiometer calibrations required by paragraph (h)(5) of this section (g)(8) "Follow-up procedures." (g)(8)(i) If a comparison of the annual audiogram to the baseline audiogram indicates a standard threshold shift as defined in paragraph (g)(10) of this section has occurred, the employee shall be informed of this fact in writing, within 21 days of the determination (g)(8)(ii) Unless a physician determines that the standard threshold shift is not work related or aggravated by occupational noise exposure, the employer shall ensure that the following steps are taken when a standard threshold shift occurs: (g)(8)(ii)(A) Employees not using hearing protectors shall be fitted with hearing protectors, trained in their use and care, and required to use them (g)(8)(ii)(B) Employees already using hearing protectors shall be refitted and retrained in the use of hearing protectors and provided with hearing protectors offering greater attenuation if necessary. Page 22 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 284 of 389

285 (g)(8)(ii)(C) The employee shall be referred for a clinical audiological evaluation or an otological examination, as appropriate, if additional testing is necessary or if the employer suspects that a medical pathology of the ear is caused or aggravated by the wearing of hearing protectors (g)(8)(ii)(D) The employee is informed of the need for an otological examination if a medical pathology of the ear that is unrelated to the use of hearing protectors is suspected (g)(8)(iii) If subsequent audiometric testing of an employee whose exposure to noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90 decibels indicates that a standard threshold shift is not persistent, the employer: (g)(8)(iii)(A) Shall inform the employee of the new audiometric interpretation; and (g)(8)(iii)(B) May discontinue the required use of hearing protectors for that employee (g)(9) "Revised baseline." An annual audiogram may be substituted for the baseline audiogram when, in the judgment of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or physician who is evaluating the audiogram: (g)(9)(i) The standard threshold shift revealed by the audiogram is persistent; or (g)(9)(ii) The hearing threshold shown in the annual audiogram indicates significant improvement over the baseline audiogram (g)(10) "Standard threshold shift." (g)(10)(i) As used in this section, a standard threshold shift is a change in hearing threshold relative to the baseline audiogram of an average of 10 db or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear (g)(10)(ii) In determining whether a standard threshold shift has occurred, allowance may be made for the contribution of aging (presbycusis) to the change in hearing level by correcting the annual audiogram according to the procedure described in Appendix F: "Calculation and Application of Age Correction to Audiograms." (h) "Audiometric test requirements." (h)(1) Audiometric tests shall be pure tone, air conduction, hearing threshold examinations, with test frequencies including as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. Tests at each frequency shall be taken separately for each ear (h)(2) Audiometric tests shall be conducted with audiometers (including microprocessor audiometers) that meet the specifications of, and are maintained and used in accordance with, American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S , which is incorporated by reference as specified in Sec (h)(3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording audiometers, if used, shall meet the requirements specified in Appendix C: "Audiometric Measuring Instruments." (h)(4) Audiometric examinations shall be administered in a room meeting the requirements listed in Appendix D: "Audiometric Test Rooms." (h)(5) "Audiometer calibration." Page 23 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 285 of 389

286 (h)(5)(i) The functional operation of the audiometer shall be checked before each day's use by testing a person with known, stable hearing thresholds, and by listening to the audiometer's output to make sure that the output is free from distorted or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 decibels or greater require an acoustic calibration (h)(5)(ii) Audiometer calibration shall be checked acoustically at least annually in accordance with Appendix E: "Acoustic Calibration of Audiometers." Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this check. Deviations of 15 decibels or greater require an exhaustive calibration (h)(5)(iii) An exhaustive calibration shall be performed at least every two years in accordance with sections 4.1.2; ; ; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of the American National Standard Specification for Audiometers, S Test frequencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this calibration (i) "Hearing protectors." (i)(1) Employers shall make hearing protectors available to all employees exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or greater at no cost to the employees. Hearing protectors shall be replaced as necessary (i)(2) Employers shall ensure that hearing protectors are worn: (i)(2)(i) By an employee who is required by paragraph (b)(1) of this section to wear personal protective equipment; and (i)(2)(ii) By any employee who is exposed to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or greater, and who: (i)(2)(ii)(A) Has not yet had a baseline audiogram established pursuant to paragraph (g)(5)(ii); or (i)(2)(ii)(B) Has experienced a standard threshold shift (i)(3) Employees shall be given the opportunity to select their hearing protectors from a variety of suitable hearing protectors provided by the employer (i)(4) The employer shall provide training in the use and care of all hearing protectors provided to employees (i)(5) The employer shall ensure proper initial fitting and supervise the correct use of all hearing protectors (j) "Hearing protector attenuation." (j)(1) The employer shall evaluate hearing protector attenuation for the specific noise environments in which the protector will be used. The employer shall use one of the evaluation methods described in Appendix B: "Methods for Estimating the Adequacy of Hearing Protection Attenuation." (j)(2) Hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure at least to an 8-hour time-weighted average of 90 decibels as required by paragraph (b) of this section (j)(3) For employees who have experienced a standard threshold shift, hearing protectors must attenuate employee exposure to an 8- hour time-weighted average of 85 decibels or below. Page 24 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 286 of 389

287 (j)(4) The adequacy of hearing protector attenuation shall be re-evaluated whenever employee noise exposures increase to the extent that the hearing protectors provided may no longer provide adequate attenuation. The employer shall provide more effective hearing protectors where necessary (k) "Training program." (k)(1) The employer shall institute a training program for all employees who are exposed to noise at or above an 8-hour timeweighted average of 85 decibels, and shall ensure employee participation in such program (k)(2) The training program shall be repeated annually for each employee included in the hearing conservation program. Information provided in the training program shall be updated to be consistent with changes in protective equipment and work processes (k)(3) The employer shall ensure that each employee is informed of the following: (k)(3)(i) The effects of noise on hearing; (k)(3)(ii) The purpose of hearing protectors, the advantages, disadvantages, and attenuation of various types, and instructions on selection, fitting, use, and care; and (k)(3)(iii) The purpose of audiometric testing, and an explanation of the test procedures (l) "Access to information and training materials." (l)(1) The employer shall make available to affected employees or their representatives copies of this standard and shall also post a copy in the workplace (l)(2) The employer shall provide to affected employees any informational materials pertaining to the standard that are supplied to the employer by the Assistant Secretary (l)(3) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials related to the employer's training and education program pertaining to this standard to the Assistant Secretary and the Director (m) "Recordkeeping" (m)(1) "Exposure measurements." The employer shall maintain an accurate record of all employee exposure measurements required by paragraph (d) of this section (m)(2) "Audiometric tests." (m)(2)(i) The employer shall retain all employee audiometric test records obtained pursuant to paragraph (g) of this section: (m)(2)(ii) This record shall include: (m)(2)(ii)(A) Name and job classification of the employee; (m)(2)(ii)(B) Date of the audiogram; (m)(2)(ii)(C) The examiner's name; Page 25 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 287 of 389

288 (m)(2)(ii)(D) Date of the last acoustic or exhaustive calibration of the audiometer; and (m)(2)(ii)(E) Employee's most recent noise exposure assessment (m)(2)(ii)(F) The employer shall maintain accurate records of the measurements of the background sound pressure levels in audiometric test rooms (m)(3) "Record retention." The employer shall retain records required in this paragraph (m) for at least the following periods (m)(3)(i) Noise exposure measurement records shall be retained for two years (m)(3)(ii) Audiometric test records shall be retained for the duration of the affected employee's employment (m)(4) "Access to records." All records required by this section shall be provided upon request to employees, former employees, representatives designated by the individual employee, and the Assistant Secretary. The provisions of 29 CFR (a)- (e) and (g) (m)(4)(i) apply to access to records under this section (m)(5) "Transfer of records." If the employer ceases to do business, the employer shall transfer to the successor employer all records required to be maintained by this section, and the successor employer shall retain them for the remainder of the period prescribed in paragraph (m)(3) of this section (n) "Appendices." (n)(1) Appendices A, B, C, D, and E to this section are incorporated as part of this section and the contents of these appendices are mandatory (n)(2) Appendices F and G to this section are informational and are not intended to create any additional obligations not otherwise imposed or to detract from any existing obligations (o) "Exemptions." Paragraphs (c) through (n) of this section shall not apply to employers engaged in oil and gas well drilling and servicing operations. Page 26 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 288 of 389

289 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER NOISE AND HEARING CONSERVATION Noise and Hearing Conservation Training Includes: Purpose of equipment Effects of noise on hearing ability Warning signs of hearing loss Sound levels and choosing the right protection Types and effectiveness of protective equipment How to wear equipment Care and maintenance of equipment Audiograms Recordkeeping and docuementation INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 27 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 289 of 389

290 CERTIFICATION OF HAZARD ASSESSMENT This is to certify that an evaluation has taken place for the tasks and activities performed at this workplace, that hazards have been identifie issued and its use enforced. Area Assessed: Assessment Completed By: TASK IDENTIFIED HAZARD Assessment Da Signature: REQU PROTE National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 290 of 389

291 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT ASSESSMENT Area Assessed: Date: Assessor(s): Description of Requirement Compliant? PPE PROGRAM FEATURES Is there a written program for the area (i.e., procedures, documentation)? Yes No Are responsibilities listed and assigned? Yes No PPE SURVEY/ASSESSMENT/ANALYSIS Are surveys/assessments structured (example: uses Hazard Recognition Checklist and JHA Form)? Are these surveys integrated with other parts of the company s safety program (example: JHA s and SOPs reflect PPE needs)? Yes Yes No No Are reassessments routinely scheduled? Yes No PPE EQUIPMENT SELECTION Does PPE meet current national standards (ANSI standards American National Standards Institute a recognized agency that provides guidance for specific equipment)? Does PPE selection involve the area Occupational Health and Safety Service provider(s)? Does the selection process and available equipment protect against identified hazards and allow for correct type, size, and fit? Is a process in place to ensure proper PPE supply and maintenance per procedure requirements? PPE TRAINING Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Is the content of the training program specific to the job, including: Yes No When PPE is necessary? What PPE is necessary? How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE? Limitations of PPE? Maintenance, care, useful life, disposal of PPE? Can the employee demonstrate: Yes No Understanding of training? Ability to use PPE? Is there a process in place to initiate retraining when: Yes No Process/workplace changes result in changed PPE requirements (skill/knowledge updates)? Observations of employee behavior show inadequate understanding? Page 14 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 291 of 389

292 Description of Requirement Compliant? EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE Do interviews with or observations of employees indicate that they know: Yes No When PPE is necessary? What PPE is necessary? How to properly don, doff, adjust, and wear PPE? How to properly maintain & care for PPE? When and how to properly dispose of PPE at the end of its useful life? RECORDKEEPING Do workplace assessment documents show: Yes No Identity as Certificate of Hazard Assessment? Name of workplace(s) evaluated? Name of person(s) completing the evaluation? Date(s) of assessment? Is attendance for training officially recorded? Yes No Do records indicate that all PPE training is current? Yes No Do records indicate that all new employees receive all necessary PPE training before they begin work? Yes No Page 15 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 292 of 389

293 PROGRAM OVERVIEW PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: 29 CFR INTRODUCTION: Personal protective equipment, when its use is required, must be provided or used by employees where engineering and work practice controls are not sufficient to prevent exposure to a hazard. The type of personal protective equipment and the reasons for its use must be documented. Where required, employees must be trained in how to use the equipment, reasons for its use, the care and maintenance of the equipment and disposal considerations. TRAINING: General training and information is required for employees who use equipment Formal training is required for specific types and uses of equipment (respirators, hearing protection, etc.) ACTIVITIES: Identify risk factors for employee exposures Provide protective equipment, as required Ensure employees are trained in the use, care and maintenance of the equipment Document requirements for Personal Protective Equipment FORMS: Certification of Hazard Assessment Assessment Respirator - Dust Mask Use Sign-off Training Attendance Roster 1. Purpose 2. Scope 3. Responsibilities 4. Procedure 5. Safety Information 6. Training and Information 7. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 293 of 389

294 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Safety Program 1. Purpose. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) shall be used in areas where there is potential exposure to hazards which cannot be adequately controlled by elimination, substitution, engineering methods or administrative controls. PPE is to be considered the last line of defense against exposure to chemical hazards, radiation hazards, biological agents, temperature extremes, noise, electrical energy, mechanical forces, irritants, or projectiles which can produce injury or illness. This defines the required elements for implementing a Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) program. 1.1 Exclusions: PPE requirements for hearing conservation, fall protection, cartridge type respiratory protection and eyebaths and safety shower programs are covered in separate, specific standards; PPE for electrical work is not fully covered within this document, but can be referenced within the Electrical Safety program. Back Belts and Wrist Braces used in mitigation of ergonomic disorders as part of an ergonomics evaluation are not considered PPE. 2. Scope. Applies to any area where specific control measures or Personal Protective Equipment is required or used by company employees. Job hazard analysis will be performed in areas where job or task activities may require an evaluation of hazard potential and a determination of protective controls prior to the implementation of Personal Protective Equipment Requirements. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management: Ensure that all jobs and tasks have been evaluated and hazards appropriately addressed. Where possible, hazards will be controlled before the use of PPE is implemented. Controls include: Elimination of a product or process that generates the hazard, Substitution of a non-hazardous or less-hazardous material or chemical, Engineering methods such as ventilation or guarding, and Administrative controls such as procedures or task rotation Select the appropriate PPE to reduce or eliminate hazards, based on the types of tasks and activities performed at the company Write PPE use procedures for tasks or activities that require PPE, or include PPE requirements in existing work and task procedures Maintain PPE, or provide employees with the proper training and tools to maintain PPE used at the company Post signs, as required, to inform employees where PPE is required (e.g. aisles, machine shop areas, production areas or at entrances to buildings if entire facility requires use) Provide appropriate protective equipment to visitors or other personnel, as needed or required At least annually, assess the needs for continued (or additional) PPE use and requirements. These assessments should be documented as proof that PPE is or is not required for certain tasks or activities. Documentation in the procedure is adequate to fulfill this need, however any specific testing or monitoring results will need to be documented and maintained separately. 3.2 Employees: Follow established procedures National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 294 of 389

295 3.2.2 Maintain PPE, as required by this program Employee-owned equipment. Where employees provide their own protective equipment, the employer shall be responsible to assure its adequacy, including proper maintenance, and sanitation of such equipment Assist in providing assessment and documentation of PPE requirements Report concerns, issues or violations of this program to Supervisors or management. 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist in hazard evaluation Assist in the selection of PPE based on the hazards presented Assist in the writing of PPE procedures, or in the inclusion of PPE requirements into existing procedures Assist in the assessment and documentation of PPE needs for the company 4.1 Hazard Evaluation and Determination: Ensure hazard assessments, proper selection of controls and equipment, and certifications of hazard assessments have been completed and documented. This hazard assessment must be documented on the Certification of Hazard Assessment Form, or an equivalent document. 4.2 PPE Selection: PPE requirements must be documented. Although specific areas may have general PPE requirements (such as safety glasses or hard hats), it is recommended that you evaluate specific job tasks for hazards that may require additional or more stringent PPE use, and maintain the documentation associated with the assessment Hazard assessments shall be performed in all areas to identify hazards that require the use of PPE and specify the appropriate type and style of PPE for the job A hazard assessment must be completed before any non-routine task (task not evaluated as part of the current hazard assessments) is started and before changes are made to operating procedures and when incidents result from inadequate controls or PPE Obtain the appropriate PPE. Selected PPE may include: Eye and Face Protection; Hand and Arm Protection; Foot Protection; Head Protection; and Torso and Body Protection. 4.3 Written Procedures: The type of PPE must protect against the hazards identified Selection decisions must be communicated to each affected employee Selected PPE must fit each affected employee. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 295 of 389

296 4.4 Signs: PPE or control measures must be incorporated into the written standard operating procedures for the task or process. Where appropriate, include precautions to be taken when working around moving machinery (i.e. items such as long hair, neckties, jewelry, and loose or flowing clothing shall be appropriately restrained, confined, or removed to avoid entanglement) Signs will be posted, as needed or required to warn employees and other personnel when protective equipment is required Signs may read Safety Glasses Required ; DANGER Eye/Face Hazard area Do Not Enter Without Protective Equipment ; or DANGER Hard Hat Required Area or similar language may be used. 4.5 Training: Ensure employees have documented training in the requirements including: when needed, use, fit, care, maintenance, useful life, disposal, and limitations of PPE Employees must demonstrate their understanding of the training and ability to properly use PPE before performing work. This can be done at the time of training (quizzes, classroom discussion, etc.) or through demonstration of work practices in the workplace Retraining will be performed when changes to the workplace necessitate different equipment or when changes to the type/design of the PPE are made which require a new skill or knowledge for its successful use. Retraining will also be done when an employee exhibits a lack of understanding or skill to use the equipment properly. Retraining may also be required if an incident occurs involving PPE. 4.6 Documentation practices are maintained for the following items: Training records must be maintained so that records exist to indicate: What tasks or activities require training Who has had training Certification of Hazard Assessment: A Certification of Hazard Assessment shall be completed as verification that a hazard assessment was performed for the facility. The "certification document" may be completed by job task or operation, for buildings, or for organizations. Supervisors or area management must verify that the required documentation is completed. If you do not use the provided form for this purpose, your documentation must specifically be identified as a "Certification of Hazard Assessment", and contain all the required elements (person certifying, date, location evaluated) This document shall be maintained in a designated location This document shall be updated for changes to operating procedures, when the method of performing the job changes and/or when incident investigations determine those PPE modifications are necessary Other documentation is acceptable as certification (e.g., confined space permits or job health and safety programs written specifically for the task/operation that specifies the necessary PPE) provided they contain the required elements. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 296 of 389

297 4.7 Access to and Maintenance of PPE: Ensure adequate supplies, storage, and employee access to PPE when required for a specific work area or operation PPE must be maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition. Ensure that damaged or defective PPE is taken out of service and not used, and that contaminated clothing and PPE are disposed of or cleaned properly. 4.8 Change Management: Notify management or safety representatives of changes or modifications to procedures which may require a reassessment of PPE use. 4.9 Annual Assessment: Review and assess PPE needs and effectiveness, using the provided form or an equivalent assessment tool. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 PPE Selection Process: Review sample, manufacturer information and pricing information. MSDS s and/or chemical permeation data may also be required during committee review Determine if other appropriate information needs to be reviewed Determine if a pilot study is needed. This will be done to obtain user feedback on the item to determine potential concerns Review item after pilot study for final determination to use or not Submit manufacturer and pricing information to purchasing agent, or management, if use is approved For chemical protective clothing, manufacturer information is maintained by the company. For suits, gloves, apron, eyewear/goggles -- generic chemical permeation data (what the item is resistant to or not resistant to for general groupings of chemicals) will be maintained). 5.2 Types of PPE and Their Use(s): Eye Protection: General Application: Only safety glasses and face protection meeting ANSI Z87 requirements shall be worn An optometrist or ophthalmologist may be required to conduct eye examinations and may issue prescription (or specialized fit prescription) safety glasses as appropriate to the needs of the employee. When side shields are required to be worn with prescription glasses, the employee is responsible for notifying the eye-care professional to ensure that the side shields are provided for specific frames. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 297 of 389

298 While waiting for new prescription glasses, employees shall be provided "cover-all" safety eyewear that fits over prescription eyewear or be placed on a job which does not require eye protection Visitor-type safety glasses are for "visitors" or temporary use and should NOT be used for every-day eye protection Specialized Application Tinted safety-glasses or lenses may be supplied for special circumstances (e.g. tinting for certain precision jobs in glare areas and outdoor work) In special applications, such as welding or laser operations, helpers shall be protected to the same level as the operator Temporary personnel (those who enter an eye-protection area infrequently or for short periods of time) shall be supplied with nonprescription type safety glasses if they do not require prescription lenses or be supplied with cover-all eyewear to be worn over prescription glasses if necessary Individuals, who work on or near exposed electrically energized circuit parts, at 50 volts and above, shall wear non-conductive eyewear. Nonconductive eyewear is also necessary for individuals exposed to electrical burn hazards (e.g.: working on systems less than 50 volts, but with high current levels such as electroplating systems, large capacity batteries, etc.). Metal frame glasses are not permitted for these activities Where contact lenses are permitted, they shall be worn with required PPE appropriate to the exposure (e.g.: respiratory protection, welding helmets, etc.). As warranted, specific assessments of the work environment may be conducted by safety service providers to resolve concerns or questions. Safety non-prescription glasses shall be available to all wearers of contact lenses Employees shall wear appropriate eye or face protection (e.g.: goggles, face shields) when splash or other eye injury hazards exist. Hazards requiring such protection include, but are not limited to: flying particles molten metals liquid chemicals acids or caustic fumes or liquids chemical gases or vapors light radiation sources (e.g.: lasers, welding operations, ultraviolet light) Eye and Face protection shall be cleaned and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 298 of 389

299 5.2.2 Gloves and Hand Protection: General: Latex Gloves: Foot Protection: Gloves, gauntlets, and protective sleeves are designed to protect the hands and arms of individuals who may be exposed to skin contact and/or absorption of chemical or biological agents, cuts or lacerations, abrasions, punctures, chemical burns, thermal burns, or harmful temperature extremes. Materials used in the manufacture of clothing must be resistant to the chemicals or materials being handled Safety or Industrial Hygiene representatives may arrange for chemical resistance tests when appropriate, provide for consultation on the types of protection available, and assist in determining appropriate protection Barrier creams shall not be used as protection against chemical contact, unless specifically approved by a medical professional Laundering of gloves used for chemical or biological protection is prohibited Jewelry should be removed before wearing gloves and washing hands Gloves shall be removed properly so as not to exposed an unprotected hand or part of the arm After removing gloves, hands should be thoroughly washed with soap and water When sharing gloves, such as when using a glove box, disposable gloves should be used as a liner Cuff the ends of gloves when feasible Disposable style gloves used for splash protection shall be disposed of at the end of each working day, at a minimum. Chemical contact, signs of physical wear, or loss of glove integrity shall require more frequent disposal Gloves should be properly stored, away from sunlight, direct artificial light, and electrical equipment Lay the gloves flat and avoid temperature and humidity extremes during glove storage Due to the increasing concerns with latex gloves and associated skin reactions, latex gloves may be selected based on latex content, protein content (usually <50ug/g) or other requirements based on employee needs. Gloves may be required to be powdered or powder-free, depending upon the needs of the business activities. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 299 of 389

300 Where safety shoes and additional foot protection is required (over and above that provided by normal footwear ) only foot protection meeting ANSI Z41 requirements shall be worn Waterproof, static dissipative (SD), electrostatic dissipative (ESD), electric hazard (EH), metatarsal protection, and rubber footwear where required will be available for purchase through designated company sources Where dissipation is required, such as in areas where quantities of flammable materials are handled, shoes should be SD rated. Non-conductive insoles may void the static dissipation properties. Safety shoe providers will verify SD properties Electricians should select EH rated shoes and/or use insulating mats when working on or near energized equipment Metatarsal Guards: Protectors for the metatarsal (top of foot) area are designed to provide additional protection against injury when handling heavy objects subject to falling or rolling Rubber footwear may be mandated by the nature of some operations Rubber shoe covers and boots, including boots with built-in steel toes Conductive rubbers must be used with SD rated shoes to maintain the static dissipating property Rubber overshoe footwear may be required Foot protection shall be cleaned and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions Safety shoe conductivity meters need to be annually calibrated. Calibration is needed because the meters are powered by batteries which can display false values when the battery strength is low Head Protection (shall comply with ANSI Z89): General: Hard Hats are designed to provide protection against impact and penetration from falling objects. They also may provide protection against electrical shock and burns caused when coming in contact with energized parts. There are two types and three classes of hard hats. They type and class used or required at the facility or site will be documented based on the hazards Head protection shall be cleaned and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions Other Types of Head Protection: Bump Caps -- Provide protection from impact against stationary objects but do NOT protect against impact or penetration from falling objects or electrical shock hazards Welding Helmets -- Provide protection against ultraviolet, infrared, and visible radiation sources during welding operations. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 300 of 389

301 5.2.5 Protective Clothing: General: Fire Fighting Helmets -- Provide protection from extreme heat encountered during a fire or similar conditions Hair Nets/Hats -- Protect employees from entanglement hazards (e.g. equipment with moving parts, etc.) This can be done with the use of hair restraining devices, such as hair nets, hats, etc Clothing such as suits, aprons, coveralls, coats, and pants are available to protect the torso and body of individuals who may be exposed to skin absorption of chemical or biological agents, cuts or lacerations, abrasions, punctures, chemical burns, thermal burns, or harmful temperature extremes. Materials used in the manufacture of such clothing must be matched in resistance to the chemicals or materials being handled Safety/Industrial Hygiene will arrange for chemical resistance tests when appropriate, provide for consultation on the types of protection available, and assist in determining appropriate protection See other documentation within this procedure for company policy on laundering of contaminated clothing Company provided clothing: Laundering of company-issued work clothing shall be provided by the company to avoid the need for employees to launder clothing at home whenever there is a potential for chemical contamination such as asbestos, lead, cadmium, arsenic, sensitizers, etc Respiratory (Dust Mask) Protection: This section applies to employees at any company facility or jobsite where the use of respiratory protective equipment (a dust mask) is utilized, either by requirement or voluntary use by employees Selection of respirator protective capabilities will be made according to the specific hazard involved. The company will provide NIOSH certified dust mask respirators Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they are potentially exposed during routine and emergency situations is required. Training must be provided before exposure or use of the equipment and when changes occur in the workplace. Training records must include the date of training, employee's name, and the trainer signature or initials Training of employees in the proper use (including putting them on and removing them), limitations and maintenance of respirators is required. Respirators will be inspected by the user before each use to ensure the face mask is intact and the head straps are snug fitting Procedures and schedules for storing, inspecting, repairing, and discarding respirators should be maintained. The company will provide each respirator user with a respirator that is initially clean, sanitary, and in good working order. Dust mask type respirators will be packed or stored to prevent deformation of the face piece and/or exhalation valve. Respirators that fail an inspection or are otherwise found to be defective will be removed from service, and discarded. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 301 of 389

302 6. Training and Information Face-piece seal protection. Facial hair or other conditions that interfere with the contact of the face to the face-piece of the respirator is prohibited Surveillance of conditions of use. Appropriate surveillance and evaluations of the working conditions will be performed to assess the degree of employee exposure and stress associated with respirator use, and the effectiveness of the respirators Employees must leave the respirator use area when they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance or leakage of the face-piece. In these situations, respirators must be replaced prior to the employee returning to the work area Recordkeeping: The company will establish and retain written information regarding the respirator use. An appropriate Information for Voluntary Respirator Use form or equivalent Appendix D from the OSHA standard will be maintained for each respirator user. 6.1 Employees must be trained in the limitations, proper use, cleaning, storage and disposal practices for any PPE used in the workplace 7. Definitions. Emergency situation - Any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled significant release of an airborne contaminant. Employee exposure - Exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection. Filter or air purifying element - A component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid aerosols from the inspired air. Filtering facepiece (dust mask) - A negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) - Devices worn to protect employees from potential hazards encountered in the workplace. Hazard Assessment - An evaluation of the workplace to determine if hazards are present (or are likely to be present) which necessitate the use of PPE. Certification of Hazard Assessment - Certification that the Hazard Assessment has been conducted. This document must contain: Identification of the workplace evaluated Name of person(s) verifying that the evaluation has been performed Date of assessment Documentation of Training - Documentation that the affected employee has received and understood the required training, and containing: Name of the trained employee Date of training Identification of the type of personal protective equipment National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 302 of 389

303 To the employer: To the employee: EMPLOYEE INFORMATION Employee Name: Facility: Job Title: Information for Filtering Facepiece ( Dust Mask ) Use When Respirators Not Required Under 29 CFR The statement below must be read by all employees (or read to them in an understandable fashion) who are using filtering facepiece (dust mask type) respirators when cartridge or supplied airline respirators are not required o be provided. A copy of this document should be given to the employee. Ensure you keep a copy of this form for your personal records. ID/Clock Number: Work Location: Dept./Phone: VERIFICATION: I acknowledge that I have read and/or understand the information below (OSHA Respiratory Protection Statement) as is required by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). EMPLOYEE SIGNATURE: DATE: OSHA RESPIRATORY PROTECTION STATEMENT To The User: Respirators are an effective method of protection against designated hazards when properly selected and worn. Respirator use is encouraged, even when exposures are below the exposure limit, to provide an additional level of comfort and protection for workers. However, if a respirator is used improperly or not kept clean, the respirator itself can become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes, workers may wear respirators to avoid exposures to hazards, even if the amount of hazardous substance does not exceed the limits set by OSHA standards. If your employer provides respirators for your voluntary use, of if you provide your own respirator, you need to take certain precautions to be sure that the respirator itself does not present a hazard. You Should Do The Following: Read and heed all instructions provided by the manufacturer on use, maintenance, cleaning and care, and warnings regarding the respirators limitations. Choose respirators certified for use to protect against the contaminant of concern. NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, certifies respirators. A label or statement of certification should appear on the respirator or respirator packaging. It will tell you what the respirator is designed for and how much it will protect you. Do not wear your respirator into atmospheres containing contaminants for which your respirator is not designed to protect against. For example, a respirator designed to filter dust particles will not protect you against gases, vapors, or very small solid particles of fumes or smoke. Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use someone else's respirator. FORM RETENTION INFORMATION Retention File: Date Filed: Location: Filed By: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 303 of 389

304 Page 22 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 304 of 389

305 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Personal Protective Equipment Training Includes: Hazards and Workplace Requirements Using and Maintaining PPE Eye and Face Protection Foot Protection Hand Protection Head Protection Hearing Protection Body and Clothing Protection Dust Masks INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 16 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 305 of 389

306 LADDER SAFETY CHECKLIST Date Assessed: Ladder Number: Side rails are intact with no cracks or splinters All rungs are present, tight, and straight No parts are missing or bent All hardware is in place and in good condition Spreaders lock in place when opened Safety feet are in place and in good condition Rungs are clean and dry Weight tolerance is clearly visible Location: Inspected By: Y E S N O C Page 8 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 306 of 389

307 PROGRAM OVERVIEW PORTABLE LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR Portable Wood Ladders - 29 CFR Portable Metal Ladders - 29 CFR INTRODUCTION: Details minimum requirements for the construction, care, and use of the common types of portable ladders ensuring safety use under normal conditions. The program has provisions for wood, fiberglass and metal ladders and describes procurement and disposal methods. TRAINING: Employers must train all employees to recognize hazards of ladder use, the inspection of ladders and in the limitations of ladders to minimize the risk exposure. ACTIVITIES: Ensure the appropriate type of ladder is selected based on the nature of the project Ensure employees are trained in the inspection techniques used to inspect ladders, and in the safe use of ladders Ensure ladder inspections are performed Ensure ladders are properly repaired and maintained in accordance with regulatory standards or are properly disposed of when they are found to be defective (and or are removed from service) Ladders will be selected based on the type of work anticipated to be performed, and in accordance with applicable OSHA regulatory standards FORMS: Ladder Safety Checklist Training attendance roster 8. Purpose 9. Scope 10. Responsibilities 11. Procedure 12. Safety Information 13. Training and Information 14. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 307 of 389

308 Portable Ladder Safety Program 1. Purpose. Effective implementation for the safe use of ladders requires a written safety program fully endorsed and advocated by the highest level of management within our company. This safety program is designed to establish safe use and handling requirements and will be communicated to all required personnel. It encompasses the total workplace regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis 1.2 When changes occur to the governing regulatory standards 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document 2. Scope. This program applies to the total workplace, regardless of the number of workers, work shifts or numbers and types of ladders used. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management and Supervisors: Procure the appropriate type of portable ladders Ensure employees are trained (as needed or required) in the inspection techniques used to inspect ladders and in the safe use of ladders (proper pitch, angle and hazard awareness) Ensure ladder inspections are performed (daily or pre-use checklist, and thorough periodic inspection) Ensure ladders are properly repaired in accordance with regulatory standards or properly disposed of when they are found to be defective or are removed from service 3.2 Employees: Inspect ladders daily or before each use if ladders are not used daily DO NOT USE ladders that have not passed inspection Notify management or Supervisors if ladders are found to be defective and promptly tag them with a DO NOT USE sign and remove them from service National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 308 of 389

309 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Train employees in ladder inspection techniques Provide recommendations for procurement, repair and disposal of ladders. 4.1 General Requirements. All facilities and equipment owned by the company will be maintained in a safe and healthful manner. Certain work conditions may contain a reasonable probability of injury that can be prevented by proper maintenance and supervision. The company will do all possible to ensure the safety of our employees. No employee will knowingly be subjected to a hazardous condition without all possible protective measures first being implemented. 4.2 Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following precautions concerning the care and use of fiberglass/wooden ladders will be observed: Fiberglass/wooden ladder care. The following safety precautions will be observed in connection with the care of fiberglass/wooden ladders: Ladders will be maintained in good condition at all times, the joint between the steps and side rails will be tight, all hardware and fittings securely attached, and the movable parts will operate freely without binding or undue play Metal bearings of locks, wheels, pulleys, etc., will be frequently lubricated Frayed or badly worn rope will be replaced Safety feet and other auxiliary equipment will be kept in good condition to ensure proper performance Ladders will be inspected frequently and those which have developed defects will be withdrawn from service for repair or destruction and tagged or marked as "Dangerous, Do Not Use." Rungs should be kept free of grease and oil Fiberglass/wooden ladder use. The following safety precautions will be observed in connection with the use of fiberglass/wooden ladders: Portable rung and cleat ladders will, where possible, be used at such a pitch that the horizontal distance from the top support to the foot of the ladder is one-quarter of the working length of the ladder (the length along the ladder between the foot and the top support). The ladder will be so placed as to prevent slipping, or it will be lashed, or held in position. Ladders will not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, runways, or scaffolds. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 309 of 389

310 Ladders for which dimensions are specified should not be used by more than one person at a time or with ladder jacks and scaffold planks where use by more than one person is anticipated. In such cases, specially designed ladders with larger dimensions of the parts should be procured Portable ladders will be so placed that the side rails have a secure footing. The top rest for portable rung and cleat ladders will be reasonably rigid and will have ample strength to support the applied load Ladders will not be placed in front of doors opening toward the ladder unless the door is blocked, locked, or guarded Ladders will not be placed on boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases to obtain additional height Ladders with broken or missing steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side rails, or other faulty equipment will not be used, ladders having any of these conditions present will be destroyed and disposed of. Improvised repairs will not be made Short ladders will not be spliced together to provide long sections Ladders made by fastening cleats across a single rail will not be used Ladders will not be used as guys, braces, or skids, or for other than their intended purposes Tops of ordinary stepladders will not be used as steps On two-section extension ladders the minimum overlap for the two sections in use will be as follows: Size of Ladder (in Feet) Overlap (in Feet) Up to and including 36 3 Over 36 up to and including 48 4 Over 48 up to and including Portable rung ladders with reinforced rails will only be used with the metal reinforcement on the under side No ladder should be used to gain access to a roof or elevated work area unless the top of the ladder is extended at least 3 feet above the point of support All portable rung ladders will be equipped with non-slip bases when there is a hazard of slipping. Non-slip bases are not intended as a substitute for care in safely placing, lashing, or holding a ladder that is being used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slippery surfaces. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 310 of 389

311 The bracing on the back legs of step ladders is designed solely for increasing stability and not for climbing. 4.3 Portable Fiberglass/Wooden Ladders. In order to ensure safety under normal conditions of usage, the company will purchase and maintain portable fiberglass/wooden ladders that conform to the following minimum requirements for the construction, care, and use of common types of portable fiberglass/wooden ladders General requirements Materials. All fiberglass/wooden parts will be maintained free from sharp edges and splinters; sound and free from accepted visual inspection from shake, wane, compression failures, decay, or other irregularities Step spacing. Must not be more than 12 inches. Steps will be parallel and level when the ladder is in position for use Side rail width. The minimum width between side rails at the top, inside to inside, must not be less than 11 1/2 inches. From top to bottom, the side rails must spread at least 1 inch for each foot of length of stepladder Metal spreaders/locking devices. A metal spreader or locking device of sufficient size and strength to securely hold the front and back sections in open positions must be properly maintained for each stepladder. The spreader must have all sharp points covered or removed to protect the user Portable stepladders. Stepladders longer than 20 feet will not be used. Stepladders of one of the following types specified will be used: Type I--Industrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet for heavy duty, such as utilities, contractors, and industrial use Type II--Commercial stepladder, 3 to 12 feet for medium duty, such as painters, offices, and light industrial use Type III--Household stepladder, 3 to 6 feet for light duty, such as light household use Portable rung ladders Single ladder. Single ladders longer than 30 feet will not be used Two-section ladder. Two-section extension ladders longer than 60 feet will not be used Trestle and extension trestle ladder. Trestle ladders, or extension sections or base sections of extension trestle ladders longer than 20 feet will not be used. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 311 of 389

312 4.3.4 Special-purpose ladders Painter's stepladder. Painter's stepladders longer than 12 feet will not be used. 4.4 Metal Ladders Mason's ladder. A mason's ladder is defined as a special type of single ladder intended for use in heavy construction work. Mason's ladders longer than 40 feet will not be used General Requirements. The company will purchase only ladders without structural defects or potential accident hazards such as sharp edges, burrs, etc. The company will purchase ladders meeting industrial grade specifications. Homemade or in-house constructed ladders will not be used Metal ladder care. The following safety precautions will be observed in connection with the care of metal ladders: Ladders must be maintained in good usable condition at all times If a ladder is involved in any of the following, immediate inspection is necessary: If ladders tip over, inspect ladder for side rails dents or bends, or excessively dented rungs; check all rung-to-siderail connections; check hardware connections; check rivets for shear If ladders are exposed to oil and grease, equipment should be cleaned of oil, grease, or slippery materials. This can easily be done with a solvent or steam cleaning Ladders having defects are to be marked and taken out of service until repaired by either maintenance department or the manufacturer Metal ladder use. The following safety precautions will be observed in connection with the use/care of metal ladders: A simple rule for setting up a ladder at the proper angle is to place the base a distance from the vertical wall equal to one-fourth the working length of the ladder Portable ladders are designed as a one-man working ladder based on a 200-pound load The ladder base section must be placed with a secure footing. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 312 of 389

313 5. Safety Information The top of the ladder must be placed with the two rails supported, unless equipped with a single support attachment When ascending or descending, the climber must face the ladder Ladders must not be tied or fastened together to provide longer sections. They must be equipped with the hardware fittings necessary if the manufacturer endorses extended uses Ladders should not be used as a brace, skid, guy or gin pole, gangway, or for other uses than that for which they were intended, unless specifically recommended for use by the manufacturer Metal ladders will not be used when work is performed on or near electric circuits. See 29 CFR No new metal ladders will be purchased. All metal ladders removed from service for any reason will be replaced with fiberglass ladders. 5.1 Procurement and Disposal of Ladders. All procurement and disposal of ladders will be performed through or with the knowledge of the Safety Officer or other designated person. Ladders will be destroyed beyond use prior to disposal to prevent further use by anyone. Procurement of ladders will be accomplished based on the type of work anticipated to be performed and in accordance with this safety program and applicable OSHA regulatory standards. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 Employees will be trained, as needed or required, in the inspection techniques related to daily or pre-use ladder inspections. 6.2 Employees will be trained in the safe use requirements of ladders (pitch, angle, etc.) and in their limitations of use (not near electrical current, not placed on top of other materials to increase height, etc.). 7. Definitions. None at this time National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 313 of 389

314 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER PORTABLE AND FIXED LADDERS AND MOBILE STAIRS Portable Ladders and Mobile Stairs Training Includes: General Ladder Safety Requirements Inspection of Equipment Portable Step Ladder Use Portable Rung Ladder Use Fixed Ladder Use Mobile Stairs Use INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 9 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 314 of 389

315 MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT REPORT Driver Name Company Name Employee or driver Business Address Business Phone Was vehicle being used for company business? Yes No Operator Driver s License # License Restrictions? If Yes, specify: Previous accidents with company vehicles? Yes No Yes No License Plate # Year Make Model # of Passengers Vehicle: Describe damages to company vehicle Owned Leased? Owner Car 2 Phone Number Owner Car 3 Phone Number Address (street, city, zip) Address (street, city, zip) Driver Name License Plate Number Driver Name License Plate Number Other Vehicles Driver Address (street, city, zip) Driver Address (street, city, zip) Vehicle Make Model Year Vehicle Make Model Year Name of Passengers (if any) Name of Passengers (if any) Describe Damage Describe Damage Insurance Company Policy # State DL Number Insurance Company Policy # State DL Number Other Property Injured Parties Fully Describe Damage Name and Address of Owner Name Extent of Injury Age Veh 1 Other Veh 2 Other Veh 3 Ped Name Address Phone Number Witnesses Other Reports Police Involvement? Yes No Citation Issued? Yes No Which Police Agency? To Whom? State City Town County Sheriff Other: Vehicle 1 Vehicle 2 Vehicle 3 Page 6 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 315 of 389

316 Check all that apply: MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENT REPORT Straight Road Curve Right Curve Left With Turning Lane One Lane Two Lane Three Lane Four Lane Level Hill Crest Hill Uphill Hill Downhill Attach a drawing or show on the diagram below, the position of each car, vehicle or injured person, indicating (with an arrow) the direction of travel of each. If the street or view was obstructed in any way, indicate where and how; also indicate any traffic signals or devices, or signs, including lines on the road. DRIVER: SUPERVISOR: Print Name: Print Name: Signature: Signature: Report completed by (if different) Date: Page 7 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 316 of 389

317 PROGRAM OVERVIEW SAFE DRIVING AND VEHICLE/FLEET SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA General Duty Clause INTRODUCTION: Company owned or leased vehicles must be maintained in proper condition, and drivers appropriately licensed to operate the type of vehicle. This program outlines the basic inspection techniques for using a company owned or leased vehicle. This program also outlines the basic safety requirements for operating both company owned and leased vehicles and for personal vehicles used for company business purposes. TRAINING: Appropriate driver s licenses for the type of vehicle are required. Basic driver safety is recommended for employees who use vehicles for company business. ACTIVITIES: Inspect vehicles prior to operation FORMS: Motor Vehicle Accident Report Safe Driving Vehicle Inspection Training Attendance Roster 1. Purpose 2. Scope 3. Responsibilities 4. Procedure 5. Safety Information 6. Training and Information 7. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 317 of 389

318 Safe Driving and Fleet and Vehicle Management Safety Program 6. Purpose. This program outlines the recommendations for managing and inspecting automobiles and trucks used by company employees for business reasons. 7. Scope. This program applies to vehicles owned or leased by the company and to employee owned vehicles used for company business. 8. Responsibilities. 8.1 Management: Ensure drivers are licensed and certified for the type of vehicle driven, without restrictions on their licenses Where MVR reports are required annually or for pre-employment, ensure an adequate process to obtain and confidentially maintain this information is in place Ensure any vehicles are properly inspected, registered and maintained Ensure seat belts, safety chains for snow and other equipment is available and functional, as needed or required Ensure vehicle insurance is in place for any owned or leased vehicles Ensure only authorized employees will drive motor vehicles Revoke the driving privileges for employees driving company owned or leased vehicles where the driving record or ability of the employee may be in question. 8.2 Employees or Drivers: Ensure your driver s license is current Ensure your driver s license is the appropriate type for the vehicle being used Inspect vehicles before driving Ensure you are capable of driving safely (physical, emotional and mental health) 8.3 Safety Officer: 9. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of the written program, as needed. 9.1 General Requirements: Only authorized personnel may drive company vehicles Driving while under the influence of alcohol, inhalants or illegal drugs, or after taking any medications that may impair authorized drivers driving ability is prohibited Drivers must obey all traffic signals and devices, and obey traffic laws at all times Seatbelts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 318 of 389

319 9.1.5 Only company authorized persons may ride as a passenger in a company owned or leased vehicle, based on company policy Drivers may only use hands-free style phone systems when the vehicle is in motion, based on state requirements. 9.2 Break Downs Involving Company Vehicles: Drivers must notify the company as soon as possible after any accident or incident with a company vehicle, regardless of how minor the incident may have been Contact your supervisor or manager immediately for assistance obtaining towing or repair If the company subscribes to a vehicle service agency (like AAA or other road-service provider), follow the established procedure for contacting that agency. 9.3 Vehicular Accidents. In the event of an accident, remain calm. Our first priority is the health and safety of our employees. Employees involved in a work-related vehicular accident must: Contact the appropriate local law enforcement agency. Even if the incident is minor, a police report is required for all vehicular accidents involving a company owned vehicle or for those occurring while the employee is performing company business Notify company management or Supervisors as soon as possible If possible, leave vehicles in their positions until the police arrive Do not discuss the accident with others involved. Share your observations only with the police Exchange, if possible, the following information with all other drivers involved: The driver s name The names of all other passengers (per involved vehicle) The driver s/auto insurance information The other vehicle information: make, model, year, color, and license plate number The name of the driver s employer if the driver was traveling for business 10. Safety Information If property damage occurred to a vehicle of an unknown owner (e.g. a parked car) or other property (e.g. a fence), do NOT leave the scene until a full police report is completed Notification of Driver Suspension, Accidents or similar issues Employees must notify their supervisor or manager within 24 hours of any citation of traffic or driving violation, if the violation occurred while using a company vehicle. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 319 of 389

320 Employees who may be expected to drive for company business must notify their supervisor or manager if their license is suspended, revoked or restricted for any reason Companies will maintain owned or leased vehicles in a safe manner Employees who find defects or repair needs with any company vehicle must notify their supervisor or manager immediately Employees may not drive company vehicles that are in an unsafe condition Pre-Driving Inspection: Tire condition and, if necessary, pressure Spare tire available Lights and turn signals operational Windshield wipers functional Windshield intact (no cracks or breaks) Defroster operational Oil and fluids (windshield cleaner, transmission, brake fluid) present at required levels Brakes functional Mirrors are present, properly adjusted and clean Vehicle loads are secure and within legal limits Emergency materials and equipment (fire extinguishers, accident reporting kit, vehicle registration, etc.) are present, as needed General vehicle condition is appropriate. Scrapes, scratches, dents or other damage should be reported before taking the vehicle on the road Vehicle is of correct size and designed for intended use. 11. Training and Information It is recommended that employees undergo defensive driving or general safe driving training when they are required to operate company owned or leased vehicles Driver and all passengers must wear seatbelts when the vehicle is in motion Cell phone use, manipulating radios or other equipment which may cause distraction is prohibited while driving Drivers shall not exceed the posted speed limit and must maintain a safe distance between other vehicles. 12. Definitions. Driving Responsibilities An employee who drives a vehicle (company owned or leased, or a personal vehicle) for company business purposes. Vehicle a company owned or leased automobile, truck or motorcycle which requires a valid driver s license to operate on public roadways. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 320 of 389

321 SAFE DRIVING VEHICLE INSPECTION CHECKLIST ITEM YES NO Tires are in good condition (tread, pressure) Spare tire is accessible Head-lights operational (regular and high beams) Turn signals operational Windshield wipers operational Washer fluid available Windshield intact (no cracks or breaks) Defroster operational, as needed Oil and fluid levels (brake, transmission, oil) present at required levels Brake lights function Mirrors (side and rearview) present and in good condition Mirrors adjusted for driver Vehicle loads and any storage of materials are secure Fire extinguishers are present, as needed Vehicle registration is available Accident reporting information is available Vehicle is in generally good condition. Note any dents, scratches or other damage issues present: Checklist completed by: Date: Time of Day: Page 8 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 321 of 389

322 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER SAFE DRIVING - BASIC AWARENESS Safe Driving Training Includes: The 3 Factors of Safe Driving The 6 Conditions of Driving The 5 Steps to Decision Driving Passing and Collision Prevention Right of Way Stopping Distance and Types of Stopping Tailgating Driving Attitude INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 9 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 322 of 389

323 NATIONAL GPR SERVICE, INC. SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY STATEMENT October 2013 At National GPR Service, Inc. we believe that integrating safety and health into every operation at our company is of the utmost importance. The health and safety of our employees continues to be the first consideration in our operations. To this extent, National GPR Service, Inc. strives to comply with all applicable laws and regulations that govern our operations. In so doing, we conduct our processes and operations in a manner that reduces or eliminates the conditions that are unhealthful or could cause injury to our employees. Employees are consistently urged to report unsafe conditions in their workplace, and work with National GPR Service of Minnesota, Inc. management to alleviate these conditions where they may exist. Quality or production goals do not supersede the safety of our employees. With this in mind, National GPR Service, Inc. management and staff have implemented a Safety Management Program. This program provides for: The continual commitment of improving safety at our workplace Employee awareness and training with regard to safety issues A commitment to visitors, neighbors, and our community to lessen or eliminate any safety-related issues from our corporation that could impact them Within the scope and applicability of our Safety Management Program, National GPR Service of Minnesota, Inc. has established a goal to have injury and illness incident rates below the industry average. To accomplish this goal, we ask each of our employees to commit not only to their own safety but to the safety of their co-workers and their community as well. National GPR Service, Inc. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 323 of 389

324 COMPANY SPECIFIC CORRECTIVE ACTIONS DATE: ASSESSOR: DEPT OR AREA: SUBM CONDITION COMPLIANT CORRECTED BY COMPLETION DATE COMMENTS A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 324 of 389

325 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY CHECKLIST Completed by: Date: ITEM COMPLIANT? Is an injury prevention program established for construction worksites? [29 CFR (b)(1)] Does the program include regular inspections by a designated competent person of the worksite, materials, and equipment? [29 CFR (b)(2)] When machines, tools, materials, or equipment are identified as unsafe, is one of these procedures followed? [29 CFR (b)(3)] a. they are tagged b. the controls are locked to render them inoperable; or c. they are immediately removed from the work area? Are only qualified employees (by training or experience) permitted to operate machinery? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Are all employees trained to recognize and avoid unsafe conditions? Do they know the regulations applicable to the work environment? [29 CFR (b)(2)] Have employees been instructed regarding the safe handling and use of poisons, caustics, and other harmful substances? Are they aware of the hazards, personal hygiene, and personal protective measures required? [29 CFR (b)(3)] In areas where harmful plants or animals may be present, have employees been instructed regarding the hazards, how to avoid injury, and first aid procedures to be used in the event of injury? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Have employees who are required to handle or use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic materials been instructed in the safe handling and use of these materials? [29 CFR (b)(5)] Have all employees who are required to enter confined or enclosed spaces been instructed in the nature of the hazards involved, the necessary precautions to take, and the use of protective and emergency equipment required? [29 CFR (b)(6)(i)] Are medical personnel available for advice and consultation? [29 CFR and (a)] Are provisions made in advance of any project for prompt medical attention in case of serious injury? [29 CFR (b)] If emergency medical care is not readily available, is a trained person available to render first aid? [29 CFR (c)] Are first-aid supplies readily available at the worksite? [29 CFR (d)(1)] YES NO Are first-aid supplies at the worksite in a weatherproof container with individual sealed packages for each type of item? [29 CFR (d)(2)] YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 325 of 389

326 ITEM COMPLIANT? Are first-aid supplies checked to replace expended items each time they are sent to the worksite and at least weekly if left at the worksite? [29 CFR (d)(2)] Is transportation available for taking an injured person to medical care, or is a communication system available for contacting an ambulance service? [29 CFR (e)] Are telephone numbers of physicians, hospitals, or ambulances conspicuously posted at the worksite? [29 CFR (f)] Is an adequate supply of drinking water at or near the worksite? [29 CFR (a)(1)] If portable drinking water containers are used at the worksite, can they be tightly closed and are they equipped with a tap? [29 CFR (a)(2)] Is dipping water from a drinking water container and use of a common drinking cup prohibited? [29 CFR (a)(2) and (4)] Are washing facilities at or near the worksite for employees who handle paints, coatings, pesticides, or other harmful contaminants? [29 CFR (f)] Has an effective fire protection and prevention program been established at the worksite through all phases of construction, repair, or alteration? [29 CFR ] Has all form and scrap lumber with protruding nails, re-bar and all other debris been cleared from work areas, passageways, and stairs in and around buildings or other structures? [29 CFR (a)] Is combustible scrap and debris removed from the work area at regular intervals during the course of construction? [29 CFR (b) and (c)] Are containers provided for the collection and separation of waste, trash, oily and used rags, and other refuse? [29 CFR (c)] Are all solvent wastes, oily rags, and flammable liquids kept in fire-resistant, covered containers until removed from the work area? [29 CFR (e)] Are all construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors, offices, labs, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress well lighted? [29 CFR and ] Is appropriate personal protective equipment used in all operations where hazardous conditions exist? [29 CFR ] Are all materials that are stored in tiers stacked, racked, blocked, interlocked, or otherwise secured to prevent sliding, falling, or collapse? [29 CFR (a)(1)] Is the minimum safe load limit of floors within buildings and structures, in pounds per square foot, conspicuously posted in all storage areas? [29 CFR (a)(2)] Are maximum safe loads always maintained? [29 CFR (a)(2)] YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 326 of 389

327 ITEM COMPLIANT? Are aisles and passageways kept clear to provide for the free and safe movement of material-handling equipment and people? [29 CFR (a)(3)] YES NO Are such areas kept in good repair? [29 CFR (a)(3)] YES NO Where a difference in road or working level exists, are means such as ramps, blocking, or grading provided to ensure the safe movement of vehicles between two levels? [29 CFR (a)(4)] Is material stored inside buildings placed more than 6 feet away from any hoistway or inside floor openings, or more than 10 feet away from an exterior wall? [29 CFR (b)(1)] Note: The exterior wall must not extend beyond the top of the material stored. Are non-compatible materials segregated in storage? [29 CFR (b)(3)] YES NO Are bagged materials stacked by stepping-back the layers and cross-keying the stack at least every 10 bags? [29 CFR (b)(4)] Is it prohibited to store more material on scaffolds or runways than needed for the immediate operation? [29 CFR (b)(5)] Are brick stacks limited to 7 feet in height? [29 CFR (b)(6)] Note: When a loose brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, it must be tapered back 2 inches on every foot of height above the 4 foot level. When masonry blocks are stacked higher than 6 feet, is the stack tapered back one-half block per tier above the 6-foot level? [29 CFR (b)(7)] Are all nails withdrawn from lumber before lumber is stacked? [29 CFR (b)(8)(i)] Is lumber stacked on level and solidly supported sills? [29 CFR (b)(8)(ii)] Is lumber stacked in a stable, self-supporting manner? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iii)] Are all lumber piles 20 feet or less in height? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iv)] YES NO Are lumber piles to be handled manually stacked a height of 16 feet or less? [29 CFR (b)(8)(iv)] Are all structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock other cylindrical material (unless racked) stacked and blocked to prevent spreading or tilting? [29 CFR (b)(9)] Are all masonry walls over 8 feet in height braced to prevent overturning? [29 CFR (b)] YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 327 of 389

328 GENERAL OR PROFESSIONAL OFFICE SAFETY CHECKLIST Completed by: Date: ITEM COMPLIANT? Building and Structure Are floors well maintained to provide secure footing? YES NO Are aisles sufficiently wide to provide easy movement? YES NO Are stairs free of chips or cracks? YES NO Are non-slip surfaces provided? YES NO Are stairwells properly illuminated? YES NO Are handrails provided and securely fastened? YES NO Are non-slip feet on all portable elevated structures? YES NO Noise and HVAC issues Is the level of noise conducive to concentration? YES NO Is ventilation and thermal comfort adequate? YES NO Tools and Similar Equipment Are scissors, knives, blades, etc. safely used and stored? YES NO Is use of sharp spindle files prohibited? YES NO Furniture and Fixtures Are fixtures and furniture free of splinters or sharp edges? YES NO Are desk and file drawers easily operated? YES NO Are file cabinets anchored to prevent tipping? YES NO Is castered furniture easy to move? YES NO The desk should be 68cm 72cm high. The dimensions should be a minimum of 90cm x 75cm for paperwork tasks or 115cm x 90cm for mixed clerical and computing tasks YES NO Is the desk suitable in size for the work being undertaken? YES NO The chair should provide lumbar support, have height and back rest adjustment and be on a 5 star castor base. Chairs with non-adjustable armrests are not recommended for desk-based work. YES NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 328 of 389

329 ITEM COMPLIANT? Does the chair have lumbar support, adjustment of the height and the backrest and a 5 star castor base? Is the depth of the seat appropriate? The thighs should be fully supported with 2-3-finger space behind the knees when seated and with the back fully supported by the chair. Adjust chair height (if the desk is adjustable start with the foot position, see below). When seated the elbows should be at or slightly above the desk when arms are at the side of the body and shoulders relaxed. When keying, the forearms should be parallel with the floor and elbows bent at 90 degrees, with the wrist in the neutral position, not resting on the desk. The test position is with the fingers on the home keys (keys asdf left hand and ;lkjj for the right hand). Can the chair height be adjusted to the correct height needed for the correct keying position? Feet should be resting comfortably on the floor with knees bent at 90 degrees. The thighs should be parallel with the floor. If this cannot be achieved and the desk is not adjustable in height a footstool is required. Is a footstool required? YES NO Machines and Equipment Are heavy machines properly and securely mounted? YES NO Is all electrical machinery equipped with ground wire? YES NO Is use of extension cords prohibited? YES NO Are all electric cords, plugs, and switches in good repair? YES NO Are moving parts and "pinch points" guarded? YES NO Are operators of machines properly trained? YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO Are machines turned off and/or electric plugs disconnected when repairs or adjustments are made? Fire Prevention Is smoking prohibited in hazardous areas, or permitted only in specifically designated areas with receptacles maintained? YES YES NO NO Are all flammable materials stored in metal cabinets? YES NO Are used cleaning wastes or rags kept in closed metal containers? (Self-closing containers are recommended.) YES NO Are storage areas kept clean and orderly? YES NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 329 of 389

330 ITEM COMPLIANT? Are all electric machines or heat producing elements turned off when not in use? YES NO Are heating elements - coffee makers, griddles, portable electric heaters) properly wired, safely placed, and maintained? YES NO Are proper type and number of fire extinguishers available to trained employees? YES NO Are employees instructed in fire reporting and emergency duties? YES NO Lighting. Preferably the person (or the computer screen) should not be facing an uncovered window. If the window is not covered, the desk should be positioned at right angles to the window. As a general rule, sit at 90 right angles to the main light source. Can the lighting be adjusted? (e.g with Venetian blinds) YES NO Is the screen free from any reflection and able to be seen easily i.e. no glare present? The screen should be perpendicular or vertical not tilted. Is the desk positioned at right angles to the window or main source of light? YES NO Is the level and positioning of overhead lighting satisfactory? YES NO Equipment Layout and Access Commonly used items should be kept in easy reach. YES NO YES NO Is the layout of the work area and items to be used appropriate to prevent undue twisting or lifting? YES NO Is access and egress to the work area free from obstacles? YES NO Is the area free of trip or slip hazards? YES NO Are storage facilities adequate? YES NO Material Handling Is the area free from manual handling hazards? Heavy or frequently used items should be stored at waist height. YES NO Is a step stool available to access higher shelves? YES NO Are employees instructed in the proper lifting techniques? YES NO Workstation and Equipment. Always keep the spine in neutral i.e. the natural S shape. Stay symmetrical (i.e. directly in front of the keyboard and the screen equipment do not sit twisted. Is the top of the computer screen (toolbar) at eye level when seated in the chair and looking straight ahead? YES NO If glasses are worn which affect viewing of the screen, can a neutral neck position be maintained? YES NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 330 of 389

331 ITEM COMPLIANT? Is the keyboard straight on the desk, approximately 3cm from the edge of the desk and in line with the body and the monitor? YES NO Is the monitor at least arms distance when seated in front? YES NO Are the characters on the computer display set at an appropriate size and color for ease of reading? Is a document holder available? Document holders should be placed between the keyboard and the hard-drive Is the image on the screen steady? If it flickers the refresh rate may need to be reset. Is the mouse being used at the same level and as close as possible to the keyboard? Elbows should not be forward of the trunk when keying and using the mouse. Does the mouse have a scroll button feature and is it used? It is recommended that the middle finger be placed on the scroll button to assist in maintaining the correct position of the hand on the mouse and avoid twisting through the wrist. Can posture be changed at least every hour? Rest breaks are recommended every 5 minutes for every 30 minutes of work, or 10 minutes every hour. It is preferable to have a variety in tasks in order to get the change in posture. Does the person have control over their workload and ability to take breaks? YES NO YES YES YES YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 331 of 389

332 TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER TRAINING TOPIC: INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 332 of 389

333 PROGRAM OVERVIEW SCAFFOLDING SAFETY PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA - 29 CFR Safety Requirements for Scaffolding - 29 CFR Manually Propelled Mobile Scaffolds - 29 CFR INTRODUCTION: Scaffolds are a major source of injuries and fatalities; this poses a serious problem for exposed workers and their employer. This safety program addresses the issues of evaluating and identifying potential deficiencies, evaluating the associated potential hazards, communicating information concerning these hazards, and establishing appropriate procedures and protective measures for employees. TRAINING: Employees must be trained prior to job assignment, by competent personnel Refresher training will be conducted on an as needed basis ACTIVITIES: Ensure only trained and qualified individuals erect or dismantle scaffolding Communicate, implement, and enforce scaffolding safety policies Ensure scaffolding meets the minimum requirements for loading, strength, position and use for the job, task or activity Provide the needed equipment and materials for scaffolding Ensure only certified professional engineers design scaffolds where scaffolding is built or erected for a specific purpose Ensure inspections are performed and documented Enforce the use of guardrail systems and/or fall protection equipment FORMS: Training Attendance Roster 78. Purpose 79. Scope 80. Responsibilities 81. Procedure 82. Safety Information 83. Training Information & Requirements 84. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 333 of 389

334 Scaffolding Safety Program 1. Purpose. This safety program is designed to establish clear company goals with regard to the safe use, erection and dismantling of scaffolds. The goals and objectives will be communicated to all required personnel. The company will review and evaluate this safety program: 1.1 On an annual basis, or more frequently as needed. 1.2 When changes occur to the governing regulatory standards that prompt revision of this document. 1.3 When facility operational changes occur that require a revision of this document. 2. Scope. This program applies only to work areas where scaffolding is used, regardless of the number of workers employed or the number of work shifts. 3. Responsibilities. 3.1 Management and Supervisors: Ensure only trained and qualified individuals erect or dismantle scaffolding Ensure scaffolding meets the minimum requirements for loading, strength, position and use for the job, task or activity Ensure only certified professional engineers design scaffolds where scaffolding is built or erected for a specific purpose (i.e. scaffolding is designed, engineered and built onsite and not pre-manufactured by a vendor) Ensure inspections are performed and documented Ensure guardrail systems and/or fall protection equipment is provided and used. 3.2 Employees: Attend training as needed or required Erect and dismantle scaffolding only by manufacturer s directions or under the supervision of a professional engineer Inspect scaffolds, as needed or required Immediately report hazards or hazardous conditions to your supervisor Utilize fall protection equipment, as needed or required. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 334 of 389

335 3.3 Safety Officer (as needed or required): 4. Procedure Assist in the development and implementation of this program. 4.1 Company Fixed Scaffolding Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following general precautions concerning the care and use of scaffolding will be observed: Footing and anchorages for scaffolds will be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load without settling or displacement. Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes, loose brick, or concrete blocks will not be used to support scaffolds or planks Scaffolds and their components will be capable of supporting without failure at least four times the maximum intended load Scaffolds will be maintained in a safe condition at all times in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations. Fixed scaffolds will not be altered or moved horizontally while they are in use or occupied Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause will be immediately repaired and will not be used until repairs have been completed Scaffolds will not be loaded in excess of the working load for which they are intended All load-carrying timber members of scaffold framing will be a minimum of 1,500 f. (Stress Grade) construction grade lumber All planking will be Scaffold Grade as recognized by grading rules for the type of wood used. The scaffold manufacturer s recommendations will be followed Nails or bolts used in the construction of scaffolds will be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the scaffold. Nails will not be subjected to a straight pull and will be driven full length All planking or platforms will be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or secured from movement An access Scaffold or equivalent safe access will be provided Scaffold planks will extend over their end supports not less than 6 inches or more than 18 inches The poles, legs, or uprights of scaffolds will be plumb, and securely and rigidly braced to prevent swaying and displacement Materials being hoisted onto a scaffold will have a tag line. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 335 of 389

336 Overhead protection will be provided for men on a scaffold exposed to overhead hazards Scaffolds will be provided with a screen between the toe-board and the guardrail, extending along the entire opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S. Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or the equivalent, where persons are required to work or pass under the scaffolds Employees will not work on scaffolds which are covered with ice or snow, unless all ice or snow is removed and planking sanded to prevent slipping Tools, materials, and debris will not be allowed to accumulate in quantities to cause a hazard Only treated or protected fiber rope will be used for or near any work involving the use of corrosive substances or chemicals Wire or fiber rope used for scaffold suspension will be capable of supporting at least six times the intended load The use of shore scaffolds or lean-to scaffolds will not be used Lumber sizes refer to nominal sizes except where otherwise stated Scaffolds will be secured to permanent structures, through use of anchor bolts, reveal bolts, or other equivalent means. Window cleaners' anchor bolts will not be used Special precautions will be taken to protect scaffold members, including any wire or fiber ropes, when using a heat-producing process. 4.2 Company Mobile (Rolling) Scaffolding Safety Policy. To insure safety and serviceability the following general precautions concerning the care and use of scaffolding will be observed: Working loads. Work platforms and scaffolds will be capable of carrying the design load under varying circumstances depending upon the conditions of use The design load of all scaffolds will be calculated on the basis of: Light - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 25 pounds per square foot Medium - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 50 pounds per square foot Heavy - Designed and constructed to carry a working load of 75 pounds per square foot. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 336 of 389

337 4.2.2 Work levels. The maximum work level height will not exceed four (4) times the minimum or least base dimensions of any mobile scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit does not meet this requirement, suitable outrigger frames will be employed to achieve this least base dimension, or provisions will be made to guy or brace the unit against tipping The minimum platform width for any work level will not be less than 20 inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). Ladder stands will have a minimum step width of 16 inches The supporting structure for the work level will be rigidly braced, using adequate cross bracing or diagonal bracing with rigid platforms at each work level The work level platform of scaffolds (towers) will be of wood, aluminum, or plywood planking, steel or expanded metal, for the full width of the scaffold except for necessary openings. Work platforms will be secured in place. All planking will be 2-inch (nominal) scaffold grade minimum 1,500 f. (stress grade) construction-grade lumber or equivalent All scaffold work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a standard (4-inch nominal) toe-board All work levels 10 feet or higher above the ground or floor will have a guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the equivalent installed no less than 36 inches or more than 42 inches high, with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by 4-inch nominal lumber or equivalent Wheels or casters. Wheels or casters will be inspected to ensure that they are provided with strength and dimensions to support four (4) times the design working load All scaffold casters will be inspected to ensure that they are provided with a positive wheel and/or swivel lock to prevent movement Nails, bolts, or other fasteners. Nails, bolts and other fasteners used in the construction of ladders, scaffolds, and towers will be of adequate size and in sufficient numbers at each connection to develop the designed strength of the unit. Nails will be driven full length. (All nails should be immediately withdrawn from dismantled lumber.) All exposed surfaces will be free from sharp edges, burrs or other safety hazards Where leveling of the elevated work platform is required, screw jacks or other suitable means for adjusting the height will be used Adjusting screws may not be extended more than 12 inches. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 337 of 389

338 4.2.5 Movement of Scaffolds. Employees are not permitted to ride rolling scaffolds during relocation Before moving the platform, secure all equipment and material Casters or wheels must have a serviceable locking device Be aware of overhead obstructions when moving scaffolds Never run over electrical cords Never pull scaffolds from the top, always push at base level Work only from the platform area; never extend work beyond guard railing. 4.3 Erecting of Scaffolding. Only trained and authorized employees of the company or its contractors will supervise the erection of scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulatory standards and information plus guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following apply: Manufacturer s erection instructions will be followed Advance planning considerations will be followed during the erection process Only trained and authorized employees will supervise the erection of scaffolding Each component will be visually inspected before use Defective or unserviceable materials will not be used Only approved lumber will be used Consult with the project manager where any instructions are unclear. 5. Safety Information. 5.1 Manufacturer Recommendations for Safety. To insure safety and serviceability the manufacturer general precautions concerning the care and use of wooden scaffolding will be observed. 5.2 Pre-Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. The three main areas of inspection are for rust, straightness of members, and welds. Only trained employees of the company or its contractors will conduct the pre-inspection. Pertinent OSHA regulatory standards and information plus guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following as a minimum apply: Rust. Heavily rusted scaffolding equipment is a possible sign of abuse or neglect. Severely rusted components should be thoroughly inspected and cleaned before approved for use. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 338 of 389

339 5.2.2 Straightness of members. Mishandling, trucking and storing may cause damage to scaffolding equipment. All members or parts of all steel scaffolding components should be straight and free from bends, kinks or dents Welds. Scaffolding equipment should be checked before use for damaged welds and any piece of equipment showing damaged welds or rewelding beyond the original factory weld should not be used. The factory weld reference pertains to location and quality of re-welds Check serviceability of locking devices Check alignment of coupling pins and braces Check serviceability of caster brakes (rolling scaffolds) Accident prevention tags shall be used as a temporary means of warning employees of an existing hazard. They shall not be used in place of, or as a substitute for, accident prevention signs. Employers shall follow tag specifications. 5.3 Final Inspection of Erected Scaffolding. Only trained and authorized employees of the company or its contractors will conduct the final inspection of erected scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulatory standards and information plus guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following as a minimum apply: Check for proper support under every leg of every frame Check for wash out (if outside) due to rain Check to ensure all base plates or adjustment screws are in firm contact with supports Check frames for plumb and square in both directions Check serviceability and correctness of all cross braces Check to ensure that all planking and accessories are properly installed Check to ensure that all guard rails are in place Recheck periodically to ensure conditions remain safe. 5.4 Dismantling of Scaffolding. Only trained and authorized employees of the company or its contractors will supervise the dismantling of scaffolding. Pertinent OSHA regulatory standards and information plus guidance provided by the manufacturer of the particular type of scaffolding will be used. The following apply: Manufacturers dismantling instructions will be followed Relocation planning considerations will be considered during the dismantling process Dismantling will be supervised by a competent employee. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 339 of 389

340 5.4.4 Each component will be visually inspected after use Defective or unserviceable materials will not be stored with serviceable materials Avoid dropping or throwing the components as this could result in damage to the equipment Consult with the project manager where any instructions are unclear. 6. Training and Information. 6.1 General. A training program will be provided for all employees who will be using scaffolding in the course of their duties. The training will be conducted by competent personnel. The program will include but will not be limited to: A description of fall hazards in the work area or job site Procedures for using fall prevention and protection systems Scaffolding access and egress procedures Scaffolding equipment limitations Inspection and storage procedures for the equipment 6.2 Initial training. Training will be conducted prior to job assignment. The company will provide training to ensure that the purpose, function, and proper use of scaffolding is understood by employees and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application and usage is acquired by employees. This safety program will be provided to and read by all employees receiving training. The training will include, as a minimum the following: Types of scaffolding used Recognition of applicable fall hazards associated with the work to be completed and the locations of such Load determination and balancing requirements Safety precautions in the use of scaffolds All other employees, whose work operations are or may be in an area where scaffolding may be utilized, will be instructed to an awareness level concerning the associated hazards Equipment maintenance and inspection requirements Equipment strengths and limitations Verification. The company will verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The documentation will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 340 of 389

341 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 341 of 389

342 6.3 Refresher training. This safety program will be provided to and read by all employees receiving refresher training. The training content will be identical to initial training. Refresher training will be conducted on an as needed basis or when the following conditions are met, whichever event occurs sooner Whenever (and prior to) a change in their job assignments, a change in the type of scaffolding equipment used, or when a known hazard is added to the work environment which affects this safety program Additional retraining will also be conducted whenever a periodic inspection reveals, or whenever there is reason to believe, that there are deviations from or inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of scaffolding equipment or procedures Whenever a scaffolding safety procedure fails The retraining will reestablish employee proficiency and introduce new or revised methods and procedures, as necessary. 7. Definitions Verification. The company will verify that employee training has been accomplished and is being kept up to date. The documentation will contain each employee's name and dates of training. Training will be accomplished by competent personnel. Lumber size - Refers to nominal sizes except where otherwise stated National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 342 of 389

343 Scaffold Use Training Includes: Types of Scaffolding General Hazards and Fall Protection Construction and Support Safe Access Competent Person Mobie and Suspension Scaffolding Aerial Lifts and Scissor Lifts TRAINING ATTENDANCE ROSTER SCAFFOLD USE INSTRUCTOR: DATE: LOCATION: NAME (Please Print) SIGNATURE FIRST - MI - LAST By signing below, I attest that I have attended the safety training for the topic indicated, and will abide by the safety information, procedures, rules, regulations and/or company policy as presented and instructed Name of Interpreter, if utilized: Page 10 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 343 of 389

344 SCISSOR LIFT OPERATOR DAILY CHECKLIST Items to Be Inspected Emergency controls are in proper working condition? (Emergency Stop Device and emergency lowering function) Safety devices are functional? (Foot pedal, spring lock, etc.) All safety indicator lights work properly and notion alarms are functional? Fire extinguisher on platform (recommended)? All controls function properly, are clean and clearly labeled? Ground operating controls successfully over-ride the aerial controls? Fuel level is acceptable and the system is not leaking? Hydraulic level is acceptable and the system is not leaking? Are there any loose or missing parts? (Bolts, fasteners, braces, brackets, etc.) Work platform is clean, dry and clear of debris? Tires, wheels, and lug nuts are in good condition? No defects such as cracked welds, damaged control cables, damaged wire harness or other obvious damage. Slide pad is not worn down? Braking devices are operating properly? The manufacturer s operations manual is stored on the lift (in all languages of the operators)? All switch and mechanical guards are in good condition and properly installed? Platform gate and Guardrails are in place and in good condition? Other personal protective devices are in good condition? Stabilizers, outriggers and/or extending axles function properly? Working lights are operational? All manufacturer required inspections of all hydraulic control relief valves and other manufacturer requirements have been completed within the required time period? Check inspection sticker on equipment for validation. Battery indicator shows an acceptable level remaining? Is the total load within the rated capacity? SCISSOR LIFT INSPECTED BY: OK Signature: Date: Scissor lift is safe to operate? Yes No Comments: Page 6 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 344 of 389

345 Scissor Lift Performance Evaluation Operator: Date: Instructor: Company Name: Follows Pre-Operation Inspection Safe Start Up Clear the area of bystanders Determine if power line precautions are required Vehicle is positioned on level ground Set the parking brake Chock the wheels Engage power supply Set the outriggers (as applicable) Make sure vehicle is stable before entering platform and raising and lowering the platform Follow additional procedures in operator s manual Safe Maneuvering Doesn t endanger people or property Avoids jerking controls Avoids potential crush points Understands each control and its specific function Smoothly moves machine in forward & reverse Smoothly extends and retracts lift platform Operates equipment according to manufacturer s instructions Safe Shut-down Slowly lowers boom to rest on supports Raises the outriggers (as applicable) Shuts off power supply Removes outrigger pads (if applicable) and wheel chocks Follows procedures in operator s manual Satisfactory Needs Improvement Page 7 National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 345 of 389

346 PROGRAM OVERVIEW SCISSORS LIFT PROGRAM REGULATORY STANDARD: OSHA 29CFR and INTRODUCTION: A scissors lift is a type of mobile or moveable scaffold that is power driven and able to lift a platform vertically (up and down). Scissors Lifts must be inspected before use and operators must understand the controls and safety functions of the lift. Guardrail systems are usually required, and should operators remove any part of the guardrail or step out of the lift, a personal fall arrest system is required to be utilized when working at height. TRAINING: Employees trained prior to use, in both a classroom component and an evaluation of the operator performance with the equipment ACTIVITIES: Identify the tasks that require a scissors lift Maintain manufacturer s requirements, limits and documentation Conduct daily inspections prior to use, recommended to document inspections Ensure only trained operators use lift equipment Implement, maintain, and inspect fall arrest systems as required FORMS: Scissors Lift Operator Daily Checklist Scissors Lift Operator Evaluation Assessment Scissors Lift Training Wallet Cards Training Attendance Roster 85. Purpose 86. Scope 87. Responsibilities 88. Procedure 89. Safety Information 90. Training Information & Requirements 91. Definitions Table of Contents National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 346 of 389

347 General Safety Awareness Program 5. Purpose. This document provides a written safety program outlining the rules and requirements for the design, construction, and use of mobile work platforms (scissors lifts) and similar mobile towers. 6. Scope. Applies to any use of scissors lift equipment by company employees. 7. Responsibilities. 7.1 Area Management: Ensures equipment is maintained in a safe condition for use Ensures operators are appropriately trained in the use of the equipment, and protective systems, based on manufacturer s recommendations. 7.2 Employees who use scissors lifts: Completes operator safety training (classroom and practical) Uses the equipment in a safe manner, in accordance with manufacturer and company requirements Inspects equipment before use. Reports unsafe conditions or equipment defects immediately upon discovery Utilizes fall protection systems, as required. 7.3 Safety Representative must (as needed): 8. Procedure Assist in the implementation of this program. 8.1 Employees must remain in the lift, with both feet on the floor system, unless a fall protection harness is used. If the lift is equipped with a platform that extends outside the wheelbase of the lift, fall protection must be worn when working from the extended portion, even if a guardrail system is in place. 8.2 Before a scissor lift is moved, each employee on the lift shall be made aware of the move. 8.3 Safe Operation: Operators must understand the controls and function of the lift Maintain safe distances from power lines. Be aware of external utility lines (power, cable, etc) when using near the outside walls of the structure Maintain safe clearances from internal fixtures (lights, sprinkler heads and pipes) 8.4 Fall Protection Systems: Fall Protection (body harness and lanyard) is required if the operator or worker will: Step off the lift onto another surface area (with a fall hazard of 6 feet or more) that is not protected by a guardrail Step onto the toe-board, mid-rail or top rail for any reason. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 347 of 389

348 Lean out over the guardrail for any reason Step out onto an extendable platform (as part of the scissors lift), that extends outside the wheelbase of the lift Work in a scissors lift where the guardrail does not meet regulatory height or strength requirements From a scissors lift, it is allowable to secure your personal fall arrest system (lanyard attached to a full body harness) to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while working, but only if that practice does not present a hazard and other means of tie-off or fall protection means are not feasible. 9. Safety Information. 9.1 General Safety Requirements: Scissors lifts are considered to be a form of scaffolding and as such, are required to comply with the requirements for mobile scaffolds as follows: They must be braced or have brake controls to hold the basket in place and to prevent collapse No movement when lift is in the up position. The lift must be totally folded into its lowest position for movement. When the lift is in the up position, the brakes or stability outriggers (as applicable) must be applied to prevent the base from moving Platforms that extend beyond the wheel base may not be used unless outrigger frames or equivalent stability devices are used Before a lift is moved, each employee on the lift shall be made aware of the move, and the basket lowered to its bottom most position before moving. 9.2 Equipment Specifications: Scissors lifts must conform and be maintained to original manufacturer requirements and meet ANSI requirements They must be capable of withstanding 4 times their intended load, under varying conditions of use. Platform capabilities must be strong enough to withstand 1000 lbs for every 2.5 square foot of standing area All working and moving parts must be integral to the design of the equipment. All parts and materials must be protected against corrosion or deterioration All exposed surfaces must be free from sharp edges, burrs or other safety hazards Wheels must be maintained in good operating condition, lock in place and not be capable of movement unless the operator controls are engaged for movement. 9.3 Guardrail Systems: All sides must be protected by a standard guardrail system (top rail at approximately 42 height, midrail approximately 21 from standing surface) which meets the requirements for guardrail system height and strength requirements Toe-boards are required if the lift goes 10 feet or higher from the ground or floor surface. 9.4 Entry and exit area: must be provided on one end of the lift The opening must be provided with a movable gate, or safety chains which meet equivalent strength requirements for guardrail systems. If chains are used, they must have both a top and mid-rail chain. National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 348 of 389

349 9.4.2 Safe access to the lift must be provided by a ladder or steps. These ladder steps are normally built into the scissors lift and must be used to safely enter and exit the lift Jumping from the lift to the ground to dismount is prohibited Climbing the cross-braces to access the lift is prohibited. 9.5 Safe Use Requirements: Lifts must be stable when stationary, in either the folded or extended mode, and be prevented from tipping during movement Lifts shall be plumb, level, and squared. All brace connections shall be secured Manual force used to move the lift shall be applied as close to the base as practicable, but not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting surface Platforms must be maintained within 3 degrees of level during use. Where leveling of the lift is necessary, screw jacks or equivalent means shall be used Platforms must be free from holes, pits or deformities through which materials may fall, or where these deformities may contribute to the collapse of the system or similar hazards Speed must be limited to 3 feet per second or less. 10. Training and Information 6.2 Operators must be trained in the safe use requirements of each type of lift used per manufacturer s recommendations, and in fall protection where its use would be required. 7. Definitions. Scissors Lift - a type of mobile or moveable scaffold that is power driven and able to lift a platform vertically (up and down). Scissors lifts may have a platform that extends outward, but the basket of the lift does not rotate or move outside the wheelbase of the lift (like a cherry picker, fire truck or utility truck). National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 349 of 389

350 COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. COMPANY: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT HAS BEEN SUCCESSFULLY TESTED AND TRAINED IN AERIAL LIFT OPERATIONS USE AND CARE AND IS QUALIFIED TO USE A LIFT. OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE OPERATOR SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE CERTIFIER SIGNATURE DATE National Ground Penetrating Radar Service, Inc. - Safety Manual Page 350 of 389